Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
R2021-128 2021-06-14
RESOLUTION NO. R2021-128 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract for the Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Project, to One Global Telecom, in the amount of $239,999.58. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for construction of the Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Project have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards the bid to One Global Telecom, in the amount of $239,999.58. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Project. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 14th day of June, A.D., 2021. Vz(- IN COLE AYOR TE T: C STAL ROAN, TRMC, CMC CITY SECRETARY APPROVED AS TO FORM: a.L— ark DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY ,,,„,, QEPRLAIv� .. Project Manual for: Hughes Ranch Road — Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan COP Project No. TR1201 Bid No.: 0321-28 March 2021 Prepared By: ::i: CobbFendley Project Manual for: Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan COP Project No.: TR1201 Bid No.: 0321-28 March 2021 Prepared By: Cobb, FendIey & Associates, Inc. KARL R©THERMEL 116355 NAL o'¢ 03/04/2021 0 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Section 00100 INVITATION TO BID CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Losiest Responsible Bidder Sealed Electronic Bids will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic bids shall be submitted through the City's web site at: httosi/nearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx All interested Bidders are required to register as a "Supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Bid time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services, New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids(a,pearlandtx. gov. All Bids submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Bids, shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall Annex located at 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic bids will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, April 1, 2021. All Bids shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted bids shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: TR1201 BID NO.: 0321-28 A Non -Mandatory Pre -Bid Conference will be held virtually and in person at the City of Pearland City Hall Council Chambers at 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 11:00 a.m. on March 18, 2021. Virtual Option: To join by phone, dial in #: 1-408-418-9388. Meeting # 182109 7563; Meeting Password: T829Rj9Am58 The project will entail the installation of 12-strand single mode and a 24-strand single mode fiber optic cable via 2"HDPE conduit, communication ground boxes, and fiber markers for a new fiber connection between the City's network connection at the Westside Event Center along Country Place Parkway, then to the traffic signal controller cabinet at intersection of CR 403 (Hughes 07-2017 00100 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID Ranch Road) and Smith Ranch Road, then to controller cabinet at the intersection of Hughes Ranch Road and Miller Ranch Road, then to controller cabinet at the intersection of Hughes Ranch Road and Bryan Court. From the Bryan Court traffic controller cabinet, the fiber backbone will extend eastward to Cullen Boulevard for future connection to the proposed controller cabinet at the Hughes Ranch Road and Cullen Boulevard intersection. Two school flashing beacon assemblies near Challenger Elementary will have fiber connections to the network via a ground box (network connections to be completed after the installation of the flasher assemblies). Upon award of a contract, the successful Bidder will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, `Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals, RFI's, RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, intemet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications, documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, Section 00200. Electronic Bid Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: httpsJ/pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. Amtek Plan Room 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction — Dodge Reports (713) 956-0100 (713) 334-7100 (832) 613-0201 1-800-393-6343 No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and bid documents obtained through the City's E- bid System. BIDDERS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E-BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A BID EVEN IF BID DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Bidders accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications bid forms and addenda required for bidding. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid System shall 07-2017 00100 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO BID scan and up -load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. The successful Bidder must firrnish Performance and Payment, Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended, upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of 'Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful bidder shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible bidders will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally - Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such. Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. DBE/SBE Goal: The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal for this project is 0%. The Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal for this project is 0%. DBEs and SBEs selected must be TxDOT approved. Race neutral participation is encouraged and can be achieved through various supplier and subcontracting opportunities. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded on the basis of Lowest Responsible Bidder. In identifying this criteria the City will consider: 1) lowest total bid price for all work listed and specifically requested, including but not limited to: Base Bid, Extra Work items and selected Alternates. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on any combination of the above considered to b e in its best interests or to reject any or all bids. A bid that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the bid price. Crystal Roan City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date March 10, 2021 Second Publication date March 17, 2021 07-2017 00100 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (LRB) 1. Defined Terms 1.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City". Both terms are synonymous and refer to the City of Pearland and may be used inter -changeably. 1.2 The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub -bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the Lowest Responsible Bidder to whom the Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bid Documents" includes the Invitation to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Proposal, and the proposed Contract Documents (plans and specifications including all Addenda issued prior to bid opening). 1.3 The term "E-bid System" refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web - based system (Ion Wave) that provides all Bid Documents electronically to interested parties (potential Bidders and forms the pathway for Bidders to submit bids in response to The Invitation to Bid. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Bidders' electronic response submitted on the electronic Bid Proposal with all required attachments to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or "e-bid" are used inter -changeably to describe the above bid submittal process to submit a bid to the City in response to an Invitation to Bidders. 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web -based contract administration and construction records management software used by the contracting parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized project information hub for communications and document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for accessing this system will be issued to the successful Bidder at the pre -Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Bidding Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1.7 The term "Alternate(s)" or "Add Alternate(s)" as used here inter -changeably are defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based on the Owner's sole acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor, material, equipment and overhead costs to perfoiiii the work as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate work item shall be added to the Base Bid price and made a part of the Contract price. 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner's E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Bid documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Interested Bidders MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on 08-2018 00200 - 1 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services, New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Bidder's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration infoiiiiation providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of future bid opportunities. Downloading any project bid data will automatically place the bidder's contact information on the list of plan holders and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates, addenda, changes or additional information associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Bid Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Bidder's use, but the Bid Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to: ebids@pearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Bidding Documents 3.1 Complete sets of "electronic" Bidding Documents are available for download to registered Bidders at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: hftps://pearlandionwave.net/Login.aspx. Interested Bidders must register as a "Supplier" on this site in order to receive the Bid Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Bid Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Bidder accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Bid Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications, addenda or additional information from the City or its Engineer. 3.3 Copies of Bidding Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Bidders. It is recorrunended that all interested Bidders, whether bidding directly to the Owner or Sub-bidders/Vendors providing pricing to a Bidder, register as a Supplier and download all of the project Bid Documents. 3.4 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bid Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents including, but not limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. 3.5 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bid Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 08-2018 00200 - 2 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4. Qualifications of Bidders 4.1 In determining to whom to award a contract, the City of Pearland may consider, in addition to the other selection criteria identified in section 16 of these Instructions to Bidders, the following Qualifications of Bidder, and each Bidder must be prepared to submit within two (2) days of Owner's request any or all of such Qualifications requested. Failure to provide this information within the specified time frame may be cause for rejection of the Bid. 1) A brief narrative of previous experience of the Bidder with projects of a similar nature and scope; specifically including a list of 5 representative projects completed by the Bidder of a similar nature and scope to the work covered by this proposed Contract. The references for the projects provided must include the cost of the project, Owner's name, Engineer or prime contact and telephone number; 2) A list, including owner name and project location, of on -going projects and contracts for construction of projects of the Bidder which are not yet substantially complete including total contract value and current percent complete by payment; 3) A list of proposed subcontractors and suppliers for the project being bid and the total value of work awarded to subcontractors as shown on the Subcontractors List Bid Form; 4) A list of names, address and telephone number of references for other projects completed by Bidder; and 5) A Financial Statement of Bidder, consisting of the balance sheet and annual income statement of Bidder for the Bidder's last fiscal year end preceding the submission of the Bid Proposal, which has been audited or examined by an independent certified public accountant. The Financial Statement of Bidder shall be used to determine a Bidder's net working capital, which is defined as current assets less current liabilities. A Bidder's net working capital shall be considered evidence of the Bidder's ability to provide sufficient financial management of the project being bid. The Bidder's Financial Statement shall be clearly and conspicuously marked as "confidential", and shall be deemed and treated as confidential and excepted from the Public Information disclosure requirements of Texas Government Code Section 552.001 et seq., as such information, if released, would give advantage to a competitor or bidder, and/or would cause substantial competitive harm to Bidder. 5. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 5.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid Proposal, to (a) examine the Bidding Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents, (f) to recognize and plan for use of the City's "Pro-Trak" software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 5.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Bidders for review, but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Bidder may not and should not rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or the completeness thereof, for the purposes of bidding or construction. 08-2018 00200 - 3 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 5.4 Before submitting a Bid Proposal, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid Proposal. Prospective Bidders shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 5.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 5.7 The submission of a Bid Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 6. Interpretations and Addenda 6.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Bidders in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date for opening of Bid Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Bidders that have downloaded Bid Documents from the City's E-bid System. 08-2018 00200 - 4 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 7. Bid Security 7.1 Each Bid Proposal must be accompanied by bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid Proposal price, in the form of a certified check, cashier's check or a Bid Bond ("Bid Security"). 7.2 Bidders submitting bids through the E-bid System shall scan and up -load a copy of their Bid Security (sealed Bid Bond, Certified Check or Cashier's Check) as an attachment to their electronic bid. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two bidders and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Bid Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. 7.3 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such time as Bidder has executed the Standard Form of Agreement, and furnished the required Performance and Payment Bonds, whereupon the Bid Security of both bidders will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish the required performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and shall be entitled to make a claim against the Bid Security. The Bid Security of other Bidders will be retained until the Contract is awarded and the Standard Form of Agreement becomes effective, or all bids are rejected, whereupon Bid Security furnished by all such Bidders will be returned. 8. Contract Time 8.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Bid Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to "time" or "days" shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 9. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 9.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus, if any, are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 10. Substitute or "Or -Equal" Items 10.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the specified materials and equipment described in the Plans and Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or - equal" items unless otherwise stated. Whenever it is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or -equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by the Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Agreement becomes effective. All "or -equal" references shall be interpreted to mean "or Owner approved equal". Any substitution made by the Bidder upon which the bid is based shall be at the Bidder's sole risk. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the Contract Documents. 08-2018 00200 - 5 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 11. Bid Form 11.1 The Bid Proposal form (Section 00300 — Bid Proposal) is included with the Bidding Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Bid. 11.2 All E-bids must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System Bid Proposal document. All blanks on the Bid Proposal form must be completed or filled in.. The Bidder shall bid all Alternates, if any.. Incomplete Bid Proposals may be cause for rejection. 11.3 Bid Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.4 Bid Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a • general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature.. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Bid. 11.5 The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Proposal form). Failure to do so could be cause for rejection of the Bid. 11.6 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid Proposal must be shown on the Bid Proposal form. 12. Submission of Bid Proposals 12.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Bid Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Bid Schedule shall be made by Addenda. 12.2 Electronic Bids shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Bidders utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier, (Bidder). E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. 12.3 Bid Proposals submitted after the bid date and time will be rejected. 13. Modification and Withdrawal of Bid Proposals 13.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 13.2 Once submitted, Bid Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, City Hall Annex, 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Bid Proposals. 08-2018 00200 - 6 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 13.3 A Bidder may not modify or withdraw its Bid Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A withdrawn Bid Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for opening Bid Proposals. No bid may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of ninety (90) days subsequent to the bid opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 13.4 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Bid Proposals are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Bid Proposal, that Bidder may request to withdraw its Bid Proposal and the bid security may be returned or, at the discretion of the Owner, Owner may make a claim against the bid security. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 13.5 Bid securities for unsuccessful Bidders will be returned to bidders once a successful Bidder has be identified and notified of the Owner's intent to award a contract. 14. Opening of Bid Proposals 14.1 Bid Proposals will be opened and (unless obviously non -responsive) read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bid Proposals and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bid Proposals through E-Bid. Bid Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Bidder has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 15. Bid Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance 15.1 All Bid Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90) days after the day of the Bid Proposal opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid Proposal and return the bid security prior to that date. 16. Award of Contract 16.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bid Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. Owner may reject a bid as non -responsive if: 1) Bidder fails to provide required Bid Security; 2) Bidder improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Bidding Documents; 3) Bidder fails to sign the Bid Proposal or improperly signs the Bid Proposal; 4) Bidder qualifies its Bid Proposal; 5) Bidder tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Bid Proposal; 6) Bidder fails to submit the Qualifications of Bidder as required under section 4 of these Instructions to Bidders; or 7) Bid Proposal is otherwise non -responsive. Contracts are awarded on the basis of the Lowest Responsible Bidder. 16.2 The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of bidder, if requested to do so. As required by the Instructions to Bidders and as a condition of Bid acceptability, the Contractor hereby agrees: 08-2018 00200 - 7 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. That the City, as Owner and Contract Administrator, retains the right to review and approve the Contractor's and all Subcontractors' qualifications to perform the Work of the Contract and to reject any Subcontractor not meeting the City's standards, as outlined in the General Conditions, or TxDOT's and FHWA qualifications for performing the Work. 16.3 Lowest Responsible Bidder. In determining Lowest Responsible Bidder, Owner will consider: Lowest Total Bid price for all work including Base Bid, Extra Work, Add Alternates and Cash Allowances, if any, and any other cost criteria. Additional evaluation criteria may include: the Qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bid Proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Proposal form or prior to the Notice of Award. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 16.4 A contract to be awarded to the Lowest Responsible Bidder may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Bid Proposal format. 16.5 Acceptance of any and all bids may be conditioned on compliance with the requirement for attendance of the mandatory pre -bid meeting. 16.6 In either case, Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid Proposal and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction, within the Contract Time. 16.7 Each Bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner, the Professional/Engineer, and their respective employees, arising out of or in connection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid. 17. Contract Security 17.1 When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds required by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 18. Signing of Agreement 18.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Bidder until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. 08-2018 00200 - 8 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 19. Pre -bid Conference 19.1 A pre -bid conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. 20. Retainage 20.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 08-2018 00200 - 9 of 9 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL Section 00300 BID PROPOSAL Lowest Responsible Bid Date: 3/29/2021 Bid of One Global Telecom. Inc , an individual proprietorship / a c rporatio�organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas / a partnership consisting of , for the construction of: Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: TR1201 BID NO.:0321-28 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Pursuant to the published Invitation to Bidders, and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber optic Network Connection Plan, from the City's network connection at the Westside Event Center along Country Place Parkway to a pull box at the intersection of Hughes Ranch Road and Cullen Boulevard. with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Karl F. Rothermel, P.E. PTOE, Cobb, Fendley & Associates, Inc., 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 400 Pearland, TX 77584, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Exhibit "A", the electronic bid form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall constitute a .legal and executable proposal from the Bidder. It is understood that, in the event any changes are ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices bid shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Bid Security required under the Instructions to Bidders is included and has been uploaded as an attachment within the E-bid system and, that a fully executed, signed and sealed hard copy has been delivered to the Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, City Hall Annex 3523 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. The Bidder agrees to submit to the Owner the Qualifications of Bidder, including the Financial Statement of Bidder, as required by the Instructions to Bidders if requested to do so as a condition of the Bid process. The Bidder binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in, the Contract Documents, for performing and completing the said work within Bidder's Initial's:40"'/ 10-2017 00300 - 1 of 3 Bond Number: BB2014405 Bid Bond CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) One Global Telecom Inc 24 Decker Court Wylie, TX 75098 801 S Figueroa Street, Suite 700 Los Angeles, CA 90017 303-649-9163 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Dr Pearland TX 77581 BOND AMOUNT: NOT TO EXCEED Twelve Thousand PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) Hughes Ranch Rd Fiber Optic Network SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place of business) U. S. Specialty Insurance Company ($12,000.00 ) Dollars This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. Project Number, if any: The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. Signed and sealed this 26th day of March 2021 One Global Telecom Inc (Fitness) (Witness) Nie Brady (Principal) (Seal) (Titl pecialty Insurance Company nnutrrrn (Sur David salves;T��•"�" Attorney In Fact (Title) By arrangement with the American Institute of Architects, the National Association of Surety Bond Producers (NASBP) (www.nasbp.org) makes this fonn document available to its members, affiliates, and associates in Microsoft Word format for use in the regular course of surety business. NASBP vouches that the original text of this document conforms exactly to the text in AIA Document A310-2010, Bid Bond. Subsequent modifications may be made to the original text of this document by users, so careful review of its wording and consultation with an attorney are encouraged before its completion, execution or acceptance. TOKIO MARINE HCC POWER OF ATTORNEY AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY TEXAS BONDING COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Contractors Indemnity Company, a California corporation, Texas Bonding Company, an assumed name of American Contractors Indemnity Company, United States Surety Company, a Maryland corporation and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company, a Texas corporation (collectively, the. "Companies"), do by these presents make, constitute and appoint: David Gonsalves its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include riders, amendments, and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty does not exceed ****** Five Million and 00/100 ****** Dollars ( ** $5,000,000.00 ** ). This Power of Attorney shall expire without further action on April 23rd, 2022. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of the Companies: Be it Resolved, that the President, any Vice -President, any Assistant Vice -President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings, including any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts, and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 1st day of June, 2018. State of California County of Los Angeles AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY TEXAS BONDING COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY .1:11V;gr,, ,�cu l"yq .dsa`I:. �`�n�e"c�. y �08 Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President A Notary Public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document On this 151 day of June, 2018, before me, Sonia O. Carrejo, a notary public, personally appeared Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President of American Contractors Indemnity Company, Texas Bonding Company, United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his authorized capacity, and that by his signature on the instrument the person, or the entity upon behalf of which the person acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. sotaIX-CO m '� NotaryPubik -California LC MjtIi Gounry, . _ Signature %•1(, , I1 ,1 (seal) rave i vi P ii', ie�r I, Kio Lo, Assistant Secretary :" American Contractors Indemnity Company, Texas Bonding Company, United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect; furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. WITNESS my hand and official seal. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Los Angeles, California this 26th day of March , 2021 Corporate Seals Bond No. BB2014405 9CP[10. MO Agency No. 12245 - PDF POA Jam', • !!ry4ftiDBN,Pa'°°- '-TE VFY�,ta rr, nmo+" RI Kio Lo, Assi- Secretary visit tmhcc.com/surety for more information HCCSMANP0A05/2019 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL the time stated and for the prices stated in Exhibit A of this proposal along with all required insurance in the required amounts. The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete within 90 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts bid in this Bid Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) days following date of Bid Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to in writing by the City of Pearland and Bidder. It is understood that in the event the Successful Bidder fails to enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required, each in the amount of one hundred (100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stated amounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award, the Successful Bidder will forfeit the Bid Security as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). The Bidder acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bidding Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in the Bid Proposal prices. Addendum No.: Date: Addendum No.: Date: Addendum No.: Date: Addendum No.: Date: Bidder hereby represents that the only person or parties interested in this offer as principals are those named. Bidder has not directly or indirectly entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding. Firm Name: One Global Telecom, Inc By: Chris Webb Title: Director of Operations Address: 24 Decker Ct, Wylie, TX 75098 Phone No: 972-420-1970 ATTEST: C' 'ram .k,e446 —0-Je `lif /� ., vat /Cj.�� (Seal, ifl3idder is a Corporation) (Type ,Pe ted am -) Signature Date: 3/29/2021 10-2017 Bidder's Initial's:Alli 00300-2of3 CITY OF PEARLAND BID PROPOSAL END OF SECTION Bidder's Initia1s:S" l 0_20 i 7 003Q6 - 3 of 'EARLAND PROPOSAL FORM PART B Quantity UOM Description Spec Reference Unit Price Total Amount Base Bid Site Preparation &Earthwork $15,000.00 $15,000.00 1 1 LS-. MOBILIZATION (MAXIMUM 3%) 1505 $7,000.00 $7,000.00 2 1 LS TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1555 $8,000.00 $8,000.00 Base Bid Signalization $224,999.58 $224,999.58 3 200 LF CONDUIT (HDPE 2" (ORANGE) TxDOT-618 $ 12.50 $,2500.00 4 11,610 LF CONDUIT (HDPE 2" (BORED) (ORANGE) TxDOT-618 $12.50 $145,125.00 5 34 EA GROUND BOX TY 1 (122422) W/APRON TxDOT-624 $823.52 $27,999.68 6 1 EA FIELD ETHERNET SWITCHI BID ITEM 00.01 $.01 $.01 7 7 EA FIBER OPTIC SPLICEENCLOSURE - UNDERGROUND, �NATERPROOFZ TxDOT-6007 $2,500.00 $17,500.00 8 17 EA POLI-MOD PATCH AND SPLICE MODULE3 BID ITEM 0002 $582.22 $9,897.74 9 13,910 LF FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(12' FIBER)' TxDOT-6007 .25 $3,477.50 $4,746.00 $2,380.00 $11,850.00 $765.25 10 13,560 EA FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(24 FIBER) TxDOT-6007 .35 11 35 EA FIBER OPTIC CABLE ROAD MARKER TxDOT-6007 68.00 12 3 EA BBI7 SYSTEM (EXTERNAL BATT CABINET) - CABINET/POWER SOURCE ONLY - FOR FIBER SYSTEM USE BID ITEM 0003 $3,950.00 13 1 EA FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (144 POSITION) BID ITEM 0004 $765.25 NOTE 1. Field Ethernet Switch will be supplied by the City. 2. Number of splice enclosures to be determinedby length of fiber cable run lengths which may vary..Fiber cable run lengths shall be approved by the City. The cost of the splices within the enclosures are incidental to the. cost of the enclosure. 3. The cost of the splices within the poli-mod patch and splice modules, are incidental to the cost of the module. WO:SAL Bidder's Initials: ilz6 00300 PartB'- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland (hereinafter called OWNER or City) and C-2/e, 41 %�Q ems,►.,. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the "Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: TR1201 BID NO.: 0321-28 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by Cobb, Fendley & Associates, Inc., 1920 Country Place Pkwy # 400, Pearland, Texas 77584 (Karl Rothermel, P.E., PTOE) who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within ninety (90) days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within one hundred twenty (120) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No work will be allowed on Sundays. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred dollars ($500.00) for 4-2015 00500 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred dollars ($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 3.3 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds $239,999.58 (the "Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid as accepted by OWNER as shown in Document 00300 — Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.1.2 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion 4-2015 00500 - 2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under "Final Payment." 5.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground . facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, 4-2015 00500 - 3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement (Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. 1 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement (Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 58 inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. 4-2015 00500 - 4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 1, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law, the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried 4-2015 00500 - 5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER (through its employee handbook) considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud, forgery, misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked, mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors, or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A (attached) of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 4-2015 00500 - 6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and att station by authorized representatives o.f the City of Pearland and upon the following date: �� 19 , 20 ll . OWNER: CITY OF PE By: Title: Date: ATTEST CONTRACTOR: Give 6-Val! c By: �C�•-d Title: �jyt,p"X,Q Mdmett-aairs Date: L - % - 02ei� ATTEST (Corporate Seal) Address for giving notices 6/tie(-77a Tz ecvm 463 s . TirAtAMT- 7�7375 Phone: ' 0 �' Fax: Agent for service of process: arts toe,1,6 END OF SECTION 4-2015 00500 - 7 of 7 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor') agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally -Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT) Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub -Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub -Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub -Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) (b) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub -Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub -Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub -Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT APPENDIX B House Bill 89 Verification I, Ott,&G./ / (Person name), the undersigned representative (hereafter rpferred to as "Representative") of A1,.. 6/viod / n (company or business name, hereafter referred to as "Business Entity"), being an adult over the age of eighteen (18) years of age, after being duly sworn by the undersigned notary, do hereby depose and affirm the following: 1. That Representative is authorized to execute this verification on behalf of Business Entity; 2. That Business Entity does not boycott Israel and will not boycott Israel during the term of any contract that will be entered into between Business Entity and the City of Pearland; and 3. That Representative understands that the term "boycott Israel" is defined by Texas Government Code Section 2270.001 to mean refusing to deal with, terminating business activities with, or otherwise taking any action that is intended to penalize, inflict economic harm on, or limit commercial relations specifically with Israel, or with a person or entity doing business in Israel or in an Israeli -controlled territory, but does not include an action made for ordinary business purposes. SIGNATURE OF REPRESENTATIVE SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this I�+h day of \U.Y1t. , 2021 . !!! REBECCA VINSON ,r°: ( Notary Public, State of Texas 9°,,,_,, 0 Comm. Expires 03-04-2023 ;;, Notary ID 130140550 Notary Public CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Section 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond# 1001131243 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That One Global Telecom Inc of the City of Wylie , County of Collin , and State of Texas, as principal, and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to, act as surety on bonds for principals, are heldand firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of $ 239,999.58 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into .a certain written contract With the:Owner, effective as • of the 24th day of June , 20 21 , (the "Contract") to commence and. complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows; Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection .PIan. City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: TR1201 BID NO.: 0321-28 which Contract, including the Contract Documents. as .defined. therein, is Hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fiilly and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and agreements in and by said Contract agreed .and covenanted by the Principal to, be observed and performed, and according to the.`true intent and meaning of said Contract and Contract Documents, then this .obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant tothe provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities onthis bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the Same extentas if it were copied.. at length herein.. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed, thereunder, or the plaans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 12/2007 00610 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instalment this 25th day of June ,2021. Principal: n oivoninnu One Global Telecom Inc U.S. Specialty Insurance Cornpan"\o By: Title: Title: Attorney in Fact Address: Address: Surety: 24 Decker Court 11440 Carmel Commons Blvd Ste 207 Wylie, TX 75098 Charlotte, NC 28226 Telephone: Telephone: 800-438-1 162 Fax: 704-364-3214 Fax: NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 1.2/2007 '00610 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § Bond# 1001131243 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That One Global Telecom Inc of the City, of Wylie , County of Collin , and State of Texas, as principal, and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for .principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of $ 239,999.58 - for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 24th day of June , 20 21 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Hugehs Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: TR1201 BID NO.: 0321-28 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the Work to be performed thereunder. 07/2006 00611 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND INT WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety .have signed and sealed this instrument this 25th day of June , 20 21 Principal: Surety: One Global Telecom Inc U.S. Specialty Insurance Company By: By: Title: Title: Attorney in Fact Address: Address; 24 Decker Court Wylie, TX 75098 001%) I 11 II/ //o, ‘ 0 11:?1:6?.0-.1 0 .0 .. 0°.•• ''.• 0 '%'.. L. % VS = ' • :7 Z l'.:t . ic si.• 11440 Carmel Commons Blvd Ste 207 ••11.'..., .. S •• -;•":- •-,. . .. ....... - ' $' -Thicuilio, Charlotte, NC 28226 Telephone: Telephone: 800-438-1162 Fax: Fax: 704-366-6847 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OE THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 006-11 - 2 of2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND Section 00612 ONE-YEAR IV1A1NTENANCE BOND STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § Bond# 1001131243 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That One Global Telecom Inc of the City of Wylie , County of Collin , and State of Texas, as principal, and. U.S. Specialty Insurance Company authorized Under; the laws of the State of Texas. to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and filmIy bound unto City of Pearland as 'Obligee (Owner), in the penal sum of 239,999.58 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and. Surety bind themsel-ves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into. a -certain written contract with the Owner, effective as of the 24th day of June , 2021, (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: TR1201 BID NO.: 0321-28 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as 'if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully cornet all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time,. alteration or addition to the terms ofthe contract, or to the work perfouned thereunder, Or the, plans, specifications, or drawings. accompanying -the-samQ,. shall in any -way affect its..obligationi.on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension -of time, alteration or addition. to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be pet -formed thereunder. 07/2006 00612 - 1 of2 CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHERE.OF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this .:instn Trent this 25th day of June , 2021. Principal:. .Surety: One Global Telecom Inc U.S. Specialty Insurance Company .,,_�uu11/111,,,,,. By:. By:ate. _0c Title: Title: Attorney in Fact • trr s • 1 �� \\\ Address: Address: /,l, anuto\ 24 Decker Court 11440 Carmel Commons Blvd Ste 207 Wylie, TX 75098 Charlotte, NC 28226 Telephone: Telephone.: 800-438-1162 Fax: Fax: 704-364-3214 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE_ OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 0061E 2 oft TOKIO MARINE E }:; E H C C POWER OF ATTORNEY AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY TEXAS BONDING COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That American Contractors Indemnity Company, a California corporation, Texas Bonding Company, an assumed name of American Contractors Indemnity Company, United States Surety Company, a Maryland corporation and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company, a Texas corporation (collectively, the "Companies''), do by these presents make, constitute and appoint: David Gonsalves its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include riders, amendments, and consents of surety, providing the bond penalty does not exceed ****** Five Million and 00/100 ****** Dollars ( ** $5,000,000.00 ** ). This Power of Attorney shall expire without further action on April 23rd, 2022. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of the Companies: Be it Resolved, that the President, any Vice -President, any Assistant Vice -President, any Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements or indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings, including any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracts, and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and effected by the Corporate Secretary. Be it Resolved, that the signature of any authorized officer and seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 1st day of June, 2018. State of California County of Los Angeles AMERICAN CONTRACTORS INDEMNITY COMPANY TEXAS BONDING COMPANY UNITED STATES SURETY COMPANY U.S. SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY N ��,a„4 nn,nt„ ,atPPCfD.9�%•., a.\pNDINph °ES,SUR . \ tnsua..ii ,:0 �--�6 f`°oY n ?3`I �l'^ce `" ^3 � 4�v- I_� ....... a3 By: Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President A Notary Public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document On this 1st day of June, 2018, before me, Sonia O. Carrejo, a notary public, personally appeared Daniel P. Aguilar, Vice President of American Contractors Indemnity Company, Texas Bonding Company, United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his authorized capacity, and that by his signature on the instrument the person, or the entity upon behalf of which the person acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature >e� saraA CARkc0 Notary Pak �-' Losanieles Cumly rF (seal) _awyc 1 ii2, 4', 1022 Cantrankin I, Kio Lo, Assistant Secretary bi' American Contractors Indemnity Company, Texas Bonding Company, United States Surety Company and U.S. Specialty Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect; furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Los Angeles, California this , 2021 . 25th day of June Corporate Seals Bond No. 1001131243 Agency No. 12245 - PDF POA a e.)---"--kWi, ``a 0��01N Q c % VCD➢RMRD. 2K, summing I ewl c %Y"r 1 __ •t0 .y fpy'=a y9'+` ✓'tom 2 mow.._...+ rF '°• w wwnn 'Jy.,..SUF. ., ,,. j2-:Wtfj 'yI �• :59 37i oy'ma.t.00 tmn nm°° anmi� rrh Kio Lo, Assi-1%` Secretary visit tmhcc.com/surety for more information HCCSMANPOA05/2019 ACORO® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 4.....---- DATE(MMIDDIYYYY) 07/21 /2021 ITHIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BLOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED r_'PRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder Is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in Ileu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Stonebriar Insurance Group 6100 Preston Road #201 Frisco, TX 75034 NAME: Tina Mauldin INC.PHONE o.Ext): 4693625300 a Not; (469)362-5302 AIL ADDRESS: tlna@stonebrlarinsurance.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURERA: Liberty Mutual Insurance 23043 INSURED One Global Telecom 24 Decker CT Wylie, TX 75098 INSURER B: HCC Specialty Insurance 42374 INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURERE: INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 00002965-3015828 REVISION NUMBER: 618 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSD SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MMIDDIYYYY) POLICY EXP (MMIDDIYYYYI LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y Y BKS59088033 12/04/2020 12/04/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 1,000,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 15,000 PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE POLICY OTHER: X LIMIT APPLIES PER: JECT LOC GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ 2,000,000 Equipment $ 27,850 l -'i AUTOMOBILE LX X X LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED AUTOS ONLY HIREDS ONLY AUTO _ X SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS ONON-OWNNLY ED Y Y BAS59088033 12/04/2020 12/04/2021 (Ea aocideD SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ A X UMBRELLALIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE Y Y US059088033 12/04/2020 12/04/2021 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 12 milli AGGREGATE $ , 12 mill DED RETENT ON $ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below YIN N N A Y XWS59088033 12/04/2020 12/04/2021 X STATUTE ERH E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 750,000 1,000,000 A B Equipment Floater PL/ BKS59088033 HCC2168013 12/04/2020 05/01/2021 12/04/2021 05/01/2022 Ded 5,000 Limit DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached If mo e space is required) Certificate Holder Is autmatically Included as Additional Insured on the General Liability & Auto when required via written contract. Blanket Waiver of Subrogation'is also provided to same on the General Liability, Auto and Workers's Compensation when required via written contract. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Pearland 2559 Hillhouse Road Pearland, TX 77584 ACORD 25 (2016/03) SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 34.04e, Fi , © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Printed by TSM on July 21, 2021 at 12:07PM (TSM) CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of $ the undersigned, on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made, the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any, through the above date from any and all claims, liens, or right to claim or lien, arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. State of County of Subscribed and sworn to, before me, this My Commission Expires: Signature Printed Name & Title Company Name day of ,20 Notary Public 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents 1.03 Subcontractor 1.04 Written Notice 1.05 Work 1.06 Extra Work 1.07 Work Day 1.07-1 Rain Day 1.07-2 Impact Day 1.08 Calendar Day 1.09 Substantially Completed 1.10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1.11 Referenced Standards 1.12 Contract Time 1.13 Construction Inspector 1.14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 4 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry 2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700 - i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes and Alterations 2.05 Damages 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 6 3.01 Owner -Engineer Relationship 3.02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.03 Preliminary Approval 3.04 Inspection by Engineer 3.05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3.06 Recommendation of Payment 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 Independent Contractor 4.02 Contractor's Understanding 4.03 Laws and Ordinances 4.04 Assignment and Subletting 4.05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4.06 Insurance 4.07 Permits and Fees 4.08 Texas State Sales Tax 4.09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4.10 Character of Workers 4.11 Labor, Equipment, Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 4.12 Sanitation 4.13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4.14 Performance of Work 4.15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700 - ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.16 Layout of Work 4.17 Shop Drawings 4.18 Engineer -Contractor Relationship; Observations 4.19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment, Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 Time and Order of Completion 5.02 Extension of Time 5.03 Hindrances and Delays 5.04 Suspension of Work 5.05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5.06 Change of Contract Time 5.07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 Discrepancies and Omissions 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 00700 - 18 21 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.03 Estimated Quantities 6.04 Price of Work 6.05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6.07 Use of Completed Portions & Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion. 6.08-1 6.09 Final Payment 6.10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6.11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 6.12 Payments Withheld 6.13 Delayed Payments 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 27 7.01 Differing Site Conditions 7.02 Change Orders 7.03 Change Orders 7.04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non -Work Days 7.05 Minor Changes 7.06 Extra Work 7.07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 31 8.01 Default by Contractor 8.02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 8.03 Cumulative Remedies & Specific Performance 8.04 Cross -Default 10-2012 00700 - iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8.07 Waiver of Consequential Damages 8.08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 35 ATTACHMENT NO. 1: WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO. 2: AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE B1 ATTACHMENT NO. 3: OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR Cl 10-2012 00700 - v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required' in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) (6) (7) (8) Addenda, if any; Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; Instructions to Bidders; Bid Proposal; and 10-2012 00700 - 1 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto, are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the- laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known business address or registered office of such individual, partnership, joint venture or corporation or company, or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein, a "Work Day" is defined as any Monday through Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 10-2012 00700 - 2 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7.05 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non -work days. 1.07-1 RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY. A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1 .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete" or "Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations, the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed", "permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 10-2012 00700 - 3 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms or clauses defining the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees, or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i) to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 10-2012 00700 - 4 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations, thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection, performance, construction or installation of collateral work. 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work, then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 10-2012 00700 - 5 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER -ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four (4) copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change. No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non -conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non -conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 10-2012 00700 - 6 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on -site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.04. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non -conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.11 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. 10-2012 00700 - 7 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters .which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 10-2012 00700 - 8 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 — Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 — Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-1 of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection H. 10-2012 00700 - 9 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract, to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 10-2012 00700 - 10 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION. Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The. CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and shall leave the Work broom -clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris, trash, waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules 10-2012 00700 - 11 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER -CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 10-2012 00700 - 12 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR may, within three (3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 10-2012 00700 - 13 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER, the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss, damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employeesand others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, fences, traffic control, warning signs and other safety devices. 10-2012 00700 - 14 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight (8) hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor. Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to 'the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 10-2012 00700 - 15 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship, contractual or otherwise, between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 10-2012 00700 - 16 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT, LIABILITY, JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury, death, or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 10-2012 00700 - 17 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship; and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re -execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re -execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non -conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non -conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees, the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized, and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the 10-2012 00700 - 18 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If, during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption, hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further 10-2012 00700 - 19 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty, the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten (10) days after the event -giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum, the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C. Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost., CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault, breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 10-2012 00700 - 20 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost, expense, damages, unit price adjustment, quantity differences, unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner. The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for 10-2012 00700 - 21 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non -conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount, prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only. No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute, and shall prepare a preliminary certificate for partial payment for the undisputed amount of the application for payment due CONTRACTOR, and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro- Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. 10-2012 00700 - 22 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments, and subject to the conditions set forth under "6.08 FINAL PAYMENT." The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above -stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR, that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete". Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine 10-2012 00700 - 23 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non -conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non -conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work, including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work, has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any, to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As -Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings • in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; 10-2012 00700 - 24 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (f) (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to occupancy and all other required inspections / approvals / acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor, vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment, tools, temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No. 2, executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion; and (k) the Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross -claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may remove, replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 10-2012 00700 - 25 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies, which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non -conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion; and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction, the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost 10-2012 00700 - 26 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code, and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three (3) calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a) Upon written notification, the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits, will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b) No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. (c) No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven (7) calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a) Upon receipt, the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather, the ENGINEER will make 10-2012 00700 - 27 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT an adjustment (excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination, in writing, whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b) No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c) No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement, the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in Contract Time, which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non -Work Days, prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non -Work Day. 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method (A) --By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or 10-2012 00700 - 28 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Method (B) --By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price; or Method (C) --If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b) For the General Contractor alone, self -performing the extra work, without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents, plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance 10-2012 00700 - 29 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0, within sixty (60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three (3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CONTRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason, to timely file a Request for Mediation, the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 10-2012 00700 - 30 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand; or 10-2012 00700 - 31 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract, the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed, the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in 10-2012 00700 - 32 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT accordance with OWNER's direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to ' obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS -DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders 10-2012 00700 - 33 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract, or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract, or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit, whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price. The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 10-2012 00700 - 34 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER' s payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to, the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, 10-2012 00700 - 35 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 10-2012 00700 - 36 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") . A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project .includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner - operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700 - Al CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. 'H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." I. The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700 - A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (5) (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700 - A3 CITY OFPEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between COMPANY NAME (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Projects known as Fiber Backbone — Dixie Farm Road (FM 518 to Longwood Treatment Plant), Old Alvin Rd Widening (Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan), and Fiber Backbone — Pearland Parkway (Oiler Dr to John Lizer to City Hall) (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2 It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700 - B 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the day of , 20_ CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation, the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the day of 20 by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By -Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700 - B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We) am (are) the person(s) who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I (we) have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I (we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR - Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me, the day of 20. Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700 - B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release, whose names are set out above, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation, pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation, the By -Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this, the day of 20 Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700 - B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR 1. Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and (c) others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO" means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. 10-2012 00700 - Cl CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non -renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self -insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700 - C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit General Aggregate Limit Product -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit Personal and Advertising Injury Limit 4.1.4 Required Endorsements $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 $1,000,000 a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non -Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non-contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial 10-2012 00700 - C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned, hired, and non -owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop -down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 10-2012 00700 - C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims - Made basis. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: 10-2012 00700 - C5 CITY OF PEARLAND a. b. c. d. e. f. Form GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed -value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include: i. Additional expenses due to delay in completion of project (where applicable) ii. Agreed value iii. Damage arising from error, omission or deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse iv. Debris removal additional limit v. Earthquake (where applicable) vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage (where applicable) vii. Expediting expenses viii. Flood (where applicable) ix. Freezing x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot & cold testing (where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation, non -renewal or material reduction — 60 days prior written notice to each insured $ TBD Included without sublimit Included without sublimit 25% of direct damage loss $ TBD $ TBD $ TBD $ TBD Included without sublimit Included without sublimit Included 10-2012 00700 - C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, below xiii. Ordinance or law xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal xv. Preservation of property xvi. Replacement cost xvii. Theft xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, below. Included Included without sublimit $ TBD Included without sublimit Included Included without sublimit Included 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. b. c. d. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per Occurrence, except Delayed Opening Waiting Period Flood, Per Occurrence Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage, Per Occurrence $5,000 5 Days $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, B or V $25,000 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached, has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700 - C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25, "Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name, which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non -renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 10-2012 00700 - C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the 10-2012 00700 - C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700 - C10 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions, Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: _Sergio Becerril telephone: 281. 652. 1642 The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: N/A telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: _Tim Ford telephone:_281.652.1645_ ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No. 3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk — Builder's Risk Insurance is Required/ Not Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records, the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract, the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year, proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed interne access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Required/ Not Required to provide either a Field Office or 08/2018 00800 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code), the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five (5) feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. 10-2012 00811 - 1 of 1 Ar Texas Department of Transportation The wage rates listed are those predetermined by the Secretary of Labor and State Statue to be the minimum wages paid. To determine the applicable wage rate zone, a list entitled "TEXAS COUNTIES IDENTIFIED BY WAGE RATE ZONES" is provided in the contract. Any wage rate that is not listed must be submitted to the Engineer for approval. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR STATE PROJECTS; only the controlling wage rate zone applies to the contract. Effective 01-05-2018. CLASS.# CLASSIFICATION DESCRIPTION ZONE TX07 1/5/18 ZONE TX08 1/5/18 ZONE TX11 1/5/18 ZONE TX12 1/5/18 ZONE TX14 1/5/18 ZONE TX16 1/5/18 ZONE TX18 1/5/18 ZONE TX34 1/5/18 ZONE TX35 1/5/18 ZONE TX37 1/5/18 ZONE TX38 1/5/18 ZONE TX40 1/5/18 ZONE TX41 1/5/18 ZONE TX54 1/5/18 ZONE TX56 1/5/18 ZONE TX63 1/5/18 1428 Agricultural Tractor Operator $12.69 $12.35 $11.75 1300 Asphalt Distributor Operator $14.87 $13.48 $13.88 $15.72 $15.58 $15.55 $15.72 $13.28 $15.32 $15.62 $14.36 $14.25 $14.03 $13.75 $14.06 $14.40 1303 Asphalt Paving Machine Operator $13.40 $12.25 $12.35 $13.87 $14.05 $14.36 $14.20 $13.26 $13.99 $14.68 $12.92 $13.44 $12.53 $14.00 $14.32 $12.99 1106 Asphalt Raker $12.28 $10.61 $12.02 $14.21 $11.65 $12.12 $11.64 $11.44 $12.69 $12.05 $11.34 $11.67 $11.40 $12.59 $12.36 $11.78 1112 Batching Plant Operator, Asphalt 1115 Batching Plant Operator, Concrete 1214 Blaster 1615 Boom Truck Operator $18.36 1444 Boring Machine Operator 1305 Broom or Sweeper Operator $11.21 $10.33 $10.08 $11.99 $11.04 $11.62 $11.74 $11.41 $10.30 $10.23 $10.60 $12.68 $11.05 1144 Communications Cable Installer 1124 Concrete Finisher, Paving and Structures $13.55 $12.46 $13.16 $12.85 $12.64 $12.56 $12.77 $12.44 $14.12 $13.04 $13.38 $12.64 $12.80 $12.79 $12.98 $13.32 1318 Concrete Pavement Finishing Machine Operator $16.05 $15.48 $16.05 $19.31 $13.07 1315 Concrete Paving, Curing, Float, Texturing Machine Operator $16.34 $11.71 1333 Concrete Saw Operator $14.67 $14.48 $17.33 $13.99 1399 Concrete/Gunite Pump Operator 1344 Crane Operator, Hydraulic 80 tons or less $18.22 $18.36 $18.12 $18.04 $20.21 $18.63 $13.86 1345 Crane Operator, Hydraulic Over 80 Tons 1342 Crane Operator, Lattice Boom 80 Tons or Less $16.82 $14.39 $13.85 . $17.27 $15.87 $17.27 $14.67 $16.42 $14.97 $13.87 1343 Crane Operator, Lattice Boom Over 80 Tons $20.52 $19.38 $20.52 $17.49 $25.13 $15.80 1306 Crawler Tractor Operator $13.96 $16.63 $13.62 $14.26 $15.67 $14.07 $13.15 $13.38 $14.60 $13.68 $13.50 1351 Crusher or Screen Plant Operator 1446 Directional Drilling Locator $11.67 1445 Directional Drilling Operator $20.32 $17.24 1139 Electrician $20.96 $19.87 $19.80 $26.35 $20.27 $19.80 $20.92 $27.11 $19.87 1347 Excavator Operator, 50,000 pounds or less $13.46 $12.56 $13.67 $17.19 $12.88 $14.38 $13.49 $17.19 $13.88 $14.09 $12.71 $14.42 1348 Excavator Operator, Over50,000 pounds $15.23 $13.52 $17.04 $17.71 $16.99 $18.80 $16.22 $14.53 $13.52 1150 Flagger $9.30 $9.10 $8.50 $10.28 $8.81 $9.45 $8.70 $10.06 $9.71 $9.03 $8.81 $9.08 $9.90 $10.33 $8.10 1151 Form Builder/Setter, Structures $13.52 $12.30 $13.38 $12.91 $12.71 $12.87 $12.38 $12.26 $13.84 $12.98 $13.07 $13.61 $12.82 $14.73 $12.23 $12.25 1160 Form Setter, Paving & Curb $12.36 $12.16 $13.93 $11.83 $10.71 $12.94 $13.16 $12.54 $11.33 $10.69 $13.33 $12.34 $13.93 1360 Foundation Drill Operator, Crawler Mounted $17.99 $17.99 $17.43 1363 Foundation Drill Operator, Truck Mounted $16.86 $22.05 $21.51 $16.93 $21.07 $20.20 $20.76 $17.54 $21.39 $15.89 $22.05 1369 Front End Loader Operator, 3 CY or Less $12.28 $13.49 $13.40 $13.85 $13.04 $13.15 $13.29 $13.69 $12.64 $12.89 $13.51 $13.32 $12.17 1372 Front End Loader Operator, Over 3 CY $12.77 $13.69 $12.33 $14.96 $13.21 $12.86 $13.57 $14.72 $13.75 $12.32 $13.19 $13.17 $13.02 1329 Joint Sealer 1172 Laborer, Common $10.30 $9.86 $10.08 $10.51 $10.71 $10.50 $10.24 $10.58 $10.72 $10.45 $10.30 $10.25 $10.03 $10.54 $11.02 $10.15 1175 Laborer, Utility $11.80 $11.53 $12.70 $12.17 $11.81 $12.27 $12.11 $11.33 $12.32 $11.80 $11.53 $11.23 $11.50 $11.95 $11.73 $12.37 134$. Loader/Backhoe Operator $14.18 $12.77 $12.97 $15.68 $14.12 $15.18 $13.58 $12.87 $13.21 $14.13 $14.29 $12.90 CLASS. # CLASSIFICATION DESCRIPTION ZONE TX07 1/5/18 ZONE TX08 1/5/18 ZONE TX11 1/5/18 ZONE TX12 1/5/18 ZONE TX14 1/5/18 ZONE TX16 1/5/18 ZONE TX18 1/5/18 ZONE TX34 1/5/18 ZONE TX35 1/5/18 ZONE TX37 1/5/18 ZONE TX38 1/5/18 ZONE TX40 1/5/18 ZONE TX41 1/5/18 ZONE TX54 1/5/18 ZONE TX56 1/5/18 ZONE TX63 1/5/18 1187 Mechanic $20.14 $15.47 $17.47 $17.74 $17.00 $17.10 $17.68 $18.94 $18.58 $17.00 $16.61 $18.46 $16.96 $17.47 1380 Milling Machine Operator $15.54 $14.64 $12.22 $14.29 $14.18 $14.32 $14.35 $12.86 $14.75 $13.53 $12.80 1390 Motor Grader Operator, Fine Grade $17.49 $16.52 $16.88 $17.12 $18.37 $18.51 $16.69 $16.13 $17.19 $18.35 $17.07 $17.74 $17.47 $17.08 $15.69 $20.01 1393 Motor Grader Operator, Rough $16.15 $14.62 $15.83 $16.20 $17.07 $14.63 $18.50 $16.02 $16.44 $15.12 $16.85 $14.47 $17.39 $14.23 $15.53 1413 Off Road Hauler $10.08 $12.26 $11.88 $12.25 $12.23 $13.00 $14.60 1196 Painter, Structures $21.29 $18.34 $21.29 $18.62 1396 Pavement Marking Machine Operator $16.42 $13.10 $13.55 $19.17 $12.01 $13.63 $14.60 $13.17 $16.65 $10.54 $11.18 $13.10 1443 Percussion or Rotary Drill Operator 1202 Piledriver $14.95 1205 Pipelayer $11.87 $14.64 $13.17 $11.17 $12.79 $11.37 $13.24 $12.66 $13.24 $11.17 $11.67 $12.12 $14.64 1384 Reclaimer/Pulverizer Operator $12.85 $11.90 $12.88 $11.01 $10.46 1500 Reinforcing Steel Worker $13.50 $14.07 $17.53 $16.17 $14.00 $16.18 $12.74 $15.83 $17.10 $15.15 $17.72 1402 Roller Operator, Asphalt $10.95 $11.96 $13.29 $12.78 $11.61 $13.08 $12.36 $11.68 $11.71 $11.95 $11.50 1405 Roller Operator, Other $10.36 $10.44 $11.82 $10.50 $11.64 $11.51 $10.59 $10.30 $12.04 $12.85 $11.57 $10.66 1411 Scraper Operator $10.61 $11.07 $10.85 $12.88 $12.27 $11.12 $12.96 $11.88 $12.43 $11.22 $13.95 $13.47 $10.89 1417 Self -Propelled Hammer Operator 1194 Servicer $13.98 $12.34 $14.11 $14.74 $14.51 $15.56 $13.44 $14.58 $14.31 $13.83 $12.43 $13.72 $13.97 $14.11 1513 Sign Erector 1708 Slurry Seal or Micro -Surfacing Machine Operator 1341 Small Slipform Machine Operator $15.96 1515 Spreader Box Operator $12.60 $13.12 $14.71 $14.04 $14.73 $13.84 $13.68 $13.45 $11.83 $13.58 $14.05 1705 Structural Steel Welder $12.85 1509 Structural Steel Worker $19.29 $14.39 1339 Subgrade Trimmer 1143 Telecommunication Technician 1145 Traffic Signal/Light Pole Worker $16.00 1440 Trenching Machine Operator, Heavy $18.48 1437 Trenching Machine Operator, Light 1609 Truck Driver Lowboy -Float $14.46 $13.63 $13.41 $15.00 $15.93 $15.66 $16.24 $16.39 $14.30 $16.62 $15.63 $14.28 $16.03 $13.41 1612 Truck Driver Transit -Mix $14.14 $14.14 1600 Truck Driver, Single Axle $12.74 $10.82 $10.75 $13.04 $11.61 $11.79 $13.53 $13.16 $12.31 $13.40 $10.30 $11.61 $11.97 $11.46 $10.75 1606 Truck Driver, Single or Tandem Axle Dump Truck $11.33 $14.53 $11.95 $12.95 $11.68 $14.06 $12.62 $11.45 $12.28 $13.08 $11.68 $11.48 $11.10 1607 Truck Driver, Tandem Axle Tractor with Semi Trailer $12.49 $12.12 $12.50 $13.42 $12.81 $13.16 $12.86 $16.22 $12.50 $13.80 $12.27 $12.50 1441 Tunneling Machine Operator, Heavy 1442 Tunneling Machine Operator, Light 1706 Welder $14.02 $14.86 $15.97 $13.74 $14.84 $13.78 1520 Work Zone Barricade Servicer $10.30 $12.88 $11.46 $11.70 $11.57 $11.85 $10.77 $11.68 $12.20 $11.22 $11.51 $12.96 $10.54 $11.67 $11.76 Notes: Any worker employed on this project shall be paid at the rate of one and one half (1-1/2) times the regular rate for every hour worked in excess of forty (40) hours per week. The titles and descriptions for the classifications listed here are further detailed in the AGC of Texas' Standard Job Classifications and Descriptions for Highway, Heavy, Utilities, and Industrial Construction in Texas . AGC will make it available on its Web site for any contractor. TEXAS COUNTIES IDENTIFIED BY WAGE RATE ZONES: 7, 8, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 34, 35, 37, 38, 40, 41, 54, 56, 63 County Name Zone County Name Zone County Name Zone County Name Zone Anderson Andrews Angelina Aransas Archer Armstrong Atascosa Austin Bailey Bandera Bastrop Baylor Bee Bell Bexar Blanco Borden Bosque Bowie Brazoria Brazos Brewster Briscoe Brooks Brown Burleson Burnet Caldwell Calhoun Callahan Cameron Camp Carson Cass Castro Chambers Cherokee Childress Clay Cochran Coke Coleman Collin Collingsworth Colorado Comal Comanche Concho Cooke Coryell Cottle Crane Crockett Crosby Culberson Dallam Dallas Dawson Deaf Smith Delta Denton DeWitt Dickens Dimmit Donley Duval Eastland Ector Edwards El Paso Ellis Erath Falls Fannin Fayette Fisher Floyd Foard Fort Bend Franklin Freestone Frio Gaines Galveston Garza Gillespie Glasscock Goliad Gonzales Gray Grayson Gregg Grimes Guadalupe Hale Hall Hamilton Hansford Hardeman Hardin Hams Harrison Hartley Haskell Hays Hemphill Henderson Hidalgo Hill Hockley Hood Hopkins Houston Howard Hudspeth Hunt Hutchinson Irion Jack Jackson Jasper Jeff Davis Jefferson Jim Hogg Jim Wells Johnson Jones Karnes Kaufman Kendall Kenedy Kent Kerr Kimble King Kinney Kleberg Knox Lamar Lamb Lampasas LaSalle Lavaca Lee Leon Liberty Limestone Lipscomb Live Oak Llano Loving Lubbock Lynn Madison Marion Martin Mason Matagorda Maverick McCulloch McLennan McMullen Medina Menard Midland Milam Mills Mitchell Montague Montgomery Moore Morris Motley Nacogdoches Navarro Newton Nolan Nueces Ochiltree Oldham Orange Palo Pinto Panola Parker Parmer Pecos Polk Potter Presidio Rains Randall 37 35 16 41 54 37 54 54 18 37 54 38 54 16 41 37 37 38 56 38 54 37 37 54 7 54 "38 38 54 37 37 41 54 16 41 16 54 7 38 54 54 54 56 54 38 54 38 38 38 54 40 54 54 56 38 38 35 54 18 38 7 18 38 7 Reagan Real Red River Reeves Refugio Roberts Robertson Rockwall Runnels Rusk Sabine San Augustine San Jacinto San Patricio San Saba Schleicher Scurry Shackelford Shelby Sherman Smith Somervell Starr Stephens Sterling Stonewall Sutton Swisher Tarrant Taylor Terrell Terry Throckmorton Titus Tom Green Travis Trinity Tyler Upshur Upton Uvalde Val Verde Van Zandt Victoria Walker Waller Ward Washington Webb Wharton Wheeler Wichita Wilbarger Willacy Williamson Wilson Winkler Wise Wood Yoakum Young Zapata Zavala 01-05-2018 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: March 19, 2021 PROJECT: BID NO.: BID DATE: FROM: Hughes Ranch Road -Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan 0321-20 Thursday, April 1, 2021 at 2:00 p.m. Karl F. Rothermel, P.E., PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager Cobb, Fendley & Associates, Inc. 1920 Country Place Pkwy #400, Pearland Tx 77584 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL - FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Pre -Bid Meeting Agenda and sign -in sheet Section 00300 - Proposal Form Part B SPECIFICATIONS: Add Bid Item 0005 - Wall Mount Interconnect Enclosure (WME) - Fiber Optic Patch Panel (24 Position) CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: Plan Change 1 - Sheet 3 (corrected to include add Bid Item 0005) END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 Karl F. Rothermel, P.E., PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager pt..aFTEki1 i KARL F. ROTHERMEL fr� : 116355 : s().4%.% 4/CENSsoG44'� 1�S boNAt E�?" 2-22-12 3-19-2021 00900 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECTS DEPARTMENT 3519 Liberty Drive, Suite 300 Pearland, Texas 77581 pearlandtx.gov%projects PRE -BID MEETING AGENDA Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan March 18, 2021 11:00 AM Council Chambers/ Virtual 1) Introduction of Participants 2) Introduction of the Project a) Project Name: Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan b) City of Pearland Project Number: TR1201 c) Bid No: 0321-28 d) City of Pearland Project Manager: Skipper Jones 2559 Hillhouse Pearland, TX 77584 281.652.1748 office ) Design Engineer: Karl Rothermel, P.E. Cobb Fendley KRothermel@cobbfendley.com 3) Project Overview a) Overview of Work Installation of 12- strand single mode and 24 strand single mode fiber optic cable in 2-inch HDPE conduit including ground boxes, fiber markers between the City's Westside Event Center, along Country Place Parkway to Hughes Ranch Road and tying into existing traffic signal cabinets at Miller Ranch Road and Bryant Court, daisy chaining in two School Zone flashers at Challenger Elementary and then extending to Cullen Parkway. Work includes the installation of one ethernet switch and up to 7 splice enclosures, 17 poly -mod Patch & Splice modules, 3 BBU System cabinet components, 1 Fiber patch panel, approximately 13,910 feet of 12 strand fiber and 13,560 feet of 24 strand fiber. b) Preliminary Cost Estimates i) Approximately $511,700 $546,526 (Addendum 1 included) c) Construction concerns i) Work will be inside the project limits of the Hughes Ranch Road reconstruction project currently underway Contractor is Triple B Services, Superintendent's name is Shad Bass 832 465 0854 ii) Fiber work will largely be confined to the south Right of Way. Triple B is currently constructing the westbound lanes within the north Right of Way. iii) Right of way has been finally dressed, hydro -mulched and irrigation will be in construction iv) No permits are required for this work Design 1 of 2 D36 Revised 2016 v) Steve Byington with Cobb Fendley is the project Construction Manager; Coordinate all activities through him and his staff syington@cobbfendley.com 713 962 7522 4) Bidding Process a) Advertised: Mar. 10 2021 & Mar. 17, 2021 in Pearland Journal. b) Construction Plans & Specs available for download at City's EBID system. All bids should be submitted through the E-Bid system located on the City's website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are advised to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-Bid System at the above website by clicking on "Supplier Registration" and completing a short registration questionnaire. Electronic Bid Documents, including Plans, Technical Specifications and Bid Forms are available for download after registration is approved by City Purchasing office. No plan fees or deposits are required for bid documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov.. c) Sealed bids due: April 1, 2021 by 2:00 pm (via EBID system). Bids will be opened and read aloud after the 2:00 pm deadline. Location: City Hall Council Chamber. d) Bidder Qualifications — may be asked to submit e) Bid Security — Five percent (5%) bid security must accompany each bid proposal in the form of certified check, cashier's check or Bid Bond 5) Contract a) Award i) Notice of Award — Successful Bidder shall return Standard Form of Agreement and Payment and Performance Bond Forms within 10 days of notification of Intent to Award. ii) Notice to Proceed — Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed b) Project Duration i) Substantial Completion: 90 days from date of Notice to Proceed ii) Complete/Final Payment: 30 days iii) Liquidated Damages: $500.00 per day 6) Closing comments Anything that has been said during the Pre -bid Conference is for the purpose of assisting in the clarification of the details of this project. This discussion is intended to be helpful to the potential bidders, but in no way is it meant to change anything contained in the Bid Documents. Additional questions regarding to project plans or bid documents must be submitted in writing to the Design Engineer. Bidders must rely on Addenda for official answers to issues that are either not covered or are ambiguous in the Bid Documents. All Pre -Bid participants will be notified of future Addenda, if required. Interested bidders are responsible for obtaining Addenda from the Design Consultant. The City expects the highest standards of customer service and customer satisfaction. Field personnel must extend courtesy, cooperation, and rapid response to customer concerns. Communicate any customer request, complaints, and/or concerns to the Project Manager, Construction Manager, or the Construction Inspector as soon as possible. 7) Questions Design 2 of 2 D36 Revised 2016 • • Pre -Bid Sign -In Sheet Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan COP Project TR1201. March 18, 2021 http://pea rl andtx. dov/d epartments/engi neering-and-ca pital-projects/projects Name Company Email Phone Dean Terrall Alcott Inc dba TCH dterrell@tchdrillers.com Mike Handford The Fishel Company Roger Cole The Fishel Company rIcole(a�teamfishel.com Will Giovengo TDC2 wgiovencio(@tdc2.com M&T Underground Inc office.mtunderground(u�gmaii.com 307.347.2663 Scott Mackinaw TDC2 smackinawAtdc2.com Armando Sanchez texshot17na,gmail.com 713.261.9752 Ed Kupferer TDC2 ekuferertdc2.com Chad D. Evans, P.E. Evans Directional Drilling Services chad.evans(a�evansdirectional.com 281.615.7171 Veronica Pena City of Pearland vpena@peariandtx.gov 281.652.1751 Sergio Becerril City of Pearland sbecerril@a.pearlandtx.gov 281.652.1642 Jennifer Lee (Project Manager) City of Pearland jlee(a�pearlandtx.gov 281.924.2005 Karl Rothermel (Engineer) Cobb Fendley krothermel@cobbfendley.com 225.938.5792 *To be included in consultants meeting minutes *Consultant can add incorporate their information to bring to meetings Adnun 1 of 1 4. Revised 7/25/08 CITY PROPCIMIT, FORZA PART LI- ' - _ Ott_aiXt* s : UOM ;• Desalptiot Sfte. Referiettse Udit Price Total Miquot _ ' 13'.:13id'' '. , *,6 800hvi k , $15,000.00 $15,000.00 ri .1 k.s MO BitiiiATIQN (KA)Waii4 3% - - -.19-5 $7,000.00 . $7,000.00 _ 2 1 ' L$ ' , TRAFFIC CONTIA.01,,AND.R.E.QUIATION J 555 $8,000.00 $3000.00 .8p4,s.g. pi..ei: 5.ignaiNitioti : : 7, $224,999.58 $224,999.56 11, 200 t_f CONIAIIT (RIX* " (01NGE)) TsDOT-4 1'8 $12.50 $,2500.00 _-c13.2410 . Lp ' 6-6146.:0T (ROM 2" (130RED) (PRANCit) ' ' T'x[ieq1 $12.50 '. $145,125.00 - - '5gROUND Iii0X TY1 04422) wiJORwi Td1/0T-614 $823.52 $27,999.88 _ ,. . . , 1 _ lEA • FIELD Ell-ItRN8T SWITUll BID ITEM 0001 $.01 $.01 7 EA ,FER;OP1* S.14,1C-AENO1.0131,) - IINDEItkl.KOUN.13, ,. , _ , TADOT-007 $2,500.00 $11500.00 11 A ik3,17M10." RATal ANg, S.P.,1 IVIOI)V6E? RID IIEN1,0002 $582.22 $9,897:74 9 , ' .11.0 ' .. , 14t3ER OPTIC CBI, 1$.Naarz-lCfdf-A(1414-EIZ) , 500114001 .25 $3,477.50 , $4,746.00 to-- ,. .-IT-,566-_,. ,CA Ei ,' ,,OPTIC..b.br, (sT'seLE-,MODER. IC24. 14B .) TAX) piscio7 .35 _ _ i '.-----i 41' .:•--- — .34 - - - -,AzI NIA111,1P. ' Tx140T-6607 ' 68.00 $2,380.00 $11,850.00 $765.25 r- •, .19- 3, : IA - y$134.$,NNTEM (EX'I'EW4 .8A-rt .c,Bit&f)-- rABINISTITDWER SOIJRCE ONLY .. FQ12 'MIA AZ prEm Q0(x.3 $3,950.00 V65,25_ ' - , • - 'T , 1 ' '. ' k", l'IDEROPTIre-PATeli PANEL ( li14-PQ4T.Iel"1-) , ' filf.),'ITENit 06/D4 A, -_'ilEltfi;O-Ft;Ia'A'TTCIT-.PANII,L. (24-rO§ITI00.)2 - 13-11.5 ITEM 6005 •556.50 . $1,669.50' i.‘0144--Xtboniet-S'Nvitc1i. itl be,supplieitiy the City. 2. n tsplgAi.on.Oldsitfes to. be' cioq,bytirieci i cfnisx gtbwhi41thy vary. 1-3ibottcobla tkra' .1e(4111.g*Sltall aPi5tovatLby th CiThe cos% crtia6 p1i thI t1 osilieS aft iikcfcLental t�tlie aos.t..6f the 3: TI-t4 o,ost Of the, wWiia iticitletaal-to,The cost &the:matt-ale. itci°s 00300 4,aiZtrE31 taf 1 FAFLBID ITEM 0005 Optical Connectivity WME01 WME01 rear mounting clip for DIN rail WME01 with DIN rail mounting kit LOX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric Nonh America, Inc. Wall Mount Interconnect Enclosure (WME) with One LGX® Mounting Position AFL's wall mount interconnect enclosure (WME01) provides a convenient convergence point for interconnecting and/or splicing in wall mount applications. Provisioned for one LGX-compatible adapter plate or optical module, the enclosure features a well -engineered solution for fiber and cable management on both the top and bottom openings of the enclosure. Robust steel construction ensures the highest level of protection for sensitive components while integrated roll -formed hinges eliminate possible fiber pinch points. The WME01 features a front access door which is lockable with a common pad -lock or tube -style keyed lock. Features • Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross -connect and co -location environments • U-shaped cable entry eliminates the need to feed preconnectorized cables through an inconvenient access port • Modular design fully compatible with Poli-MODS' products and XFM6 optical cassettes • Locking option for flexibility and security • Available empty, with adapters, or with adapters, splice chip and pigtails pre installed • LGX 118 compatible • Optional DIN rail mounting kit (sold separately) • All major connector types are supported Applications • Co -Location sites • Customer premise • Hub/OTN sites • Telecommunication closets • Campus/enterprise environments Specifications • Solid steel construction • Powder coat black textured finish • Top or bottom cable entry with dust resistant grommets • Single -hasp locking/security system • 12 to 24 fiber patch and splice density • One LGX mounting position • Physical dimensions: 5.6"H x 7"W x 1.5"D • Empty version weight: 2.0 lbs. www.AFLglobaicom or (800) 235-3423 42 0 2016,AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00236, Revision 1, 2.15.16 Specifications are subject to change without notice. FAFL Optical Connectivity WaII Mount Interconnect Enclosure (WME) with One LGX® Mounting Position Ordering Information EMPTY DESCRIPTION AFL NO. WME01 Empty WMEO1 E HALF LOADED: WME WITH ADAPTER PLATES AND ADAPTERS ONLY CONN. TYPE FIBER , CL AFL NO. UPC SM (BLUE) APCSM (GREEN) PC MM 62.5 (BEIGE) PC MM 50 (BLACK) PC MM 0M3 (AQUA) PC MM 0M4 (AQUA) SC 6 12 WME01AS-USCSM-006000 WMEO1A5-USCSM-012000 WME01AS-ASCSM-006000 WMEO1AS-PSCM6-006000 WMEO1AS-PSCMS-006000 WME01AS-ASCSM-012000 . WME01ASPSCM6-012000 WMEO I AS-PSCM 5-012000 WME01AS-PSCML-006000 WMEO I AS-PSCML-012000 NME01AS-PSCMC-006000 lWE01AS-PSCMC-012000 LC 6 WMEOIAS-UDLSM-006000 WMEOIAS-ADLSM-006000 WME01AS-PDLM6-006000 WMEO1AS-PDLM5-006000 WMEO I AS-PDLML-006000 WMEO1AS-PDLMC-006000 12 WMEO1AS-UDLSM-012000 WMEO1AS-ADLSM-012000 WME01AS-PDLM6-012000 WME01AS-PDLM5-012000 WME01AS-PDLML-012000 WMEOIAS-PDLMC-012000 24 WME01AH-UDLSM-024000 WME01AH-ADLSM-024000 WME01AH-PDLM6-024000 WMEO1AH-PDLM5-024000 WMEO1AH-PDLML-024000 WMEOIAH-PDLMC-024000 ST 6 12 WMEOIAS-USTSM-006000 — — WMEO1AS-PSTM6-006000 WME01AS-PSTMS-006000 WMEO I AS-PSTM5-012000 WME01AS-PSTML-006000 WMEO I AS-PSTML-012000 WME01AS-PSTMC-006000 WMEOIAS-PSTMC-012000 WME01AS-USTSM-012000 WMEO1A5-PSTM6-012000 FC 6 WME01AS-UFCSM-006000 WME01A5-AFCSM-006000 WMEOIAS-PFCM6-006000 WME01AS-PFCM5-006000 WMEOIAS-PFCML-006000 WME01AS-PFCMC-006000 12 WME01AS-UFCSM-012000 WME01AS-AFCSM-012000 WMEO1A5-PFCM6-012000 WME01AS-PFCM5-012000 WMEOIAS-PFCML-012000 WME01A5-PFCMC-012000 LOADED: WME WITH ADAPTER PLATES/ADAPTERS/SPLICE CHIP/PIGTAIL (900 pm TIGHT BUFFERED FIBERS 3 METERS IN LENGTH) CONN. TYPE FIBER CT AFL NO. UPC SM (BLUE) APC SM (GREEN) PC MM 62.5' (BEIGE) PC MM 50 (BLACK) PC MM 0M3 (AQUA) PC MM 0M4 (AQUA) SC 6 12 WME01F5-USCSM-0061C0 WMEO1F5-USCSM-0121C0 W1sE01FS-ASCSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PSCM6-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PSCMS-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PSCML-0061C0 1NME0IFS-PSCMC-0061C0 WME01FS-PSCMC-0121C0 WMEOIFS-ASCSM-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PSCM6-0121C0 WME01FS-PSCM5-01211C0 WMEOIFS-PSCML-0121C0 LC 6 WMEO1FS-UDLSM-0061C0 'WMEOIFS-ADLSM-0061C0 WME01FS-PDLM6-0061C0 WME01FS-PDLM5-0061C0 WME01FS-PDLML-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PDLMC-0061C0 12 WME01FS-UDLSM-0121C0 WMEO I FS-ADLSM-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PDLM6-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PDLM5-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PDLML-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PDLMC-0121C0 24 WME01FH-UDLSM-0241C0 WME01FH-ADLSM-0241C0 WME01FH-PDLM6-0241C0 WME01FH-PDLM5-0241CO WME01FH-PDLML-0241C0 WMEOIFH-PDLMC-0241C0 ST 6 WME01FS-USTSM-0061C0 — 12 WMEOIFS-USTSM-0121C0 — WME01F5-PSTM6-0061C0 WM EO I FS-PSTM5-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PSTML-0061C0 WME01FS-PSTMC-0061C0 WME01FS-PSTM6-0121CO WMEO I FS-PSTM5-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PSTML-0121C0 WME01FS-PSTMC-0121C0 FC 6 WMEOIFS-UFCSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-AFCSM-0061C0 WME01FS-PFCM6-0061C0 WME01FS-PFCM5-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PFCML-0061C0 WME01FS-PFCMC-0061C0 12 WMEOIFS-UFCSM-0121C0 WME01FS-AFCSM-0121C0 WME01FS-PFCM6-0121C0 WME0IFS-PFCM5-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PFCML-0121C0 WMEo1FS-PFCMC-0121C0 ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DIN Mount Kit, LGX/' 118 (Nylon DIN Clips and Screws) ' FM003388 Connector/Adapter Key TYPE DESCRIPTION ASC j Angle Polish SC (ZR) sleeve-SM ASF Angle Polish SC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM PSC PSF USC USF Physical Polish SC (PB) sleeve-MM a Physical Polish SC Duplex (PB) sleeve-MM ? Ultra Polish SC with (ZR) sleeve-5M j Ultra Polish SC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM LOX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. TYPE DESCRIPTION PST Physical Polish ST (PB) sleeve-MM UST Ultra Polish ST (ZR) sleeve-SM AFC Angle Polish FC (ZR) sleeve-SM PFC Physical Polish FC (PB) sleeve-MM UFC Ultra Polish FC (ZR) sleeve-SM TYPE DESCRIPTION ADL PDL I- PLC UDL ULC j Angle Polish LC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM Physical Polish LC Duplex (PB) sleeve-MM Physical Polish LC (PB) sleeve-MM {Ultra Polish LC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM Ultra Polish LC (ZR) sleeve-SM www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423 43 © 2016, AFL, all rights resented..PP-2-00236, Revision 1,2.15.16 Specifications are subject to change without notice. WESTSIDE EVENT CENTER TO CULLEN PARKWAY ITEM CODE ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY 1505 XXXX MOBILIZATION LS 1 1555 XXXX TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION L5 1 618 XXXX 2" HDPE (ORANGE) -- LE 200 618 XXXX 2" HOPE (ORANGE) (BORED) LF 11 610 624 6014 GROUND BOX TY 1 (122422) W/APRON EA 34 0001 XXXX FIELD ETHERNET SWITCH EA 1 6007 2021 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURE - UNDERGROUND, WATERPROOF EA 7 0002 XXXX POLI-MOD PATCH AND SPLICE MODULE _ _ EA 17 6007 6011 FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(12 FIBER) LF 13,910 6007 6012 FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(24 FIBER) LF 13,560 6007 6026 FIBER OPTIC CABLE ROAD MARKER. EA 35 0003 XXXX BBU SYSTEM (EXTERNAL BATT CABINET) - CABINET/POWER SOURCE ONLY - FOR FIBER SYSTEM. USE EA 3 F ( I 1 0 5 X X. I E OPTIC .PAT H P 6, (2 OSI ION) WM- 01 EA •SET BOXES TO A MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO FIBER PULL TENSILE STRENGTH LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET ••TO BE SUPPLIED BY CITY •+•MINIMIZE THE NUMBER OF SPLICES USED WHILE MAXIMIZING FIBER OPTIC RUN LENGTHS. NUMBER OF SPLICES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE CITY. FIBER SPLICES ARE INCIDENTAL TO THE SPLICE ENCLOSURES. ••••FIBER PANEL RECOMMENDED BY THE CITY A WMEOI ADDED _ 3/19 JCE KFR CUTE lrgobbFendley City of Pearland, Texas. HUGHES'RANCH ROAD FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN SUMMARY OF QUANTITIES A.,*xa wane cHtc MARCH 2021 �er JE Cud Bp NA Hws: WA RR • H!R SHEET 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date: March 29, 2021 PROJECT: BID NO.: BID DATE: FROM: Hughes Ranch Road -Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan 0321-20 Thursday, April 1, 2021 at 2:00 p.m. Karl F. Rothermel, P.E., PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager Cobb, Fendley & Associates, Inc.. 1920 Country Place Pkwy #400, Pearland Tx 77584 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Section 00300 - Proposal Form Part B (Poli-mod quantity correction) Questions: 1. Project plan Sheet 7 proposed signal controller cabinet (by others). This will not be including in this RFP? Signal controller cabinet was installed as part of a separate project - BBU side cabinet is to be installed and the fiber will be connected to the controller via Poli-MOD splices and patch panel inside BBU cabinet. 2. The existing signal controller cabinets. Will any work need to be performed to these cabinets? Is this RFP to bring the fiber to the MMP at the signal controller only? Existing traffic signal controller cabinets shown on Sheets 7, 12, and 16 will need to have a side BBU cabinet installed so that the 12-fiber cable can be connected to the controller via via Poli-MOD splices and patch panel inside BBU cabinet. 3. Is there any signal installation with this RFP or is this for the fiber install only? There are no signal installations for this project - this project connects 3 recently installed traffic control signals to the City's network as well as two school flasher assemblies. 2-22-12 00900 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 4. Only materials to be provided by the city is Field Ethernet switch? That is correct - only the field ethernet switch will be provided by the City. 5. Ground boxes size? 12x24x22? This will house 2" duct and 50ft coils of 12ct & 24ct fiber. Would a 24x36x24 be more efficient? As shown on Sheet 3 of the plans, Type 1 ground boxes (12x24x22) will be used to minimize disruption of recent improvements within the project ROW. Also see question #14. 6. Project sheet 25 shows 2" orange HDPE to be ran up the outside of the wall. Does this need to be 2" EMT with a LB going inside the building instead? No. 7. Project sheet 25 also shows 2" HPDE going across the ceiling. Does this need to be plenum duct instead? No. 8. What are the fiber testing requirements? OTDR, Bi-Directional? Sheet 50 - 1300.22 Fiber Optic Cable Testing section states all of the City's testing requirements. 9. Will there be any electrical installation required? No. 10. Will 12AWG tracer wire be required to install along with the fiber inside the 2" HDPE duct? Yes. 11. Will there be any engineering or permits required by the contractor? It is not anticipated that permits will be required. 12. Will the city be providing 2" HDPE, 12/24 fiber/ tracer wire, and ground boxes? No, the contractor will supply and install those items. 13. RFP shows a quantity of 17 Poli-MOD patch panel but can only account for 12 throught the project. Where are the remaining 5 to intstalled? Original plans had a 96- and 12-fiber throughout the project, hence the 17 Poli-MODs. 12 Poli-MODs are to to be used. Plans and Project Manual will be changed in this Addendum to reduce that amount to 12. 14. The 12- and 24-fiber underground spice locations going to be combined in the same enclosure or spliced separately? That is up to the contractor's discretion. Groundbox size may prevent both cables to be spliced within the same enclosure. Type 2 boxes may be used (after City approval of the contractor's change order) if splices are to be co -located. SPECIFICATIONS: N/A CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: Plan Change 2 - Sheet 3 (Poli-MOD patch and splice module quantity correction) END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 2-22-12 00900 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Karl F. Rothermel, P.E,, PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager IF*/ *4' t. *0 0 KARL F. ROTHERMEL frP% 116355 1.4.".5 3-29-2021 2-22-12 00900 - 3 of 3 CITY 'EARLAND DPOSAL PROPOSAL FORM PART B Quantity UOM Description Spec Reference Unit Price Total Amount Base Bid Site Preparation & Earthwork 1 1 LS MOBILIZATION (MAXIMUM 3%) 1505 2 1 LS TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1555 Base Bid Signalization 3 200 LF CONDUIT (HDPE 2" (ORANGE)) TxDOT-618 4 11,610 LF CONDUIT (HDPE 2" (BORED) (ORANGE) TxDOT-618 5 34 EA GROUND BOX TY 1 (122422) W/APRON TxDOT-624 6 1 EA FIELD ETHERNET SWITCH BID ITEM 0001 7 7 EA FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURE - UNDERGROUND, WATERPROOFs TxDOT-6007 8 12 EA POLI-MOD PATCH AND SPLICE MODULES BID ITEM 0002 9 13,910 LF FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(12 FIBER) TxDOT-6007 10 13,560 EA FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(24 FIBER) TxDOT-6007 11 35 EA FIBER OPTIC CABLE ROAD MARKER TxDOT-6007 12 3 EA BBU SYSTEM (EXTERNAL BATT CABINET) - CABINET/POWER SOURCE ONLY - FOR FIBER SYSTEM USE BID ITEM_ 0003 13 1 EA FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (144 POSITION) BID ITEM 0004 14 3 EA FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (24 POSITION) BID ITEM 0005 NOTE: 1. Field Ethernet Switch will be supplied by the City. 2. Number of splice enclosures to be determined by length of fiber cable run lengths which may vary. Fiber cable run lengths shall be approved by the City. The cost of the splices within the enclosures are incidental to the cost of the enclosure. 3. The cost of the splices within the poli-mod patch and splice modules are incidental to the cost of the module. Bidder's Initials: 00300 - Part B - 1 of 1 WESTSIDE EVENT CENTER TO CULLEN PARKWAY ITEM CODE ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY 1505. XXXX MOBILIZATION LS 1 1555 XXXX TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION LS 618 XXXX _ 2" HDPE (ORANGE) -- - LF 200 618 XXXX 2" HOPE (ORANGE) (BORED) LF 11,610 624 6014 GROUND BOX TY 1 (122422) W/APRON EA 34 0001 XXXX FIELD ETHERNET SWITCH EA 1 0002 XXXXPOLI-MOD PATCH ANO. SPLICE MODULE EA 12 6007 6012 FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(24 FIBER) - LF.. 13,560 6007 6026 FIBER OPTIC CABLE ROAD MARKER EA 35 0003 XXXXBBU SYSTEM (EXTERNAL BATT CABINET) - CABINET/POWER SOURCE ONLY - FOR FIBER SYSTEM USE EA 3 0 5 X X I E OPTIC PAT H P EL 2 OSI I N) WM 01 EA •SET BOXES TO A MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO FIBER PULL TENSILE STRENGTH LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET ..TO BE SUPPLIED BY CITY ...MINIMIZE THE NUMBER OF SPLICES USED WHILE MAXIMIZING FIBER OPTIC RUN LENGTHS. NUMBER OF SPLICES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE CITY. FIBER SPLICES ARE INCIDENTAL TO THE SPLICE ENCLOSURES. "—FIBER PANEL RECOMMENDED BY THE CITY W11E01 ADDED QUANTITY ADJUSTED 3/19 3/29 JCE JCE KFR NFR DATE 3/4/2021 I�ICobbFendley City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD • FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN SUMMARY OF OUANTmES mow. 03000 Our. MAREN 2021 o y JE NOu, WA A.,l WA 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 04/2008 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A Work of the Contract is for the construction of: Hughes Ranch Road - Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan. The project will entail the installation of 12-strand single mode and a 24-strand single mode fiber optic cable via 2" HDPE conduit, communication ground boxes, and fiber markers for a new fiber connection between the City's network connection at the Westside Event Center along Country Place Parkway, then to the traffic signal controller cabinet at intersection of CR 403 (Hughes Ranch Road) and Smith Ranch Road, then to controller cabinet at the intersection of Hughes Ranch Road and Miller Ranch Road, then to controller cabinet at the intersection of Hughes Ranch Road and Bryan Court. From the Bryan Court traffic controller cabinet, the fiber backbone will extend eastward to Cullen Boulevard for future connection to the proposed controller cabinet at the Hughes Ranch Road and Cullen Boulevard intersection. Two school flashing beacon assemblies near Challenger Elementary will have fiber connections to the network via a ground box (network connections to be completed after the installation of the flasher assemblies). ovide narrative description of the work to be performed] 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A Deleted 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A Deleted 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A Recommended sequence is as follows: place conduit beneath sidewalk, place pull boxes, pull fiber through conduit, and terminate fiber at Westside Event Center and 3 controller cabinet locatins and school flasher assembies. B Contractor to submit project schedule to Engineer & Owner for approval as specified in Section 01350 — Submittals. 08/2016 01100 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK C Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner as specified in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings. 1.06 FUTURE WORK A Upon installation of the two traffic controller cabinets and the two school flasher assemblies, the contractor will connect those components to the fiber network at the direction of the Owner. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the site and Contractor's use of rights -of - way as specified in Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities required for construction. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer. B Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 2.0 PRODUCTS-NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION-NotUsed END OF SECTION 08/2016 01100 - 2 of2 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350 — Submittals 2 Section 01730 — Cutting & Patching 3 Section 01555 — Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720 — Field Surveying 6 Section 02980 — Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers 8 Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill, & EmbankmentMaterials 9 Section 02922 — Sodding 10 Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access, operations, and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement; trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements, at Contractor's cost, for temporary use of private properties, in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. 1. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use mustbe removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 01/2018 01140- 1 of4 CITYOFPEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.5 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A If Contractor's means and methods require the acquisition of Temporary Construction Easements or any access to private property not already included in the above, such access and documentation along with any costs involved shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s) as noted above. C Means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted without temporary or permanent easements as determined by the Engineer. D Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. E Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners, monuments or other demarcations disturbed, damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. 1.6 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously. B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets; when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights -of -ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities, accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities, or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730 — Cutting & Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 01/2018 01140 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.7 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours, 72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes or businesses. B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact, who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.8 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 — Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.9 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt, debris, scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom -clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers, signs, and components of other control systems that are no 01/2018 01140 - 3 of4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. 1.10 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre -construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980 — Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs, gutters, and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. D Level with bank sand or topsoil, conforming to Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill, & Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer. E Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922 — Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging. F Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding. G Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 01/2018 01140 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment ofWork. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejectedproducts. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1.2 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300 — BidProposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verifyquantities. 1.3 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.4 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.5 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision, labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services, and incidentals; and erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unitprice. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. E All fiber optic splices are incidental to the unit cost of splice enclosures and patch panels. Unit costs of those items should incorporate the labor and materials necessary to splice and /or terminate the individual fiber optic strands. 1.6 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, 05/2007 01200 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable thanoriginally specified. C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identifypayment adjustment is final. 1.7 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of thefollowing: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or afterplacement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transportingvehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejectedproducts. 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 05/2007 01200 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications, Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order, Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01760 — Project Record Documents C Other References: 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (Data Quest Blue Book). Rental Rate is defined as the fuJi unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.3 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.4 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE ANDCONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time -and -material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and bywhom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicablepayrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products, rented equipment, andsubcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site, the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time -and -materials basis using Contractor - owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shownin the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C" Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.6 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACTMODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a - Request for Proposal, which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications. The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.7 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.8 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.9 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300 - Bid Proposal, the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700 — General Conditions ofAgreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre -determined in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME -AND -MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700 — General Conditions ofAgreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time -and -material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes, and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts, the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on -site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01290 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100 — Summary of Work 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.3 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.4 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives, Consultants, Contractor, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, andthe Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule ofValues, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including, but not limited to, Work Plans, Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, ConstructionPhotographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payment, Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06 "Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench SafetyProgram. 1.6 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeepingprocedures 1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings, and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 01310 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment, payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede plannedprogress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information, Requests forProposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding workperiod. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01310 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. ' When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications, refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction Schedules 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01310 — Coordination & Meetings 2. Section 01630 — Product Options & Substitutions 3. Section 01100 — Summary of Work 4. Section 01380 — Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760 — Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530 — Gravity SanitarySewers 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction, resubmission and final review of all submittals. The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans, Technical Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 10/2017 01350 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specifiedmanner. B Transmittal Form andNumbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1. Re - Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix (i.e., 2A for first Re -Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re -Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10"Video". C Contractor's Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2" x 11", plain bond, white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300 — BidProposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts, Mobilization, Bonds, and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 10/2017 01350 - 2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five (5) percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications, Change Orders, and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be, at a minimum, a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal. The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted, if approved bythe Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations, each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components, these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope, these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased, when they are to be delivered, and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved, each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule (tabulation of the estimated monthly billings) for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re -submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 10/2017 01350 - 3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700 - General Conditions ofAgreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan andschedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each ShopDrawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified assuch. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale, and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 10/2017 01350 - 4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data 1. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard, submit manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal", submit manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04 "Selection Options" and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre -Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer orOwner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification; one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCEDATA A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 10/2017 01350 - 5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.8 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380 — ConstructionPhotographs. 1. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 set of prints directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One set of prints shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction, take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: May be stored on electronic media (CD-ROM or flash drive). 3. The photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. An index of the photo will be provided which will contain the location of the photograph, house number and street name. 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side ofstreet) c. Housewalkk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fences, trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760— Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO1, T02, T03, etc. 10/2017 01350 - 6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.11 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes forreview. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each designmix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions, gradations, and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 10/2017 01350-7of7 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100 — Summary of Work 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. B Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. C Prepare three (3) prints of each view and submit two (2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven (7) days of taking photographs. One (1) print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to thephotographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will beleft. H With each submittal, include photographic negatives in protective envelopes, identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. 10/2017 01380 - 1 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, andquality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on aCD. B The photographs shall show on a non -elective chalkboard or white board, readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph, house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side ofstreet). 3. House -walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fence, trees, etc.). 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction ofshot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs andgrass. E Identify each photograph with an index document with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer (if a professional photographeris used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs and index should correspond for easy access andviewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PRECONSTRUCTIONPHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 10/2017 01380 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.2 POST -CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work, take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.3 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time -lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 10/2017 01380 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway andTransportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI AGC AI AITC American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219-0150 Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 02/2008 01420 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC AISI American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society ofMechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI APA API American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420 - 2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers CRSI Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 FS Federal Standardization Documents ICEA IEEE General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth, MA 02664 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 Katy, TX 77450 02/2008 01420 - 3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCA PCI SDI SSPC Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin, TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East 1 lth Street Austin, TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department ofTransportation) UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420 - 4 of 5 CITY OF PEARL4ND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas, TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street — Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing andRegulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin, TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01420 - 5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL Section 01430 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 1.2 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner. B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required byindividual Technical Specifications. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, qualify of workmanship, start-up of equipment, operator training, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation, as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 01430 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required representative's services. The representative shall be subject to approval of Project Manager. C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. Submit report within one (1) day of observation to Project Manager for review. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01430 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES Section 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.3 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager, Engineer, and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 09/2009 01440 - 1 of 1 • • • CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.2 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A Owner will select, employ, and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi -rigid sanitarysewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused byOwner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet densityrequirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.3 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive 1 copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratoryto the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.4 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested; to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his ownpurposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.1 CONDUCTING TESTING A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329, as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION 04/2008 01450 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION Section 01505 MOBILIZATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent (3%) of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Schedule of Values (Section 01350 — Submittals) 2. Trench Safety Program (Section 01570 — Trench Safety System) 3. Construction Schedule (Section 01350 — Submittals) 4. Pre -construction Photographs (Section 01380 — Construction Photographs) 5. Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s) (Section 01580 — Project Identification Signs) 6. Installation and acceptance of Field Office (Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7. Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements (Section 01565 - TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Installation of High Speed Internet Access (Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls) 2. Laptop Computer (Section 00800 — Special Conditions of Agreement) D. Payment for 15% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. 09/2012 01505 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G. Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions ofAgreement. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s) per Section 01580. The name, address and contact information of the general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described in Section 01580, part 1.03, D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION 09/2012 01505 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans, signs, signals, control devices, flares, lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications ofFlaggers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic Control and Regulation, including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans, provision of traffic control devices, and provision of equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer. C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. D Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name, badge number, time start, time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.4 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified, use only Flaggers who are off -duty, regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Flaggers are required at the following locations: 1. Where multi -lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single -lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly. 3. Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehicular traffic lanes and walks. 4. Where construction equipment may intermittentlyencroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross -walks. 5. Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehiculartraffic around the work site. 7. When requested by Owner. C The use of Flaggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage for which he would otherwise be liable. Flaggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires that public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with theEngineer. B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer. D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets: 1. Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations. Leave the area broom -clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day. F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parkingon or adjacent to access roads or in non -designated areas. 3.2 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. 3.3 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.4 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.5 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A Whenever necessary, bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats, angles, bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed: 1. On an existing bus route; 2. When more than five percent of dailytraffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic; 3. When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge; or 4. When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. C Install bridging to operate with minimumnoise. D Adequatelyshore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.6 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Section 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 - Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current, payment will be made by change order. C. Skid -mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Post -mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. If a post -mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post -mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance: Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker: Experienced as a professional sign company. D. Sign Placement: Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer. The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre -construction Meeting. 1. A linear project is one involving paving, overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage, or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects: Provide one project identification sign. 3. Multiple Sites: Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4. Sign Relocation: As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer. E. Alternate Skid -mounted Sign Construction: Post -mounted signs are preferred, but skid -mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another. The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid -mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: All sign materials shall be new. 1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND. 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing: 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3. Skid Members: 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4. Fasteners: a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer. c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match signbackground B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be an industrial grade, fast -drying, oil -based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural 10/2014 01580-2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS and framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather -protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D. Colors: Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-constructionMeeting or as described in part 1.03 of this Section. Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D. If mounted on posts, sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing grade for mounting of the sign and header. E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION 10/2014 01580-3 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN EXHIBIT tPEARLANDI EARLA azasaay.a. grign01131) UNON,. to atv UNC TP mA,0 (VIM K COU ONTIC A 0 E SCOffirt , - OILY) 01:i r.111( 0 L PROJECT NAME LOCATED HERE PROJECT NO. 12345678 PROJECT SCHEDULE: MONTH/YEAR BUDGET: $DOLLAR AMOUNT ENGINEER/ARCHITECT: NAME GOES HERE CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR NAME GOES HERE pearlandtmovidepartmentslengineering-capital-projects/projects SPECIAL NOTE: CONTACT CITY SECRETARY FOR CURRENT COUNCIL NAMES SINGLE SIDE MOO MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD FINISHED WITH ALKYD ENAMEL GLOSS WHITE COMPUTER CUT VINYL AND DIGITAL PRINT 5 YEAR LIFE MINIMUM MATERIALS INSTALL ON TWO 4"Xe TREATED POSTS,MIN. DEPTH IS 24, OR SKID MOUNTED AS SITE RECI'D. First Impression 04444 4 4.41.4444 04‘414d 1/15UVAIT44.044EPEOINO TEW 2,114.1.Z4 28144,646 tAX PROJECT; Capital Improvement Stomps LayoUt AINM5S, Various RITMO& Pearlend, Texas we October 2014 . RLEMIJI; capflal El °debar 2014 ?J. rearmscasastermstre iPSIMUL01930000114.031303100 FLVISLIMMOSEE01=g1L1 .,111LUVILT auouvrectionsomiscsaussi nraotraasserasasoarenonne, couracuutormarateroraw= ratIlaiESSOMitteatt 120 VC LT ELECTRICAL SERVICE CUNT TO PROW/EAU. PIII.Wrf =MCA BERMES TOME SIGN UNLESS OTHERWILIS SPEWED. CLIENT APPROVAL 10/2014 01580-4 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.3 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material, equipment, or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment, designated to be removed, except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size, type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout theWork. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.5 DELIVERY A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storagespace. 07/2006 01600 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handlingproducts. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected andundamaged. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner, by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.7 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials, and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the Work. 07/2006 01600 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the ProjectManager. F Provide off -site storage and protection when on -site storage is notadequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns, sidewalks, streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers' unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by theProject Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 07/2006 01600 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.0 GENERAL PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes, including pre - approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 1.2 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means, materials, equipment, or systems incorporated into the Work. Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re -use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.4 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre -approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as "pre -approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350 — Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre -approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible, provide products that are of the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make, or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.6 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.7 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalencyas related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen (14) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was usedand date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product ormethod specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01630 - 3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING Section 01720 FIELD SURVEYING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and referencepoints. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01760 — Project Record Documents 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is acomponent. 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 1.6 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. B Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 07/2006 01720 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.7 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner -provided survey and indicated on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points, including property corners, prior to starting site work. Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged; control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re -staking of control points lost, disturbed, or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. G Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing, disturbed, or damaged monumentation. 1.8 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering surveypractices. B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations, lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading; fill andtopsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS -NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01720 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01770 — Contract Closeout 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printedletters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection byEngineer. 1.5 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction, or "as built" conditions, including: 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and 07/2006 01760 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings andModifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set, provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770 — Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01760 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data, warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350 — Submittals 2. Section 01760 — Project Record Documents 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list, with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warrantyperiod. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.7 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application forPayment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "SubstantiallyCompleted". 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work, the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30) days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION 09/2009 01770 - 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION Section 02200 SITE PREPARATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of topsoil, stripping and stockpiling, clearing and grubbing. B Removal and disposal of waste materials, excess materials, debris and trash. C Removal of obstructions. D Excavation and fill. E Salvaging of designated item. F References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 — Submittals 3. Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 6. Section 02330 — Embankment 7. Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises G Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If Site Preparation is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit embankment material sources and product quality information in accordance this Section. 1/2018 02200 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back -dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. A Clear Project Site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those designated by Owner to be left standing. B Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees designated to remain. C Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 1. On areas required for roadway, channel, or structural excavation, remove stumps, 2" diameter or larger limbs and roots, to depth of 2 feet below lower elevation of excavation. 2. On areas required for embankment construction, remove 2" diameter limbs, stumps and roots to depth of 2 feet below ground surface 3. Trees and stumps may be cut off as close to natural ground as practicable on areas which are to be covered by at least 3 feet of embankment D Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground. E Complete operations by bulldozing, blading, and grading so that prepared area is free of holes, unplanned ditches, abrupt changes in elevations and irregular contours, and preserve drainage of area. 1. Blade entire area to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage, except in areas to be immediately excavated 1/2018 02200 - 2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A Obtain approval of topsoil quality before excavating and stockpiling. B Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. Topsoil Stripping: 1. Remove growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Topsoil is defined as surface soil found of depth of not less than 4 inches. 3. Strip topsoil to depths encountered. 4. Perform stripping in a manner to prevent intermingling of topsoil with underlying sterile subsoil and remove objectionable materials, including clay lumps, stones over 2 in. in diameter, weeds, roots, leaves, and debris. 5. Where trees are designated by Owner to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping at extreme limits of tree drip line to prevent damage to main root system. D Topsoil Stockpiling: 1. Stockpile in areas designated on Plans. 2. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3. Cover storage piles, if required to prevent wind-blown dust. 4. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Stockpile in a manner to prevent erosion. 3.03 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A Undercut, remove, and replace material which Engineer designates as unsuitable for subsequent construction. B Material used to replace unsuitable material shall be suitable material from site excavation or as indicated on Plans. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND FILL A Construction surveying shall be performed by qualified personnel under the direction of the contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and correctness of this work. In the event that the work consists of significant alteration of the topographic features of natural grade, contractor shall perform enough topographic survey to substantiate existing pre -construction elevations. No claim shall be made for additional excavation or grade adjustment in excess of quantities contained in the contract documents without demonstrable evidence that such conditions existed prior to start of the work B Depressed site areas shall be filled using material from high areas, insofar as practicable. 1/2018 02200 - 3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION C When fill obtained from high areas is exhausted, fill to indicated rough grade elevations under roadways with "Structural Fill" and open areas not under structures or roadways with "General Fill", or as indicated on Plans. D Place and compact fill in accordance with Section 02330 — Embankment. 3.05 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS AND MATERIAL A Items designated by Engineer to be salvaged are to be carefully removed, so as to cause no damage to the salvaged items and delivered to Owner's storage yard. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. END OF SECTION 1/2018 02200 - 4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A B C D E F G Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures, equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. Removing concrete curbs, concrete curb and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. Removing pipe culverts and sewers. Removing miscellaneous structures of wood, plastics, metals, concrete, masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry, etc. Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 2. Section 01350 3. Section 01500 4. Section 01100 5. Section 01730 6. Section 01140 7. Section 01562 — Measurement and Payment Procedures — Submittals — Temporary Facilities and Control — Summary of Work — Cutting and Patching — Contractor's Use of Premises — Waste Material Disposal 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If indicated as a Bid Item, measurement will be as follows: 1. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing, and removing asphaltic surfacing, is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course, with or without asphalt surfacing, is on a square yardbasis. 3. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs, is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment includes removal of all base, asphaltic surfacing, concrete pavement, esplanade curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 04/2008 02220 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. 5. Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, removing monolithic concrete curb, and removing concrete curb, is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb. 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7. Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of piperemoved. 9. Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans, or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200 — Measurement and PaymentProcedures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off, capping, and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property. C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. E Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required. 1.4 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been taken. 04/2008 02220 - 2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 1.5 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A Materials and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100 — Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition, handling and storage. Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property of the Contractor. 1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated onPlans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section, 1.03 "Submittals'. B Use of a "drop hammer" must have the Engineer's priorapproval. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition, make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated fordemolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner. C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer. D Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications, pipelines, and electrical distribution services. B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is necessary. 04/2008 02220 - 3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities, accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities, or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730 — Cutting and Patching 3.3 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors, water tanks, equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting, capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process, water, chemical, gas, fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support, capped, and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls, cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire -rated sealant for walls classified as fire -rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be altered or removed, cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping maybe left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned, fihl with sand, pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonrybulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain, remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof, making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty. F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.4 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear, distribution switchboards, control panels, bus duct, conduits and wires, panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. 04/2008 02220 - 4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that power is properly de -energized anddisconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicablecodes. 3.5 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. END OF SECTION 04/2008 02220 - 5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 07/2006 CISCO BID ITEM 0001 Data Sheet Cisco Industrial Ethernet 4000 Series Switches Developed specifically to withstand the harshest industrial manufacturing environments, these switches offer today's most flexible and scalable industrial Ethernet platform that will grow with your network. Product Overview The Cisco® Industrial Ethernet (IE) 4000 Series is the latest addition to our ruggedized switching platforms and provides superior high -bandwidth switching and proven Cisco IOS® Software -based routing capabilities for industrial environments. The IE 4000 Series delivers highly secure access and industry -leading convergence using the Cisco Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) and is built to withstand extreme environments while adhering to overall IT network design, compliance, and performance requirements. The IE 4000 Series is ideal for industrial Ethernet applications where hardened products are required, including factory automation, energy and process control, intelligent transportation systems (ITS), oil and gas field sites, city surveillance programs, and mining. With improved overall performance, greater bandwidth, a richer feature set, and enhanced hardware, the Cisco IE 4000 Series complements the current industrial Ethernet portfolio, of related Cisco industrial switches, such as the Cisco IE 2000 and IE 3000. The Cisco IE 4000 can easily be installed in your network. Through a user-friendly web device manager, the Cisco IE 4000 provides easy out -of -the -box configuration and simplified operational manageability to deliver advanced security, data, video, and voice services over industrial networks. Features and Benefits. Table 1. Features and Benefits of Cisco IE 4000 Robust Industrial Design User -Friendly GUI Device Manager SwapDrlve: "Zero-Config" Replacement High -Density. Industrial Power over Ethernet (PoE) • Built for harsh environment and temperature range (-40 to 70 C). • Hardened for vibration, shock and surge, and noise immunity. • Resilient dual ring design via 4x Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports. • Complies with multi -Industry specifications for automation, ITS, and substation environments. • Improves uptime, performance, and safety of industrial systems and equipment. • Fitted with compact, PLC (Programmable Logic Control) style DIN rail compliant form factor Ideal for industrial deployment. • Covers a wide range of Power over Ethernet (PoE) application requirements. • Allows easily configuration and monitoring via a web browser. • Eliminates the need for more complex terminal emulation programs. • Reduces the cost of deployment. • Simple. switch replacement in case of a failure. • No networking expertise required. • Helps ensure fast recovery. • Reduces complexity with one cable for both connectivity and power. • Controls costs by limiting wiring, distribution panels, and circuit breakers. • Creates space and reduces heat dissipation; • Enables ready -to -use PoE devices like IP phones and wireless access points. • Supports (on select models) maximum HD camera deployments. © 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 1 of 11 Feature Full Gigabit Ethernet Switch • Connects new wireless access point (802.11n and 802.11ac). • Enables new HD IP Cameras and new PLC (Programmable Logic Control). • Allows SCADA (Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) connectivity. • Provides Introduction of new bandwidth -hungry applications in the Industrial space. • Supports very -delay -sensitive applications and time -sensitive networks. • Delivers multiple rings, redundant ring topology for new network configurations. • Extends geographical scalability where longer distance connectivity is required. Your Ruggedized Choice for Industrial Environments The Cisco Industrial Ethernet (IE) 4000 Series offers: • Bandwidth and capacity to grow with your networking needs: 20-Gbps nonblocking switching capacity with up to 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports per switch • High -density industrial PoE/PoE+ support providing in -line power to up to 8 power devices, including IP cameras and phones, badge readers, wireless access points, etc. • Cisco IOS Software features for smooth IT integration and policy consistency • Robust resiliency enabled by dual ring design via 4x Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP), Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP), PROFINET— Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP), Etherchannel and Flexlink support, redundant power input, dying gasp, etc. • True zero -touch replacement for middle -of -the -night or middle -of -nowhere failure • Line -rate, low -latency forwarding with advanced hardware assist features (such as NAT, IEEE1588) • Simplified software upgrade path with universal images • Support of Industrial automation protocols EtherNet/IP (CIP) and PROFINET, MRP (IEC 62439-2) Figure 1 shows switch models, Table 2 shows all the available Cisco IE 4000 Series models, Table 3 list the SW license PIDs and Table 4 lists the power supplies for Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches. Figure 1. IE 4000 Models • 1E 4000=18T4G-E' •.`lE 4000-16GT4G-E r=IE 4000=8GT8GP4G-E.` •.-1E 4000 4SBP4G E IE 4000 4GS8GP4GE (E-4000-4GC4GP4G-E' d IE-4000-4T4P44G-E;i i • 1E-4000 8S4G E • IE-4000 4TG4 .IE-4000-8GT4G-E . IE-4000 8GS4G E,', 01E-4000-8T4G-E" © 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 2 of 11 Table 2. Cisco IE 4000 Series Models Product Number IE-4000-4TC4G-E IE-4000-8T4G-E IE-4000-8S4G-E Total Ports 8 12 12 GE Combo Uplinks (4G)' Additional Combo Ports 4 (FE) RJ-45 Copper Ports (T) 8 (FE) SFP Fiber Ports (S) 8 (FE) PoE/PoE+ Ports (P, GP) Default Software IE-4000-4T4P4G-E 12 4 (FE) 4 (FE) IE-4000-16T4G-E 20 16; (FE) IE-4000-4S8P4G-E 16 All models have 4 GE combo uplink 4 (FE) 8 (FE) All models ship with LAN Base IE-4000-8GT4G-E 12 ports 8 (GE) image2 IE-4000-8GS4G-E 12 8 (GE) IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E 12 4 (GE) 4 (GE) IE-4000-16GT4G-E. 20 16 (GE) IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E 20 8 (GE) 8 (GE) IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E 16 4 (GE) 8 (GE) 1 Combo ports provide one copper and one fiber physical port and only one can be activated at a time. 2 Can be upgraded to IP Services at a fee. Table 3. Cisco IE 4000 SW License and Accessories PIDs L-IE4000-RTU= LIC-MRP-Manager LIC-MRP-Client LIC-MRP-MULTI-MGR STK-RACKMNT-2955= STK-RACK-DINRAIL= Description 1E4000 Electronic software license upgrade from LAN base to IP Services MRP ring manager license MRP ring client license Multiple MRP manger license 19" DIN Rail mount kit 19 DIN Rail mount kit AU copper Gigabit Ethernet interfaces support speed negotiation to 10/100/1000 mbps and duplex negotiation. All copper. Fast Ethernet interfaces support speed negotiation to 10/100 mbps and duplex negotiation. Table 4. Power Supplies for Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches Product Number Wattage Rated Nominal Input Operating Range Supported Input Voltage Operating Range Power Output 54VDC/3.15A PoE/PoE + Support Use Case Scenario Maximum PoE/PoE+ port support in a AC or high DC environment' PWR-IE170W- PC -AC= 170W AC 100-240V/2.3A 50-60Hz or DC 125-250V/2.1A AC 90-264V or DC 106-300V Yes PWR-1E170W- PC -DC= 170W DC 12-54V/23A DC 10.8-60V 54VDC/3.15A j Yes Maximum PoE/PoE+ port support in a DC environment' PWR-1E50W-AC= PWR-IE50W- AC-IEC= 50W 50W AC 100-240V/1.25A 50-60Hz or 1 DC 125-250V/1.25A AC 100-240V/1.25A 50-60Hz AC 90-264V or DC 106-300V AC 90-264V , 24VDC/2.1A 24VDC/2.1A I I No No No PoE/PoE+ support needed in an AC or DC environment No PoE/PoE+ support needed when IEC plug Is desired © 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 3 of 11 Product Number PWR-IE65W- PC -ACC PWR4E65W- PC -DC= Rated Nominal Input Operating Range 65W AC 100-240V/1.4A 50-60Hz or DC 125-250V/1.0A 65W DC 24-48VDC/4.5A Supported Input Voltage Operating Range AC 90-264V or DC 106-300V DC 18-60V Power Output 54VDC/1.2 A Yes 54VDC/1.2 A Yes Use Case Scenario Minimum (1-;2 port) PoE support needed in an AC or high DC envlronment2 Minimum (1-2 port) PoE support needed In a DC environment2 ' The entire power budget for the switch and PoE ports needs to stay within 170W. A PoE port draws up to 15.4W of power, and a PoE+ port draws up to 30W of power. 2 The entire power budget for the switch and PoE ports needs to stay within 65W. Figure 2 shows a diagram to help you select a Cisco IE 4000 model. Figure 2. Cisco IE 4000 Model Selection Guide Copperand FiberPorts ,Can't Decitle © 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 4 of 11 Weight Table 6. Description Product Specifications Table 5 lists specifications, Table 6 gives information about switch performance and scalability, Table 7 and 8 list important software features, Table 9 lists compliance specifications, and Table 10 gives information about management and standards of the Cisco IE 4000 Series Switches. Table 5. Product Specifications Hardware Alarm Power Input Specification • 1GB DRAM • 128-MB onboard flash memory • 1-GB removable SD flash memory card • Mini-USB connector • RJ-45 connector • Alarm I/O: two alarm inputs to detect dry contact open or closed, one alarm output relay • Redundant DC input voltage with operating range: nominal 9.6 to 6OVDC • Maximum DC Input current: 3.7A (IE-4000-4T4P4G-E, IE-4000-8T4G-E, IE-4000-8GT4G-E, IE-4000-16T4G-E), 4.3A (IE- 4000-4GC4GP4G-E, IE-4000-4TC4G-E, IE-4000-4S8P4G-E, IE-4000.4GS8GP4G-E, IE-4000- 16GT4G-E; IE- 4000-8GT8GP4G-E), 5A (IE-4000-854G-E, IE-4000-8GS4G-E) Power Consumption • IE-4000-4T4P4G-E, IE-4000-8T4G-E, IE-4000-8GT4G-E, and IE=4000-16T4G-E: 35W • IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E, 1E-4000-4TC4G-E, IE-4000-4S8P4G-E, IE-4000-4GS8GP4G-E, and IE-40 00-16GT4G- E: 40W • IE-4000-8S4G-E, IE-4000-8GS4G-E: 42W • These numbers are measured at 9.6V and do not include PoE power consumption Dimensions, (H x W x D) 1 • All IE 4000 models have the following dimensions: 6.12 x 6.12 x 5.09 in. (155.4 x 155.4 x 129.2 mm) • PWR-IE170W-PC-AC=: 5.93 x 3.72 x 5.60 In. (150.6 x 94.5 x 142.2) • PWR-IE170W-PCDC=: 5.93 x 4.47 x 5.75 in. (150.6.x 113.5 x 145.8) • PWR-IE50W-AC=: 5.8 x 2.0 x 4.4 in. (147 x 51 x 112 mm) • PWR-IE50W-AC-IEC=: 5.8 x 2.0 x 4.4 In. (147 x 51 x 112 mm) • PWR-IE65W-PC-AC=: 5.9 x 2.6 x 4.6 in. (150 x 66 x 117 mm). • PWR-IE65W-PCDC=: 5.9 x 2.6 x 4.6 In. (150 x 68 x 117 mm) • All 1E4000 models listed in Table 1: 8.35 pounds (2,88 kg) • PWR=IE170W-PGAC=: 3.88 pounds (1.76 kg) • PWR-IE170W-PC-DC=: 3.7 pounds (1.67 kg) • PWR-IE50W-AC=:1.4 lb (0.65 kg) • PWR-IE50W-AC-IEC=: 1.4 lb (0.65 kg) • PWR-IE65W-PC-DC=: 2.6 (1.18 Kg) • PWR-1E65W-PC-AC=: 2.7 (1.24 Kg) Switch Performance and Scalability Forwarding rate Number of queues Unlcast MAC addresses IGMP multicast groups Number of VLANs IPv4 MAC securityACEs NAT translation Specification Line rate for all ports and all packet sizes 4 egress 16,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 with default TCAM Template Bidirectional, 128 unique subnet NAT translation entries, which can expand to tens of thousands of translated entries If designed properly O 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 5 of 11 Table 7. Cisco IE 4000 LAN BASE: Key Software Features LAN Base License (Default) Layer 2 Switching Security Layer 2 Multicast Management Industrial Ethernet Quality of Service Layer 2 IPv6 Layer 3 Routing Industrial Management Utility Features IEEE 802.1, 802.3, 802.3at, 802.3af standard, VTPv2, NTP, UDLD, CDP, LLDP, Unicast Mac filter, Flexlink, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP), Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP), VTPv3, EtherChannel, Voice VLAN, ginq tunneling SCP, SSH, SNMPv3, TACACS+, RADIUS Server/Client, MAC Address Notification, BPDU Guard, PortSecurity, Private VLAN, DHCP Snooping, Dynamic.ARP Inspection, IP Source Guard, 802.1x, Guest VLAN, MAC Authentication Bypass, 802.1x Multi -Domain Authentication, Storm Control, Trust Boundary, Cisco TrustSee supporting SGT inline tagging and SGACL, FIRS 140-2 IGMPv1, v2, v3 Snooping, IGMP filtering, IGMP Querler Fast Boot, Express Setup, Web Device Manager, Cisco Network Assistant', Cisco Prime" platforml, MIB, SmartPort, SNMP, syslog, Storm Control - Unicast, Multicast, Broadcast, SPAN Sessions, RSPAN, DHCP Server, Customized TCAM/SDM size configuration, DOM (digital optical management) CIP Ethernet/IP, Profinet v2 MRP (IEC 62439-2), IEEE 1588 PTP v2, NTP to PTP translation, CIP Time Sync Ingress Policing, Rate -Limit, Egress Queueing/shaping, AutoQoS, Modular QoS CLI (MQC) IPv6 Host support, HTTP over IPv6, SNMP over IPv6 IPv4 Static Routing Layer 2 switching with 1:1 static Network Address Translation (NAT) Power Profile, dying gasp, GOOSE messaging, SCADA protocol classification, MODBUS TCP/IP, utility SmartPort macro, BFD, Ethernet OAM, IEEE 802:3ah, CFM (IEEE 802.1ag) t Support after product General Availability Table 8. Cisco IE 4000 IP Services: Key Software Features IP Multicast Industrial Management IP Unicast Routing Protocols Cisco Express ( Hardware.routing architecture delivers extremely high-performance IP routing Forwarding IPv8 Routing RIPng, OSPFv6, and EIGRPv6 support Security IEEE 802.1AE MACsec, Security Group Access Control Lists (SGACL) Virtualizatlon VRF-llte Additional Features PIM sparse mode (PIM-SM), PIM dense mode (PIM-DM), and PIM sparse -dense mode Embedded Event Manager (EEM) OSPF, EIGRP, BGPv4, IS -IS, RIPv2, Policy -Based Routing (PBR), HSRP To enable PROFINET MRP (IEC 62439-2) functionalities on the 1E4000 switches the relevant SW license, listed in table 3 should be ordered. Table 9. Compliance Specifications Type Electromagnetic Emissions Electromagnetic Immunity Standards FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A EN 55022A Class A VCCI Class A AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A CISPR 11 Class A CISPR 22 Class A ICES 003 Class A CNS13438 Class A KN22 EN55024 CISPR 24 AS/NZS CISPR 24 @ 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved, This document is Cisco. Public Information. Page 6of1.1 Type KN24 EN 61000-4-2 Electro Static Discharge EN 61000-4-3 Radiated RF EN 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic Fast Transients N 61000-4-5 Surge EN 61000-4-6 Conducted RF EN 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-9 Pulse Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-11 AC Power Voltage EN 61000-4=18 Damped Oscillatory Wave EN-61000-4-29 DC Voltage Dips Industry Standards EN 61000-6-1 Light Industrial EN 61000-6-2 Industrial EN 61000-6-4 Industrial EN 61326 Industrial Control EN 61131-2 Programmable Controllers Substation KEMA (IEEE 1613, IEC 61850-3) NEMATS-2 (EMC, environmental, mechanical) IEEE 1613 Electric Power Stations Communications Networking IEC 61850-3 Electric Substations Communications Networking EN50155 Railway - Electronic Equipment on Rolling Stock (EMC, ENV,,Mech) EN50121-4 Railway - Signaling and Telecommunications Apparatus EN50121-3-2 Railway- Apparatus for Rolling Stock ODVA Industrial EtherNet/IP PROFINET conformance B IP30 (per EN60529) Information Technology Equipment: UL/CSA 60950-1 EN 60950-1 CB to IEC 60950-1 with all country deviations NOM to NOM-019-SCFI (through partners and distributor) Industrial Floor (Control Equipment): UL 508 CSA C22.2, No 142 Hazardous Locations: ANSI/ISA 12.12.61 CSA C22.2 No 213 IEC 60079-0, -15IECEx test report • EN 60079-0, -15 ATEX,certificatian (Class I Zone 2) Cabinet enclosure required Operating Environment Operating Temperature: -40C to +75C • -40C to +70C (Vented Enclosure Operating) • -40C to +60C (Sealed Enclosure Operating) • -34C to +75C (Fan or Blower equipped Enclosure Operating) EN 60068-2-1 EN 60068-2-2 EN 61183 Altitude: up to 15,000 feet Storage Environment Temperature: -40 to +85 degrees C Altitude: 15,000 feet IEC 60068-2-14 Humidity Shock and Vibration Safety Standards and Certifications Relative humidity of 5% to 95% non -condensing IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60068-2-30 IEC 60068-2-27 (operational shock, 500, 11 ms, Half Sine) IEC 60068-2-27 (Non -Operational Shock, 65-80G, 9ms, Trapezoidal) IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-64, EN 61373 (Operational Vibration) IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-64, EN 61373 (Nan -operational Vibration) © 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved, This document Is Cisco Public Information. Page 7 of 11 Corrosion Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) lS0 9223: Corrosion class C3-Medium class C4-High EN 60068=2-52 (Salt Fog) EN 60068-2-60 (Flowing Mixed Gas) RoHS, Compliance China RoHS Compliance TAA (Govemment) CE (Europe) Five-year limited HW warranty on all IE-4000 PIDs and all IE Power Supplies (see table 3 above). See Ilnk below for more details on warranty IE-4000-4TC4G-E: 578, 730 Hours IE-4000-8T4G-E: 591, 070 Hours IE-4000-8S4G-E: 583, 700 Hours IE-4000-4T4P4G-E: 562, 300 Hours IE-4000-16T4G-E: 558, 310 Hours IE-4000-4S8P4G-E: 535, 880 Hours IE-4000-8GT4G-E: 591, 240 Hours IE-4000-8GS4G-E: 583, 700 Hours IE-4000-4GC4GP4G-E: 550, 940 Hours IE-4000-16GT4G-E: 558, 630 Hours IE-4000-8GT8GP4G-E: 519, 190 Hours IE-4000-4GSSGP4G-E: 536, 220 Hours Table 10. Management and Standards Description IEEE Standards RFC Compliance Specification • IEEE 802.1D MAC Bridges, STP • IEEE 802.1p Layer2 COS prioritization • IEEE 802.1q VLAN • IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning -Trees • IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning -Tree • IEEE 802.1x Port Access Authentication • IEEE 802.1AB LLDP • IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation (LACP) • IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet provides up to 15.4W DC power to each end device • IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet provides up to 25.5W DC power to each end device • RFC 768: UDP • RFC 783: TFTP • RFC 791; IPv4 protocol • RFC 792: ICMP • RFC 793: TCP • RFC 826: ARP • RFC 854: Telnet • RFC 951: BOOTP • RFC 959: FTP • RFC 1157: SNMPv1 • RFC 1901,1902-1907 SNMPv2 • RFC 2273-2275: SNMPv3 • RFC 2571: SNMP.Management • RFC 1166: IP Addresses • RFC 1256: ICMP Router Discovery • IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet • IEEE 802.3at Power over Ethernet Plus • IEEE 802.3ah 100BASE-X SMF/MMF only • IEEE 802.3x full duplex on 10BASE-T • IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specification • IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX specification • IEEE 802.3ab 1000BASE-T specification • IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X specification • IEEE 1588v2 PTP Precision Time Protocol • RFC 1305: NTP • RFC 1492: TACACS+ • RFC 1493: Bridge MIB Objects • RFC 1534: DHCP and BOOTP interoperation • RFC 1542: Bootstrap Protocol • RFC 1643: Ethernet Interface MIB • RFC 1757: RMON • RFC 2068: HTTP • RFC 2131, 2132: DHCP • RFC 2236: IGMP v2 • RFC 3376: IGMP v3 • RFC 2474: DiftSery Precedence • RFC 3048: DHCP Relay Agent Information Option • RFC 3580: 802.1x RADIUS • RFC 4250-4252 SSH Protocol © 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 8 of 11 Specification SNMP MIB Objects • BRIDGE-MIB • CALISTA-DPA-MIB • CISCO-ACCESS-ENVMON-MIB •. CISCO-ADMISSION-POLICY-MIB • CISCO-AUTH-FRAMEWORK-MIB • CISCO-BRIDGE-EXT-MIB • CISCO-BULK-FILE-MIB • CISCO-CABLE-DIAG-MIB • CISCO-CALLHOME-MIB • CISCO-CAR-MIS • CISCO-CDP-MIB • CISCO-CIRCUIT-INTERFACE-MIB • CISCO-CLUSTER-MIB • CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB • CISCO-CONFIG-MAN-MIB • CISCO-DATA-COLLECTION-MIB • CISCO-DHCP-SNOOPING-MIB • CISCO-EMBEDDED-EVENT-MGR-MIB • CISCO-ENTITY-ALARM-MIB • CISCO-ENTITY-VENDORTYPE-OID-MIB • CISCO-ENVMON-MIB • CISCO-ERR-DISABLE-MIB • CISCO-FLASH-MI5 • CISCO-FTP-CLIENT-MIB • CISCO-IF-EXTENSION-MIB • CISCO-IGMP-FILTER-MIB • CISCO•IMAGE-MIB • CISCO-IP-STATTMIB • CISCO-LAG-MIB • CISCO-LICENSE-MGMT-MIB • CISCO-MAC-AUTH-BYPASS-MIB • CISCO-MAC•NOTIFICATION-MIB • CISCO-MEMORY-POOL-MIB • CISCO-PAE-MIB • CISCO-PAGP-MIB • CISCO-PING-MIB • CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB • CISCO-PORT-SECURITY-MIB • CISCO-PORT-STORM-CONTROL-MIB • CISCO-PRIVATE-VLAN-MIB •• CISCO-PROCESS-MIB • CISCO-PRODUCTS-MIB • CISCO-RESILIENT-ETHERNET-PROTOCOL-MIB • CISCO-RTTMON-ICMP-MIB • CISCO-RTTMON-IP-EXT-MIB • CISCO-RTTMON-MIB • CISCO RTTMON-RTP-MIB • CISCO-SNMP-TARGET-EXT-MIB • CISCO-STACK-MIB • CISCOSTACKMAKER-MIB • CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MIB • CISCO-SYSLOG-MIB • CISCO-TCP-MIB • CISCO-UDLDP-MIB • CISCO-VLAN-IFTABLE-RELATIONSHIP-MIB • CISCO-VLAN-MEMBERSHIP-MIB • CISCO-VTP-MIB • ENTITY-MIB • ETHERLIKE-MIB • HC-RMON-MIB • IEEE8021-PAE-MIB • IEEE8023-LAG-MIB • IF-MIB • IP-FORWARD-MIB • LLDP-EXT-MED-MIB • LLDP-EXT-PNO-MIB • LLDP-MIB • NETRANGER • NOTIFICATION-LOG-MIB • OLD=CISCO-CHASSIS-MIB • OLD-CISCO-CPU-MIB • OLD-CISCO-FLASH-MIB • OLD-CISCO-INTERFACES-MI6 • OLD-CISCO-IP-MIB • OLD-CISCO-MEMORY MIB • OLD-CISCO-SYS-MIB< • OLD-CISCO-SYSTEM-MIB • OLD-CISCO-TCP-MIB • OLD-CISCO-TS-MIB • RMON-MIB • RMON2-MIB • SMON-MIB • SNMP-COMMUNITY-MIB • SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB • SNMP-MPD-MIB • SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB • SNMP-PROXY-MIB • SNMP-TARGET-MIB • SNMP-USM-MIB • SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB • SNMPv2-MIB • TCP-MIB • UDP-MIB @ 2016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 9 of 11 Table 11. SFP Support Part Number Specification SFP Type Max. Distance Cable Type Temp Range DOM Support GLC-FE-100FX-RGD= GLC-FE-10OLX-RGD GLC-FE-100FX= GLC-FE-100LX= GLC-FE-100EX= GLC-FE-100ZX= GLC-FE-100BX-D= GLC-FE-100BX-U= GLC-SX-MM-RGD= 100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX10 100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX10 100BASE-EX 100BASE-ZX 100BASE-BX10 100BASE-BX10 1000BASESX FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE GE 2km 10km 2km 10km 40km 80km 10km 10km 550m MMF SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF MMF IND IND COM COM COM COM COM COM IND Yes Yes No No No No No Yes Yes GLC-LXSM-RGD=_ 1000BASE-LX/LH GE 550m/10km MMF/SMF IND Yea. GLC ZX-SM-RGD= GLC-BX40-U-I= GLC-BX40-D-I= GLC-BX40-DA-I= GLC-BX80-U-I= GLC-BX80-D-I= GLCSX-MMD= GLC-LH-SMD= GLC-EX-MMD= GLC-ZX-MMD= GLC-BX-D= GLC-BX-U= CWDMSFP-xxxx= (8 freq) DWDMSFP-root= (40 freq). SFP-GE=S= SFP-GE-L= SFP-GE-Z= GLCSX-MM= GLC-LHSM= GLC-ZXSM= GLC-TE= GLC T= 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-BX40 1000BASE-BX40 1000BASE-BX40 1000BASE-BX80 1000BASE-BX80 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-WLH 1000BASE-EX 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-BX10 1000BASE-BX10 CWDM 1000BASE X DWDM 1000BASE-X 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX/LH 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX/LH 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-T 1000BASE-T GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE 70km 40km 40km 40km 80km 80km 550m 550m/10km 40km 70km 10km 10km 550m 550m/10km 70km 550m 550m/10km 70km 100m 100m SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF SMF MMF MMF/SMF SMF SMF. SMF SMF SMF SMF MMF MMF/SMF SMF MMF MMF/SMF SMF Copper .Copper IND IND IND IND IND IND EXT EXT EXT EXT COM COM COM COM EXT EXT _ EXT COM COM COM EXT COM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes NA NA Note: Not all SFPs supported in all SW versions. For first software release supporting SFP refer to http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products device support tables Iist.html If non industrial (Le., EXT, COM) SFPs are used the switch operating temperature must be derated. MMF = multi -mode fiber SMF = single -mode fiber 02016 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 10 of 11 Warranty Information Warranty information for the lE 4000 is available on http://www.cisco-servicefinder.com/warrantvfinder.asox. Cisco Capital Financing to Help You Achieve Your Objectives Cisco Capital can help you acquire the technology you need to achieve your objectives and stay competitive. We can help you reduce CapEx. Accelerate your growth. Optimize your investment dollars and ROI. Cisco Capital financing gives you flexibility in acquiring hardware, software, services, and complementary third -party equipment. And there's just one predictable payment. Cisco Capital is available in more than 100 countries. Learn more. uiluuil1. CISCO. Americas Headquarters Asia Pacific Headquarters Europe Headquarters Cisco Systems. Inc. Cisco Systems (USA) Pte. Ltd. Cisco Systems International BV Amsterdam, San Jose, CA Singapore The Netherlands isco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco Website at www cisco.com/go%offices, Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates inthe :U.S.and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this UR(:; wwwcisco.com%go%trademarks. Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a' partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R) Printed in USA C78-733058-08 08/16 © 2016 Cisco andtor its affiliates. All rights reserved. This document is Cisco Public Information. Page 11 of 11 FAFLBID ITEM 0002opticaiconn.eu,ih. Poli-MOD® Patch and Splice Module AFL's new Poli-MOD is an innovative patch and splice module, which offers an inventive and effective means to accommodate up to 24 fiber interconnections in an industry -standard, single -slot LGX®118 footprint. The new Poli-MOD offers a unique and robust way to secure cable without the need for time -wasting, tie -wrap alternatives. Additionally, the module leverages a creative snap -in splice sleeve cradle to securely manage both single and ribbon fiber arrangements. These features provide the capacity J to outfit a standard 4RU rack -mount panel with up to 288-fiber interconnections. 12-Fiber SC/UPC Configuration LGX is a registered trademark or Furukawa Electric North America, Inc The Poli-MOD is also offered in an arrangement that supports the low loss budget requirements of Distributed Antenna System (DAS) networks. This is accomplished through the elimination of an interconnection point while providing a robust splicing environment for rack and wall -mount panel applications. Features • 24-fiber interconnection capacity • LGX 118 compatibility (single -slot module) • Effective and time -saving cable mounting mechanism (no tie -wraps necessary) • Inventive splice sleeve cradle • Available in SC, LC, ST and FC connector arrangements • Organized fiber routing • Fixed solution, no moving parts • Multi -directional cable entry access • DIN rail mountable (with DIN Mount Kit) Applications • Telecommunications Closets • Data Centers • Customer Premise • Local Area Networks • Wide Area Networks • Central Offices • Hub Sites • Cabinets • Remote Terminals • Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS) www.AFLglabal.com or (800) 235-3423 Cr 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00089, Revision 4, 8.6.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. FAFL Optical Connectivity PoIi-MOD® Patch and Splice Module Ordering Information Example: PM-L-12-ASC-0-S-01 PM Configuration E =Empty (Splidng Only) H=Half Loaded (Adapter Plate only) L=Loaded (Adapter Plate & Pigtails) D = DAS Pori -MOD' Fiber/Connector Count 06 = 6 Fibers/Connectors 12 =12 Fibers/Connectors 24 = 24 Fibers/Connectors, )X= Empty 1. DAS Pali -MOD requires spedalty packaging and is packaged as' 1 PaII•MOD pet box' ONLY. 2.24 Fibers/Connectors are qny available in a LC Duplex configuration. 3. Angle and Ultra-Porntxd connector types are only available with single -mode Ober configurations. Connector Color Codes CONNECTOR COLOR APC (Angled Polish Connector) Green UPC (Ultra Polish Connector) Blue PC-0M1 Beige PC-0M2 Black PC-0M3 / PC-0M4 Aqua Dimensions ASC ConnectorType' ASC = Angle -Polished SC USC = Ultra -Polished SC PSC = Multimode SC ALC = Angle -Polished LC ULC = Ultra -Polished LC PLC = Multimode LC UST = Ultra -Polished ST PST = Multimode ST AFC = Angle -Polished FC UFC = Ultra -Polished FC PFC = Multimode FC XXX = Empty FiberType 0 = Single -mode (G.657.A1 BIF) 1=62,5pm(0Mi) 2 = 50 pm (0M2) 3 = 50 pm (0M3) 4 = 50 pm (0M4) X= Empty FiberArrangement 5 = Single/Standard R = Ribbon 3 =3 mm, 3 meter DAS X = No Fiber (Half Loaded or Empty) 01, Packaging 01=1 Poll -MOD per box* 06 = 6 Poli-MODs per box 12 =12 Poll-MODs per box Poli-MOD Kits/Accessories DESCRIPTION AFL NO. Pali -MOD Cable Mounting Clip Kit ' FM003053 Poli-MOD Spiral Wrap Kit FM003280 Fusion Splice Sleeve, FP-03, 40 mm ` 5000206 Adapter Bracket for Mounting Stele Poli-MOD, angled FM000948-B Adapter Bracket for Mountin SL�Ingle.Poli-MOD, flat FM003589-B Corning CCH and PCH 145 mm Adapter Bracket FM001636 DIN Mount Kit, LGX® 118 FM003394 5.12 in. (130 min) 114in _. (29 mm) Oc0 www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 235-3423 2 t 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00089, Revision 4, 8.6.15 Specifications are subject to change without notice. Pail VI lTER1iS BID ITEM 0003 JOHN DRAKE EQUIPMENT QUOTE 1700 Carnegie Ave. Suite 100 Quote #: 032917-5-JGD Santa Ana, CA 92705-5551 Phone:, (512)592-9567 email: jgd@lteris.com, web site: www-iteris.com Eta=+' Pearlatid.Clty 2b how RRc, P_aarland, TXt7r759. ag®nty; :t IMCABIN ITE VantagePegasus SIEMENS EAGLE' March 29, 2017 fit M.0 .., .... .' ::- DESCRIPTION .. ., :. ° ;. , .NOTES QTy • SUPPLIER ; , •:UNfTcPRICE E$1 PRiCE ITEM COMM CABINET WITH POWER PANEL, SURGE SUPPRESSION AND 4 OUTLET POWER STRIP 15 011111110 EL762TX1 BBS CABINET SHELL 15 AAD16669-001 TXDOT BBS POWER PANEL 15 100102001 FAN&THERMO KIT NEMA 15 4-OUTLET BOX 4 OUTLET POWER STRIP 15 FaicoremallPurchasaOrdarsto MarllynHolden.(449)270.9441 mdh@•iteris.cam •pleaseindudoquotonumberonyaur , purihase order : SUBTO; '. Quote Temua Net 30 days, subjectto credit approval and Iteris Standard Terrtls & Conditions unless neggtiated fn writingwith Iteris. Inc. priorto`Purrhase , y ,.. r FREIGHT TAX DISCOUNT 4 z x5 "- , vTOTA1 ° Y mg mg 0.0096 Prices are vaiid;far 30 days fram tho date of quote unless' extended lifiiii tln& _ .; . • . • . ,. . :., ` FOBDestinatrori, frelghtinddded, does not tncluda:insurance_Equlpmentfrom thls quote may onlq beinstalledlln theState cf -roc` This;quotaticnandanyresuhingordere�•e•subjecttoheris'ttoadv•raySensor'ProductsStandardTerm and Conditions ofsaIe atta'diedheietooravailabieathttp`.%/www.hei(s.com/RS-StdTGpdf,'whlrh,arein"coiporatedhereinbythisi�eference.•,._,, .... 0.00% _ FAFLBID ITEM 0004 Optical Connectivity Xpress Fiber Management® (XFM®) 4RU Patch Panel The Xpress Fiber Management (XFM) 4RU patch panel is a rack mountable interconnect point specifically designed to manage dense fiber applications. Based on the LGX intermateability platform, the panel is fully compatible with AFL's XFM Optical Cassette, Poli-MOD® and WDM solutions, offering enhanced management of densities up to 288F using MTP/MPO, single fiber, or patch and splice methodologies. Routing rings on the top and bottom of the front panel provide enhanced cable routing allowing cable assemblies to exit comfortably. This panel can be provisioned with a key lock at the time of order for secure environments. Features • Aluminum construction • Textured black powder coat finish • Universal WECOITIA 19"/23" rack compatibility • (12) LGX 118 adapter plate / module mounting positions • Mounting depth adjustable from flush to 8" in 1 " increments Specifications Applications • Data Centers • Enterprise Networks • Telecommunications Closets • Central Offices / Headends DEPTH (A) IN INCHES FRONT WIDTH (B) IN INCHES REAR WIDTH (C) IN INCHES HEIGHT (D) IN INCHES RACK UNITS CAPACITY UNLOADED WEIGHT 15.5 17 15 7 4 (12) LGX 118 9lbs. Ordering Information DESCRIPTION MODEL NO. AFL NO. Xpress Fiber Management 4U Patch Panel, Black, Empty :: XFM-4U-B•0 FM00109U-B Xpress Fiber Management 4U Patch Panel, Black, Empty, Key Lock XFM-4U-B-K FM001218•B B .� Made in USA LOX Is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. www.AFLglobaicom or (800)235-3423 © 2008,AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00115, Revision 5, 4.27.17 Specifications are subject to change without notice. 618 Item 618 Conduit Naas ofrtinent Vans an 1. DESCRIPTION Fumish and install conduit. 2. MATERIALS Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans, the requirements of this Item, and the pertinent requirements of the following Items: • Item 400, "Excavation and Backfill for Structures" • Item 476, "Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box" When specified on the plans, provide: • rigid metal conduit (RMC); • intermediate metal conduit (IMC); ■ electrical metallic tubing (EMT); ■ polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit; ■ high density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit; • Iiquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC); or • liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC). Furnish conduit from new materials in accordance with DMS-11030, "Conduit." Provide prequaltfied conduit from the Department's MPL. When required by the Engineer, notify the Department in writing of selected materials from the MPL intended for use on each project. Provide other types of conduit not on the MPL that comply with the details shown on the plans and the NEC.. Fabricate fittings such as junction boxes and expansion joints from a material similar to the connecting conduit, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use watertight fittings. Do not use set screw and pressure -cast fittings. Steel compression fittings are permissible. When using HDPE conduit, provide fittings that are UL-listed as electrical conduit connectors or thermally fused using an electrically heated wound wire resistance welding method. Use red 3-in. 4-mil polyethylene underground warning tape that continuously states "Caution Buried Electrical Line Below." 3. CONSTRUCTION Perform work in accordance with the details shown on the plans and the requirements of this Item. Use established industry and utility safety practices when installing conduit located near underground utilities. Consult with the appropriate utility company before beginning work. Install conduit a minimum of 18 in. deep below finished grade unless otherwise shown on the plans. Meet the requirements of the NEC when installing conduit. Secure and support conduit placed for concrete encasement in such a manner that the alignment will not be disturbed during placement of the concrete. Cap ends of conduit and close box openings before concrete is placed. 783 618 Ream conduit to remove burrs and sharp edges. Use a standard conduit cutting die with a 3/4-in. taper per foot when conduit is threaded in the field. Fasten conduit placed on structures with conduit straps or hangers as shown on the plans or as directed. Fasten conduit within 3 ft. of each box or fitting and at other locations shown on the plans or as directed. Use metal conduit clamps that are galvanized malleable or stainless steel unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use 2-hole type clamps for 2-in. diameter or larger conduit. Fit PVC and HOPE conduit terminations with bushings or bell ends. Fit metal conduit terminations with a grounding type bushing, except conduit used for duct cable casing that does not terminate in a ground box and is not exposed at any point. Conduit terminating in threaded bossed fittings does not need a bushing. Before installation of conductors or final acceptance, pull a properly sized mandrel or piston through the conduit to ensure that it is free from obstruction. Cap or plug empty conduit placed for future use. Perform trench excavation and backfilling as shown on the plans or as directed, and in accordance with Item 400, "Excavation and Backfill for Structures." Excavation and backfilling will be subsidiary to the installation of the conduit. Jack and bore as shown on the plans or as directed, and in accordance with Item 476, "Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box." Place waming tape approximately 10 in. above trenched conduit. Where existing surfacing is removed for placing conduit, repair by backfilling with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding areas and by replacing any removed surfacing, such as asphalt pavement or concrete riprap, with like material to equivalent condition. Mark conduit locations as directed. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by the foot of conduit. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2., "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Conduit" of the type and size specified and the. installation method specified as applicable. This price is full compensation for fumishing and installing conduit; hanging, strapping, jacking, boring, tunneling, trenching, and fumishing and placing backfill; encasing in steel or concrete; replacing pavement structure, sod, riprap, curbs, or other surface; marking location of conduit (when required); furnishing and installing fittings, junction boxes, and expansion joints; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Flexible conduit will not be paid for directly but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, no payment will be allowed under this Item for conduit used on electrical services or in foundations. 784 624 Item 624 Ground Boxes Vans 0ep8� elItaportatlon 1. DESCRIPTION • Installation. Construct, fumish, and install ground boxes complete with lids. • Removal. Remove existing ground boxes. 2. MATERIALS Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans, the requirements of this Item, and the pertinent requirements of the following items; • Item 420, "Concrete Substructures" • Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" • Item 432, "Riprap" • Item 440, "Reinforcement for Concrete" • Item 618, "Conduit" • Item 620, "Electrical Conductors" Provide fabricated precast polymer concrete ground boxes in accordance with DMS-11070, "Ground Boxes." Provide prequalified ground boxes from the Department's MPL. When required by the Engineer, notify the Department in writing of selected materials from the MPL intended for use on each project. Provide other precast or cast -in -place ground boxes that comply with the details shown on the plans. 3. CONSTRUCTION Perform work in accordance with the details shown on the plans and the requirements of this Item. Use established industry and utility safety practices when installing or removing ground boxes located near underground utilities. Consult with the appropriate utility company before beginning work. 3.1. Installation. Fabricate and install ground boxes in accordance with the details, dimensions, and requirements shown on the plans. Install ground box to approved line and grade. Construct precast and cast -in -place concrete ground boxes in accordance with Item 420, "Concrete Substructures," and Item 440, "Reinforcement for Concrete." Construct concrete aprons as shown on the plans and in accordance with Item 432, "Riprap," and Item 440, "Reinforcement for Concrete." 3.2. Removal. Remove existing ground boxes and concrete aprons to at least 6 in. below the conduit level. Uncover conduit to a sufficient distance so that 90 degree bends can be removed and conduit reconnected. Clean the conduit in accordance with Item 618, "Conduit." Replace conduit within 5 ft. of the ground box. Remove old conductors and install new conductors as shown on the plans. Backfill area with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding area. Replace surfacing material with similar material to an equivalent condition. 4. MEASUREMENT This Item will be measured by each ground box installed complete in place or each ground box removed. 788 • Operates over 0 to 19 dB path attenuation • Minimum of 4K MAC addresses • Minimum of 2 MB buffer memory • MAC -based trunking • Port Mirroring D. Protocols Supported. Provide a Field Ethernet Switch that supports the following protocols: • IP Multicast Filtering through Internet Group Management (IGMP)v3 Snooping • Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) • Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) • Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) remote firmware upgrades E. Standards. Provide a Field Ethernet Switch that adheres to the following standards: • Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.1x support • IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) • IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specification • Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 support • IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Specification • IEEE 802.3x Flow Control • IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Tagging • IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Algorithm F. Management. Provide a Field Ethernet Switch that provides the following management capabilities: • Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP)/Web Browser device configuration interface • Security Access Control Lists (ACLs) • 128 MB DRAM • 64 MB Compact Flash Memory • Configurable up to 8000 MAC addresses • Configurable up to 255 IGMP groups • QoS classifies and prioritizes data • Virtual Lans (VLAN) • Per -port broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm control preventing faulty end stations from degrading overall system performance. • Telnet device configuration interface • Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 2 device status, diagnostic, and alarm monitoring and remote configuration 2-4 2339 01-15 • Remote Monitoring (RMON) network monitoring • Request for Comments (RFC)-1213-compliant Management Information Base (MIB) files • Standard and device specific MIB2 files G. Regulatory Approvals. Provide a Field Ethernet Switch that has been certified to the following regulatory standards: • Product Safety: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 1950 or 60950 • Electromagnetic Emissions: Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15, Class A • National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) TS-2 H. Dimensions. Provide a Field Ethernet Switch with dimensions that do not exceed the following maximums: • Height: 5.8 in. • Width: 6.0 in. • Depth: 4.4 in. • Weight:4.41b. I. Operating Power. Provide a Field Ethernet Switch that is designed to operate with the following power requirements: • 18-60VDC • 0.05 KVA J. Environmental. Provide a Field Ethernet Switch that is designed to operate in the following environmental conditions: • -40° to 167°F (-40°C to 75°C) operating temperature range • 13 to 185°F (-25°C to 85°C) storage temperature. range • 10% to 95% relative humidity (non -condensing) 3. Construction. A. General. Provide equipment that utilizes the latest available techniques for design and construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and modules to maximize standardization and commonality. Design the equipment for ease of maintenance. Provide component parts that are readily accessible for inspection and maintenance. Provide test points that are for checking essential voltages and waveforms. B. Electronic Components. Provide electronic components in accordance with the Special Specification, "Electronic Components." C. Mechanical Components. Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are stainless steel. Do not use self -tapping screws. 3-4 2339 01-15 Provide parts made of corrosion resistant materials, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or brass. Protect materials from fungus growth and moisture deterioration. Separate dissimilar metals by an inert dielectric material. 4. Documentation Requirements. Provide documentation in accordance with Articles 4 and 5, Special Specification, "Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance and Warranty." 5. Testing Requirements. Perform testing in accordance with Article 2, Special Specification, "Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance and Warranty." 6. Warranty. Provide a warranty in accordance with Article 7, Special Specification "Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance and Warranty." 7. Experience Requirements. Only employ personnel involved in the installation and testing of the "Field Ethernet Switch" that meet the following requirements: • Two years experience in the installation and testing of Ethernet Switches. • Two installed systems where Ethernet Switches, as described within these specifications, are installed and the systems have been in continuously satisfactory operation for at least one year. Submit photographs or other supporting documents as proof, and the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the operating personnel who can be contacted regarding the systems. • One system with Ethernet Switches (which may be one of the two in the preceding paragraph) for which the Contractor can arrange for demonstration to the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. 8. Training. Perform training in accordance with Article 3, Special Specification, "Testing, Training, Documentation, Final Acceptance and Warranty." 9. Measurement. This item will be measured as each unit furnished, installed, and tested. 10. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Field Ethernet Switch" of the type specified. This price is full compensation for equipment, cables and connectors; documentation and testing; labor, tools, materials, warranty, training, and incidentals. 4-4 2339 01-15 6007 Special Specification 6007 Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) Fiber Optic Cable Naas Oepaftnent ol7)snapo:tallon 1. DESCRIPTION Furnish, install, relocate and remove Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) fiber optic cable, fiber patch panels and splice enclosures as shown on the plans. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. General Requirements. Provide, assemble, fabricate and install materials that are new, corrosion resistant, and in accordance with the details shown on the plans and in these Specifications. Fumish, install, splice, and test all new fiber optic cable. Provide all splicing kits, fiber optic cable caps, connectors, moisture or water sealants, terminators, splice trays, fiber optic jumpers, pig tails, fiber patch panels, fiber interconnect housing, and accessories necessary to complete the fiber optic network. Provide all equipment necessary for installation, splicing, and testing. 2.2. Cable Requirements. Furnish all -dielectric, dry -filled, gel -free, loose tube fiber optic cable, with low water peak, suitable for underground conduit environments or aerial applications. Furnish self-supporting, all -dielectric, dry -filled, gel -free, loose tube fiber optic cable, with low water peak suitable for aerial applications when not lashing to strand cable. All fiber optic cable furnished must have a design life of 20 yr. when installed to the manufacturer's specifications. Splice fiber optic cables in ground boxes, field cabinets, or buildings. Terminate fiber optic cables in field cabinets and buildings that comply with the details shown on the plans and in this Specification. Provide all fiber optic cable from the same manufacturer and the manufacturer is International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9001 certified. Ensure the cables meet or exceed United States Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service (RUS) CFR 1755.900, American National Standards Institute/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ANSIIICEA) S-87-640, and Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (TIAIEIA)-492-CAAB standard. 2.3. Optical Requirements. 2.3.1. Optical Fiber. Provide ITU G.652 single mode fiber optic cable with a core diameter of 8.3 ± 0.7 microns and a cladding diameter of 125 ± 0.7 microns. Provide optical fiber made of glass consisting of a silica core surrounded by concentric silica cladding, free of imperfections and inclusions. 2.3.2. CorelClad Concentricity. Provide an offset between the center of the core and cladding less than 0.5 microns. 2.3.3. Mode Field Diameter. Provide single mode fiber optic cable with the effective area or Mode Field Diameter of the fiber must be 9.2 ± 0.4 pm at 1310 nm and 10.5 ± 1.0 pm at 1550 nm. 2.3.4. Primary Coating. Provide fiber with a coating diameter of 250 ± 15 microns. 1-13 03-16 Statewide 6007 2.3.5. Attenuation. Provide single mode fiber optic cable with nominal attenuation of 0.35 dB/km maximum at a wavelength of 1310 nm and nominal attenuation of 0.25 dB/km maximum at a wavelength of 1550 nm. Attenuation at water peak must be less than 0.35 dB/km at 1383 nm. 2.3.6. Bandwidth and Dispersion. Provide single mode fiber optic cable with a maximum dispersion of: • 3.2 pslnm-km at a wavelength of 1310 nm, and • 18 pslnm-km at a wavelength of 1550 nm. Zero dispersion wavelength must be between 1300 nm and 1324 nm and the zero dispersion slope at the zero dispersion wavelength must be less than 0,092 psl(nm2 • km). The cutoff wavelength must be less than 1260 nm for single mode fibers specified to operate at 1310 nm. The cutoff wavelength must be less than 1480 for single mode fibers specified to operate only at 1550 nm or higher. The macrobend attenuation per 100 turns must not exceed 0.05 dB at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. 2.3.7. Mechanical Requlrements(Tensile Strength). Provide a cable withstanding a pulling tension of 600 Ibf without increasing attenuation by more than 0.8 dB/mi when installing in underground conduit systems in accordance with EIA-455-33A. Conduct an impact test in accordance with TIAIEIA-455-25C (FOTP-25) and a compression load test in accordance with TIAIEIA-455-41A (FOTP-41). For all -dielectric self-supporting cable (ADSS) and other self-supporting cables, meet tensile strength requirements in accordance with Section 25, Loading of Grades B and C, of National Electric Safety Code (NESC), for the maximum span and sag Information as shown in the plans for aerial construction. 2.3.8. Bend Radius. Provide a cable withstanding a minimum bending radius of 10 times its outer diameter during operation, and 20 times its outer diameter during installation, removal and reinstallation without changing optical fiber characteristics. Test the cable in accordance with EIA-455-33A. 2.3.9. Buffering. Use a buffering tube or jacket with an outer diameter of 1.0 to 3.0 mm containing 12 individual fiber strands. The fibers must not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube. 2.3.10. Color Coding. Provide fiber and buffer tubes with a color coating applied to it by the manufacturer. Coating must not affect the optical characteristics of the fiber. Provide color configuration in accordance with TIA/EIA- 598 as follows: ■ 1. Blue • 5. Slate • 9: Yellow • 2. Orange ■ 6. White ■ 10. Violet • 3. Green • 7. Red ■ 11. Rose ■ 4. Brown ■ 8. Black ■ 12. Aqua 3. EQUIPMENT 3.1. Cable Type. Provide cables with a reverse oscillation or planetary stranding structure. Jacket construction and group configuration should separate at splice points to cut and splice 1 set of fibers while the others remain continuous. All cable jackets must have a ripcord to aid in the removal of the outer jacket. Submit cable designs for approval. Strand loose buffer tubes around a dielectric central anti -buckling strength member. Provide dielectric aramid or fiber glass strength members with specified strength for the cable. Provide cable with a water -blocking material, which is non -hygroscopic, non -nutritive to fungus, non-conductive, non -toxic, and homogeneous. The water blocking material must comply with TIA/EIA-455-81 B and 455-82B as well as TIA/EIA-455-98. 2.13 03-16 Statewide 6007 Ensure a polyethylene inner jacket is applied over the cable core, and that the entire cable is enclosed with a polyethylene outer jacket. Ensure the outer jacket contains black carbon to provide UV protection for the cable. Ensure each cable is marked with the manufacturer's name, the date of manufacture (monthlyear), the fiber count (example 48F SM), and sequential length markings at maximum 2 ft. increments, measured in U.S. units. For aerial installation, provide standard fiber optic cable lashed to steel messenger cable or ADSS in accordance with the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1222 Standard for Testing and Performance for All -Dielectric Self -Supporting (ADSS) Fiber Optic Cable for Use on Electric Utility Power Lines, or most current version. Provide ADSS cable in accordance with the maximum span distance, weather load rating, and allowable sag as shown on the plans. "Figure 8° self-supporting cable with integrated messenger cable within the outer jacket for aerial installation is acceptable. 3.1.1. Cable Size. Furnish cables with a maximum diameter not exceeding 19 mm. 3.1.2. Environmental Requirements. Provide cable that functions in a temperature range from -40°F to 158°F. 3.2. Fiber Optic Accessories. 3.2.1. Splice Enclosures. Fumish and install 1 of 3 types of underground splice enclosures at locations shown on the plans to accommodate the cables being spliced at that point. The types are as follows: ■ Type 1: 4 cable entry ports total — 2 ports to accommodate backbone fiber of up to 144 fibers and 2 ports for drop cables of up to 48 fibers, • Type 2: 6 cable entry ports total — 4 to accommodate backbone or arterial cables of up to 144 fibers and 2 ports for drop cables of up to 48 fibers, and • Type 3: 8 cable entry ports total — 4 to accommodate backbone or arterial cables of up to 144 fibers and 4 ports for drop cables of up to 48 fibers. Provide the end cap of the canister splice closure with re -enterable quick -seal cable entry ports to accommodate additional branch cables or backbone cables. Provide fiber optic splice enclosures with strain relief, splice organizers, and splice trays from the same manufacturer as the splice enclosure. Select the appropriate splice enclosure type based on the number of splices called for in the plans. Suspend all splice closures off floor of the ground box and secure to cable rack assembly on side wall of ground box. For end of reel splicing, use a fiber optic splice enclosure sized to accommodate full cable splice in one enclosure. Fiber optic splice enclosure must be of the same manufacturer as other supplied on a project. Splice enclosure and fusion splicing required for end of reel will be incidental to the fiber optic cable. Comply with the Telcordia Technologies' GR-711-CORE standard and all applicable NEC requirements. Contain all optical fiber splices within a splice enclosure, providing storage for fiber splices, nonspliced fiber, and buffer tubes. Provide sufficient space inside the enclosure to prevent microbending of buffer tubes when coiled. Ensure that the splice enclosure maintains the mechanical and environmental integrity of the fiber optic cable, encases the sheath opening in the cable, and organizes and stores optical fiber. Ensure all hinges and latching devices are stainless steel or of a non -corrosive material designed for harsh environments. Ensure that the enclosure is airtight and prevents water intrusion. Ensure that splice enclosures allow re-entry and are hermetically sealed to protect intemal components from environmental hazards and foreign material such as moisture, dust, insects, and UV light. 3.2.2. Field Rack Mount Splice Enclosures. Provide a 19 in. EIA rack mounted splice enclosure module to hold spliced fibers as shown in the plans inside field equipment cabinets or buildings. 3-13 03-16 Statewide 6007 Splice or terminate fibers inside rack mounted fiber optic splice enclosures. Provide an enclosed unit designed to house a minimum of 4 cables, sized to accommodate at a minimum the cables shown on n the. plans plus future expansion. Provide splice enclosures containing mounting brackets with a minimum of 4 cable clamps. Install cable according to manufacturer recommendations for the cable distribution panel. 3.2.3. Fiber Patch Panels. Provide fiber patch panels that are compatible with the fiber optic cable being terminated and color coded to match the optical fiber color scheme. Coil and protect a maintenance loop of at least 5 ft. of buffer tube inside the rack mount enclosure, patch panel, or splice tray. Allow for future splices in the event of a damaged splice or pigtail. 3.2.3.1. Cabinet. Terminate or splice fibers inside the compact and modular fiber patch panel in the cabinet. Provide fiber patch panel for installation inside a 19 in. EIA rack and sized appropriately to accommodate the fiber terminations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Provide each patch panel housing with pre- assembled compact modular snap -in simplex connector panel modules, each module having a minimum of 6 fiber termination/connection capabilities. Provide modules with a removable cover having 6 pre- connectorized fiber pigtails, interconnection sleeves, and dust caps installed by the manufacturer. Provide a 12 fiber or greater fusion splice tray capability housing, each tray holding 12 fusion splices as shown in the plans. Stack splice trays on a rack to permit access to individual trays without disturbing other trays. Locate splice trays in a rack within a pull-out shelf. Protect the housing with doors capable of pivoting up or down. Document the function of each terminated/spliced fiber, along with the designation of each connector on labels or charts located either on the inside or outside of the housing door. Provide labels or charts that are UV resistant design for harsh environments and used inside field equipment cabinets. Use permanent marker or method of identification that will withstand harsh environments. Provide each housing with strain relief. Terminate single mode fiber optic cable with SC connectors to the patch panels, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Install the fiber patch panel as an integral unit as shown on the plans. 3.2.3.2. Building. Provide a fiber patch panel with a modular design allowing interchangeability of connector panel module housing and splice housing within the rack, as shown on the plans. Provide the number of single mode fibers, connector panel module housings, and splice housings for the patch panel unit in the building as shown on the plans. Provide a fiber patch panel unit, installed at a height less than 7 ft., capable of housing 8 connector panel module housings or 8 splice housings. Protect the housing with doors capable of pivoting up or down and sliding into the unit. Provide 12 snap -in simplex connector panel modules with each connector panel module housing, each module having 6 fiber termination/connector capabilities. Use a pre -assembled compact modular unit with a removable cover for the snap -in simplex connector panel module having 6 pre-connectorized fiber pigtails, interconnection sleeves, and dust caps installed by the manufacturer. Provide each connector panel module housing with a jumper routing shelf, storing up to 5 ft. (minimum) of cable slack for each termination within the housing. Provide the fiber distribution unit with strain relief. Provide splice enclosure with 24 fusion splice tray capabilities, each splice tray holding 12 or more fusion splices. Stack splice trays on a rack to permit access to individual trays without disturbing other trays. Locate the rack on a pull-out shelf. Document the function of each terminated/spliced fiber, along with the designation of each connector on labels or charts located either on the inside or outside of the housing door. Provide labels or charts that are UV resistant design for harsh environments and used inside field equipment cabinets. Use permanent marker or method of identification that will withstand harsh environments. Also provide documentation of the function of each terminated or spliced fiber along with. the designation of each connector on charts or 4-13 03-16 Statewide 6007 diagrams matching the fiber patch panel configuration and locate inside cabinet document drawer. Provide documentation at the conclusion of fiber terminations and splicing. Allow terminations only in the fiber interconnect housings placed in the cabinets as shown on the plans or as directed. 3.2.4. Splice Trays. Use splice tray and fan -out tubing kit for handling each fiber. Provide a splice tray and 12 fiber fan -out tubing with each housing for use with the 250 microns coated fiber. The fan -out will occur within the splice tray (no splicing of the fiber required). Allow each tube to fan out each fiber for ease of connectorization. Label all fibers in splice tray on a log sheet securing it to the inside or outside of the splice tray. Provide UV resistant log sheet suitable for harsh environments, located inside field cabinets or splice enclosures. Provide fan -out tubing with 3 layers of protection consisting of fluoropolymer inner tube, a dielectric strength member, and a 2.9 mm minimum outer protective PVC orange jacketing. 3.2.5. Jumpers. Provide fiber optic jumper cables to cross connect the fiber patch panel to the fiber optic transmission equipment as shown on the plans or as directed. Match the core size, type, and attenuation from the cable to the simplex jumper. Use yellow jumpers and provide strain relief on the connectors. Provide fiber with a 900 micron polymer buffer, Kevlar strength member, and a PVC jacket with a maximum outer jacket of 2.4 mm in diameter. Provide 5 ft. long jumpers, unless otherwise shown on the plans. On the patch panel end of each jumper, provide an SC connector. On the opposite end of the jumper, provide a connector that is suitable to be connected to the fiber optic transmission equipment selected. When providing jumpers for existing equipment, provide connectors suitable to be connected to patch panels and fiber optic transmission equipment in use. All jumpers must have factory terminated connectors. Field terminations of connectors is prohibited. 3.2.6. Fiber Optic Cable Storage Device. Furnish fiber optic cable storage device designed to store slack fiber optic cable by means of looping back from device to device on an aerial run. Furnish storage devices that are non-conductive and resistant to fading when exposed to UV sources and changes in weather. Ensure storage devices have a captive design such that fiber-optic cable will be supported when installed in the aerial rack apparatus and the minimum bending radius will not be violated. Provide stainless steel attachment hardware for securing storage devices to messenger cable and black UV resistant tie -wraps for securing fiber-optic cable to storage device. Provide tie -wraps that do not damage fiber when securing to storage device. Ensure storage devices are stackable so multiple cable configurations are possible. Ensure cable storage devices furnished are compatible with the type of aerial cable fumished and installed. Aerial cable storage devices will be considered incidental to the installation of the fiber optic cable. 4. CONSTRUCTION Install fiber optic cable in accordance with United States Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service CFR 1755.900 specifications for underground and aerial plant construction without changing the optical and mechanical characteristics of the cables. Utilize available machinery, jacking equipment, cable pulling machinery with appropriate tension monitors, splicing and testing equipment, and other miscellaneous tools to install cable, splice fibers, attach connectors and mount hardware in cabinets employed with the above "Mechanical Requirements." Do not jerk the cable during installation. Adhere to the maximum pulling tensions of 600 Ibf and bending radius of 20 times the cable diameter or as specified by the manufacturer, whichever is greater. Use installation techniques and fixtures that provide for ease of maintenance and easy access to all components for testing and measurements. Take all precautions necessary to ensure the cable is not damaged during transport, storage, or installation. Protect as necessary the cables to prevent damage if being pulled over or around obstructions along the ground. 5-13 03-16 Statewide 6007 Where plans call for removal of existing cable to salvage or reuse elsewhere, take care to prevent damaging the existing cable during removal adhering to all of the requirements for installation that pertain to removal. 4.1. Packaging, Shipping, and Receiving. Ensure the completed cable is packaged for shipment on reels. Ensure the cable is wrapped in weather and temperature resistant covering. Ensure both ends of the cable are sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture. Securely fasten each end of the cable to the reel to prevent the cable from coming loose during transit. Provide 6 ft, of accessible cable length on each end of the cable for testing. Ensure that the complete outer jacket marking is visible on these 6 ft, of cable length. Provide each cable reel with a durable weatherproof label or tag showing the Manufacturer's name, the cable type, the actual length of cable on the reel, the Contractor's name, the contract number, and the reel number. Include a shipping record in a weatherproof envelope showing the above information and also include the date of manufacture, cable characteristics (size, attenuation, bandwidth, etc.), factory test results, cable identification number and any other pertinent information. Ensure that all cable delivered has been manufactured within 6 mo. of the delivery date. Ensure that the minimum hub diameter of the reel is at least 30 times the diameter of the cable. Provide the cable in one continuous length per reel with no factory splices in the fiber. Provide a copy of the transmission Toss test results as required by the TIAIEIA-455-61 standard, as well as results from factory tests performed prior to shipping. 4.2. Installation in Conduit. Install fiber optic cable in conduits in a method that does not alter the optical properties of the cable. If required, relocate existing cable to allow new fiber optic cable routing in conduits. When pulling the cable, do not exceed the installation bending radius. Use rollers, wheels, or guides that have radii greater than the bending radius. Use a lubricating compound to minimize friction. Use fuse links and breaks to ensure that the cable tensile strength is not exceeded. Measure the pulling tension with a mechanical device and mechanism to ensure the maximum allowable pulling tension of 600 Ibf is not exceeded at any time during installation. Provide a single 1/C #14 XHHW insulated tracer wire in conduit runs where fiber optic cable is installed. Provide cable that is UL listed solid copper wire with orange color low density polyethylene insulation suitable for conduit installation and with a voltage rating of 600V. When more than one fiber optic cable is installed through a conduit run, only one tracer wire is required. Fuse or Join tracer wires used in backbone, arterial, and drop runs, so that you have one continuous tracer wire. Terminate tracer wire at fiber optic test markers or equipment cabinets as identified in the plans for access to conduct a continuity test. Tracer wire will be paid for under Item 620, °Electrical Conductors." Provide fiat pull cord with a minimum tensile strength of 1,250 lb. in each conduit containing fiber optic cable. A traceable pull cord, with a metallic conducting material integral to the pull cord, may be substituted for a 1/C #14 tracer wire only with approval from the Department. Seal conduit ends with a 2 part urethane after installation of fiber optic cable. 4.3. Cable Installation between Pull Boxes and Cabinets or Buildings. Do not break or splice a second fiber optic cable to complete a run when pulling the cable from the nearest ground box to a cabinet or building. Pull sufficient length of cable in the ground box to reach the designated cabinet or building. Pull the cable through the cabinet to coil, splice, or terminate the cable in the cabinet or building. Do not bend the cable beyond its minimum bend radius of 20 times the diameter. Coil and tie cable inside cabinet, building, or boxes for future splicing or termination as shown in the plans. Cut off and remove the first 10 ft. of pulled or blown fiber stored. This work is incidental to this Item. Coat the open end of the coiled cable with protective coating and provide a dust cap. 4.4. Aerial Installation. Use pole attachment hardware and roller guides with safety clips to install aerial run cable. Maintain maximum allowable pulling tension of 600 Ib. ft. during the pulling process for aerial run cable by using a mechanical device. Do not allow cable to contact the ground or other obstructions between poles during installation. Do not use a motorized vehicle to generate cable pulling forces. Use a cable suspension 6-13 03-16 Statewide 6007 clamp when attaching cable tangent to a pole. Select and place cable blocks and comer blocks so as not to exceed the cable's minimum bending radius. Do not pull cable across cable hangers. Store 100 ft. of fiber- optic cable slack, for future use, on all cable runs that are continuous without splices or where specified on the plans. Store spare fiber optic cable on fiber-optic cable storage racks of the type compatible with the aerial cable furnished. Locate spare cable storage in the middle of spans between termination points. Do not store spare fiber-optic cable over roadways, driveways or railroads. Install standard cable on timber poles by lashing to steel messenger cable. Provide steel messenger cable in accordance with Item 625, "zinc Coated Steel Wire Strand." Install all -dielectric self-supporting cable (ADSS) cable on timber poles using clinching damp with cable hanger. Install aerial run cable in accordance with these specifications and as shown on the plans. Locate aerial fiber in accordance with the NESC, Section 23, with respect to vertical clearances over the ground, between conductors carried on different supporting structures, and required separation distance of the cable from bridges, buildings, and other structures. 4.5. Blowing Fiber Installation. Use either the high -air speed blowing (HASB) method or the piston method. When using the HASB method, ensure that the volume of air passing through the conduit does not exceed 600 cu. ft. per min.or the conduit manufacturers recommended air volume, whichever is more restrictive. When using the piston method, ensure that the volume of air passing through the conduit does not exceed 300 cu. ft. per min.or the conduit manufacturer's recommended air volume, whichever is more restrictive. 4.6. Slack Cable. Pull and store excess cable slack inside ITS ground boxes as shown on the plans. The following are minimum required lengths of slack cable, unless otherwise directed: • ground boxes (No Splice) - 25 ft., • ground boxes (With Splice) -100 ft., ■ future splice point - 100 ft., and • cabinets - 25 ft. Note that the slack is to be equally distributed on either side of the splice enclosure and secured to cable storage racks within the ground boxes. Provide proper storage of slack cable, both long term and short term. Neatly bind cables to be spliced together from conduit to splice enclosure with tape. Do not over bind by pinching cable or fiber. Ground and bond the armor when installing armored fiber optic cable. Meet NEC and NESC requirements for grounding and bonding when using armored cable. 4.7. Removal, Relocation and Reinstallation of Fiber Optic Cable. Remove fiber optic cable from conduit as shown on plans. Use care in removing existing fiber optic cables so as not to damage them. Provide cable removal and reinstallation procedures that meet the minimum bending radius and tensile loading requirements during removal and reinstallation so that optical and mechanical characteristics of the existing cables are not degraded. Use entry guide chutes to guide the cable out of and in to existing or proposed conduit, utilizing lubricating compound where possible to minimize cable -to -conduit friction. Use corner rollers (wheels) with a radius not less than the minimum installation bending radius of cable. Dispose of removed fiber optic cable unless plans show for it to be re -used (relocated/re-installed) or salvaged and delivered to the Department. See plans for details. Test each optical fiber in the cable for performance and for loss at existing terminations or splices prior to cutting and removal. Retest following removal and following re- installation to ensure the removal and reinstallation has not affected the optical properties of the cable. My fiber optic cable damaged by the contractor that is to be re -used shall be replaced by the contractor at no cost to the Department with new fiber optic cable meeting the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to reject the fiber based on the test results. Maintain the integrity of existing cables, conduit, junction boxes and ground boxes contiguous to the section of cables to be removed. Replace or repair any cables, conduit, junction boxes or ground boxes damaged during work at the Contractor's expense. The replacement or repair method must be approved by the Engineer, prior to implementation. 7.13 03-16 Statewide 6007 4.8. Splicing Requirements. Fusion splice fibers as shown on the plans, in accordance with TIA/E1A-568 and TIA/EIA-758. Use fusion splicing equipment recommended by the cable manufacturer. Clean, calibrate, and adjust the fusion splicing equipment at the start of each shift. Use splice enclosures, organizers, cable end preparation tools, and procedures compatible with the cable fumished. Employ local injection and detection techniques and auto fusion time control power monitoring to ensure proper alignment during fusion splicing. When approaching end of shift or end of day, complete all splicing at the location. Package each spliced fiber in a protective sleeve or housing. Re -coat bare fiber with a protective 8 RTV, gel or similar substance, prior to application of the sleeve or housing. Perform splices with losses no greater than 0.10 dB. Use an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) to test splices in accordance with Section 4.13.1.1. Record splice losses on a tabular form and submit for approval. 4.9. Termination Requirements. Provide matching connectors with 900 micron buffer fiber pigtails of sufficient length and splice the corresponding optical fibers in cabinets where the optical fibers are to be connected to terminal equipment. Buffer, strengthen, and protect pre -terminated fiber assemblies (pigtails) with dielectric aramid yam and outer PVC jacket to reduce mishandling that can damage the fiber or connection. Pigtails must be duplex stranding with a yellow PVC outer jacket. Fiber optic pigtails must be factory terminated with SC connectors, unless otherwise shown on the plans. When providing pigtails for existing equipment, provide connectors suitable to be connected to patch panels and fiber optic transmission equipment in use. Connectors must meet the TINEIA-568 and TIA/EIA-758 standards and be tested in accordance to the Telcordia/Bellcore GR-326-CORE standard. When tested according to TIA/EIA=455-171(FOTP-171), ensure that the connectors test to an average insertion loss of less than or equal to 0.4 dB and a maximum loss of less than or equal to 0.75 dB for any mated connector. Maintain this loss characteristic for a minimum of 500 disconnections and reconnections with periodic cleanings per EIA-455-21A (FOTP-21). Qualify and accept connectors by the connector -to -connector mating using similar fibers. Ensure that the connector operating range is -40°F to 167°F. Provide connectors with a yellow color body or boot. Test connections at the patch panel and splices made between cables to pigtails with the OTDR to verify acceptable losses. Remove 5 ft. of unused optical fibers at the ends of the system from the buffer tube(s) and place coiled fibers into a splice tray. Clean the water blocking compound from all optical fibers destined for splice tray usage. Install cable tags at all splice points identifying key features of each cable such as cable name or origin and destination and fiber count. Ensure tags are self -laminating or water resistant. Print the information onto the tags electronically or write neatly using a permanent marker. Locate tags just prior to entrance into splice enclosure. 4.10. Mechanical Components. Provide stainless steel external screws, nuts and locking washers. Do not use self -tapping screws unless approved. Provide corrosion resistant material parts and materials resistant to fungus growth and moisture deterioration. 4.11. Experience Requirements. 4.11.1. Installing Fiber Optic Cable. The Contractor or designated subcontractor involved in the installation of the fiber optic cable must meet the experience requirements in accordance with the following: • minimum of 3 yr. of continuous existence offering services in the installation of fiber optic cable through an outdoor conduit system or aerial and terminating in ground boxes, field cabinets or enclosures or buildings, and 8.13 03-16 Statewide 6007 • completed a minimum of 3 projects where the personnel pulled a minimum of 5 mi. in length of fiber optic cable through an outdoor conduit system of aerial for each project. The completed fiber optic cable systems must have been in continuous satisfactory operation for a minimum of 1 yr. 4.11.2. Splicing and Testing of Fiber Optic Cable. The Contractor or designated subcontractor involved in the splicing and testing of fiber optic cable must meet the experience requirements in accordance with the following: 4.11.2.1. Minimum Experience. 3 yr. continuous existence offering services in the fields of fusion splicing and testing of fiber optic cable installed through a conduit system and terminating in ground boxes, field cabinets or enclosures or buildings. Experience must include all of the following: • termination of a minimum of 48 fibers within a fiber distribution frame, • OTDR testing and measurement of end to end attenuation of single mode and multimode fibers, • system troubleshooting and maintenance, ■ training of personnel in system maintenance, • use of water -tight splice enclosures, and • fusion splicing of fiber optic cable which meet the tolerable decibel (dB) losses within the range of 0.05 dB - 0.10 dB for single mode. 4.11.2.2. Completed Projects. A minimum of 3 completed projects where the personnel performed fiber optic cable splicing and terminations, system testing, system troubleshooting and maintenance during the course of the project and provided training on system maintenance. Each project must have consisted of a minimum 5 mi. of fiber optic cable installed, measured by project length not linear feet of fiber installed. The completed fiber optic cable systems must have been in continuous satisfactory operation for a minimum of 1 yr. 4.12. Documentation Requirements. Provide a minimum of 2 complete sets of fiber optic equipment submittal literature documenting compliance with the requirements of this Item including operation and maintenance manuals in hard copy format, bound, as well as an electronic version in Adobe PDF format on a CD/DVD or removable flash drive that includes the following: • fiber optic cable literature consisting of manufacturer specification and cut sheets, ■ fiber optic equipment literature consisting of manufacturer specification and cut sheets for splice enclosures, patch panels, splice trays, jumpers, cable storage devices, and fiber optic labeling devices, • complete factory performance data documenting conformance with the performance and testing standards referenced in this Item, including pre -installation test results of the cable system, • installation, splicing, terminating and testing plan and procedures, • documentation of final terminated or spliced fibers, function, and equipment designation, • OTDR calibration certificate, • post -installation, post termination, subsystem, and final end -to -end test results, • loss budget calculation and documentation, ■ complete parts list including names of vendors, ■ complete maintenance and trouble -shooting procedures, and • proof of minimum experience and completed projects. 4.12.1. Installation Practice. Submit for approval electronic copy of the Contractors Installation Practices 30 working days prior to installation. Submit installation practices and procedures and a list of installation, splicing and test equipment used. Provide detailed field quality control procedures and corrective action procedures. 4.12.2. Manufacturer's Certification. Accompany each reel of fiber optic cable with the manufacturer's test data showing the conformance to the requirements in this Item. 4.12.3. Test Procedures. Submit test procedures and data forms for the pre -installation, post -installation, subsystem, final end to end test, and loss budget calculations for approval. Test procedures will require 9-13 03-16 Statewide 6007 approval before performing tests. Submit 1 copy data forms containing data and quantitative results, as well as an authorized signature. Submit a copy of the OTDR results as a hard copy or electronic copy in PDF format including all OTDR traces and clearly identifying each event (fusion splice, jumper, connector, etc.) with the measured loss identified. 4.13. Testing. Perform tests in accordance with testing requirements in this Item, USDA RUS CFR 1755.900, and TIAIEIA-455-61 test specifications. For all tests, provide test forms to be used that compare measured results with threshold values. 4.13.1. Test Methods. 4.13.1.1. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) Tests. Use the OTDR to measure fiber optic cable for overall attenuation (signal loss dB/km), fiber cable length, and identify fiber optic cable anomalies such as breaks. Perform the following 4 OTDR tests: • pre -Installation test (Acceptance test), ■ post installation test, • post termination test, and • final end to end test. OTDR Settings: • generate a file name for each OTDR scan. The file name must indicate the location or direction the test was run from, as well as the fiber number being tested, • set the "A" cursor at the beginning of the fiber trace and set the "B" cursor at the end of the fiber trace. The distance to cursor "B" indicates the length of the fiber cable segment being measured, • match the index of refraction to the index of the factory report, • set the loss indicator to dBlkm for the acceptance test, • the reflectance is automatically set internally by the OTDR, • set the pulse width at a medium range. Change the pulse width to a slow pulse width when an anomaly occurs on the fiber trace so that it can be examined closely, • set the average atmedium speed. Change the average to slow when an anomaly appears on the fiber trace to allow for closer examination of the anomaly, and ■ set wavelength at 2 windows for single mode cable: 1310 nm and 1550 nm. Provide the current OTDR calibration certificate for the device used, showing the unit has been calibrated within the last year. Show all settings on test result fiber scans. 4.13.1.2. Pre -installation Tests. Test and record the fiber optic cable at the site storage area prior to installation. Conduct bi-directional OTDR tests for each fiber strand. Test each optical fiber in the cable from one end with an OTDR compatible with wavelength and fiber type. Check testing for length, point discontinuity, and approximate attenuation. Record each measurement by color, location, and type of fiber measured. Perform a measurement from the opposite end of that fiber in case a measurement cannot be made from one end. Wait for notification if loss per kilometer exceeds manufacturer's test data by more than 0.5 dBlkm or point discontinuity greater than 0.05 dB. Perform this test within 5 days from receipt of the fiber optic cable. Test overall attenuation (dB/km), total cable length, anomalies, and cable problems. Test cable at both wavelengths (1310 nm and 1550 nm for single mode cable). Verify that the cable markings on the outer jacket are within 1 % of the total cable length. Compare factory test results with test results and retum to manufacturer if test results are not identical to factory test results. If identical, document the test results. Deliver documentation for future reference. 4.13.1.3. Post -installation Tests. Re -test and re-record each optical fiber in the cable after installation, before termination, for loss characteristics. Test both directions of operations of the fiber. 10.13 03-16 Statewide 6007 Immediately perform the post installation test after the fiber optic cable has been installed. Test cable for overall attenuation, cable segment length, and evidence of damage or microbend with the OTDR. Replace any cable segment that is damaged during the test and document test results. Submit test results for approval. Use the same OTDR settings for Post -Installation Tests as the Pre -Installation Tests. 4.13.1.4. Post Termination Tests. Perform the post termination test after the cable is terminated or spliced, including termination of fiber cable to fiber cable or fiber cable to fiber pigtail and fiber cable to patch panels. Check attenuation, fusion or termination point problems, and overall fiber cable segment. Determine if the attenuation and quality of the termination complies with these Specifications; if not, re -terminate the fiber and re -test until the Specification requirements are met. Test the fiber segment for attenuation and anomalies after termination acceptance. Document and submit test results after fiber segment acceptance. 4.13.1.5. Subsystem Tests. Perform network subsystem tests after integration to the fiber optic network. Test the capability of the fiber optic cable to transmit video and digital information from node to node. A node is defined as a communication cabinet, hub cabinet, surveillance cabinet, or hub building where network hub switches are located. Complete and submit approved data forms for approval. Correct and substitute components in the subsystem if the subsystem tests fail and repeat the tests. Components may include: cable, jumper, patch panel module, or connector. Prepare and submit a report if a component was modified as result of the subsystem test failure. Describe in the report the failure and action taken to remedy the situation. 4.13.1.6. Final End -to -End Test. Perform final end to end Test after fiber cable segments of the system are terminated using the OTDR and an optical Power Meter and Light Source (PMLS). Perform the Part 1 of the final end to end test using OTDR: • measure the overall fiber cable system length, • measure the overall system attenuation, and ■ check for anomalies. Perform the Part 2 of the final end to end test using a PMLS: • measure the absolute power of the fiber optic signal across all links, and • check for anomalies. Document and submit results after test acceptance. 4.13.2. Loss Budget Calculation and Documentation. Calculate the total loss budget of the system according to the following calculations and compare the actual loss in each segment of the system to the calculated budget. Submit the results for each section of fiber optic cable in tabular format reporting if the total loss is within the limits of these Specifications by noting "pass" or "fail" for each segment of fiber. A segment of fiber is defined as one that terminates at each end. Use the following calculations to determine the loss budget for each segment: • splice loss budget = number of splices x 0.1 dB/splice, • connector loss budget = number of connectors x 0.75 dB/connector, ■ length loss budget = length of fiber optic cable (measured by OTDR) x 0.35 dB/km for 1310 nm wavelength or 0.25 dB/km for 1550 nm wavelength, and • total Loss Budget = splice loss budget + connector loss budget + length loss budget. Provide loss budget calculation equations on test form to be submitted as part of the documentation requirements. Provide threshold calculations described above along with measured results. 11.13 03-16 Statewide 6007 4.14. Training. Conduct a BISCI or IMSA certified training class (minimum of 16 hr.) for up to 10 representatives designated by the Department on procedures of installation, operations, testing, maintenance and repair of all equipment specified within this specification. Submit to the Engineer for approval, 10 copies of the training material at least 30 days before the training begins. Conduct training within the local area unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer Include the following training material: • NESC, NEC, and ANSI/TIA 590 code compliance, • fiber optic cable pulling and installation techniques, • use of installation tools, • splicing and terminating equipment and test instruments, • trouble shooting procedures, and • methods of recording installation and test data. 4.15. Warranty. Provide a warranty for all materials furnished in this Item. Ensure that the fiber optic cable, the splice enclosures, splice centers, and cable markers have a minimum of a 2 yr. manufacturer's warranty and that 95% of that warranty remains at the date of final acceptance by the Engineer. If the manufacturer's warranties for the components are for a longer period, those longer period warranties will apply. Guarantee that the materials and equipment furnished and installed for this project performs according to the manufacturer's specifications. Ensure that the manufacturers warranties for off -the -shelf equipment consisting of splice enclosures, splice trays, connectors, fiber jumper cables, and fiber patch panels are fully transferable from the Contractor to the Department. Ensure that these warranties require the manufacturer to fumish replacements for any off -the - shelf part or equipment found to be defective during the warranty period at no cost to the Department within 10 calendar days of notification by the Department. Ensure that the manufacturer's warranty for fiber optic cable is fully transferable from the Contractor to the Department. Ensure that the warranty requires the manufacturer to fumish replacement fiber optic cable found to be defective during the warranty period at no cost to the Department within 45 calendar days of notification by the Department. 5. MEASUREMENT Fiber optic cable installed, relocated and removed will be measured by the linear foot. Fiber optic splice enclosures, rack mounted splice enclosures and fiber optic patch panels will be measured by each unit installed. Splicing of Fiber Optic Cables will be measured by each fusion splice performed. 6. PAYMENT 6.1. Furnish and Install. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Fiber Optic Cable" of the various types, and number of fibers specified. This price is full compensation for fumishing and installing all cable; for pulling through conduit or duct; aerial installation; terminating; testing; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, warranty, training and incidentals. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Fiber Optic Splice Enclosure" of the various types and "Rack Mounted Splice Enclosure." This price is full compensation for fumishing and installing all enclosures whether aerial, underground, in cabinet or in building; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, warranty, training and incidentals. The work performed and materials fumished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Fiber Optic Fusion Splice" for each fusion splice 12.13 03-16 Statewide 6007 shown on the plans and performed. This price is full compensation for splicing; testing; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, warranty, training and incidentals. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Fiber Patch Panel" of the various types and sizes specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing all patch panels and terminating fibers on the panelas shown on the plans; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, warranty, training and incidentals. Conduit will be paid for under Item 618, "Conduit" and Special Specification 6016, "ITS Multi -Duct Conduit." Electrical conductors will be paid for under Item 620, "Electrical Conductors." 6.2. Install Only. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit bid price for "Fiber Optic Cable (Install Only)" of the various types, and number of fibers specified. This price is full compensation for installing fiber optic cable fumished by the Department; for pulling through conduit or duct; aerial installation; terminating; testing; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, warranty, training and incidentals. Conduit will be paid for under Item 618, "Conduit" and Special Specification 6016, "ITS Multi -Duct Conduit." Electrical conductors will be paid for under Item 620, "Electrical Conductors." 6.3. Relocate. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for `Relocate Fiber Optic Cable." This price is full compensation for relocating all cable, regardless of cable size; for pulling through conduit or duct; aerial installation; terminating; testing; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, and incidentals. 6.4. Remove. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Remove Fiber Optic Cable". This price is full compensation for removing all cable for salvage, regardless of cable size; testing; returning to the Department; and for materials, equipment, labor, tools, documentation, and incidentals. 13 -13 03-16 Statewide CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: March 19, 2021 PROJECT: Hughes Ranch Road -Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan BID NO.: 0321-20 BID DATE: Thursday, April 1, 2021 at 2:00 p.m. FROM: Karl F. Rothermel, P.E., PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager Cobb, Fendley & Associates, Inc. 1920 Country Place Pkwy #400, Pearland Tx 77584 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Pre -Bid Meeting Agenda and sign -in sheet Section 00300 - Proposal Form Part B SPECIFICATIONS: Add Bid Item 0005 - Wall Mount Interconnect Enclosure (WME) - Fiber Optic Patch Panel (24 Position) CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: Plan Change 1 - Sheet 3 (corrected to include add Bid Item 0005) END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 Karl F. Rothermel, P.E., PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager OF 4® :..411% KARL F. ROTHERMEL4 -VA 116355 lii,'s ,tt� Qnn� a"ts 2-22-12 3-19-2021 00900 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECTS DEPARTMENT 3519 Liberty Drive, Suite 300 Pearland, Texas 77581 pearlandtx.gov/projects PRE -BID MEETING AGENDA Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan March 18, 2021 11:00 AM Council Chambers/ Virtual 1) Introduction of Participants 2) Introduction of the Project a) Project Name: Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan b) City of Pearland Project Number: TR1201 c) Bid No: 0321-28 d) City of Pearland Project Manager: Skipper Jones 2559 Hillhouse Pearland, TX 77584 281.652.1748 office e) Design Engineer: Karl Rothermel, P.E. Cobb Fendley KRothermelncobbfendley. com 3) Project Overview a) Overview of Work Installation of 12- strand single mode and 24 strand single mode fiber optic cable in 2-inch HDPE conduit including ground boxes, fiber markers between the City's Westside Event Center, along Country Place Parkway to Hughes Ranch Road and tying into existing traffic signal cabinets at Miller Ranch Road and Bryant Court, daisy chaining in two School Zone flashers at Challenger Elementary and then extending to Cullen Parkway. Work includes the installation of one ethernet switch and up to 7 splice enclosures, 17 poly -mod Patch & Splice modules, 3 BBU System cabinet components, 1 Fiber patch panel, approximately 13,910 feet of 12 strand fiber and 13,560 feet of 24 strand fiber. b) Preliminary Cost Estimates i) Approximately $344,700 $546,526 (Addendum 1 included) c) Construction concerns i) Work will be inside the project limits of the Hughes Ranch Road reconstruction project currently underway Contractor is Triple B Services, Superintendent's name is Shad Bass 832 465 0854 ii) Fiber work will largely be confined to the south Right of Way. Triple B is currently constructing the westbound lanes within the north Right of Way. iii) Right of way has been finally dressed, hydro -mulched and irrigation will be in construction iv) No permits are required for this work Design 1 of 2 D36 Revised 2016 v) Steve Byington with Cobb Fendley is the project Construction Manager; Coordinate all activities through him and his staff sbyington@,cobbfendley.com 713 962 7522 4) Bidding Process a) Advertised: Mar. 10 2021 & Mar. 17, 2021 in Pearland Journal. b) Construction Plans & Specs available for download at City's EBID system. All bids should be submitted through the E-Bid system located on the City's website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Bidders are advised to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-Bid System at the above website by clicking on "Supplier Registration" and completing a short registration questionnaire. Electronic Bid Documents, including Plans, Technical Specifications and Bid Forms are available for download after registration is approved by City Purchasing office. No plan fees or deposits are required for bid documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. Questions regarding electronic bidding should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. c) Sealed bids due: April 1, 2021 by 2:00 pm (via EBID system). Bids will be opened and read aloud after the 2:00 pm deadline. Location: City Hall Council Chamber. d) Bidder Qualifications — may be asked to submit e) Bid Security — Five percent (5%) bid security must accompany each bid proposal in the form of certified check, cashier's check or Bid Bond 5) Contract a) Award i) Notice of Award — Successful Bidder shall return Standard Form of Agreement and Payment and Performance Bond Forms within 10 days of notification of Intent to Award. ii) Notice to Proceed — Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed b) Project Duration i) Substantial Completion: 90 days from date of Notice to Proceed ii) Complete/Final Payment: 30 days iii) Liquidated Damages: $500.00 per day 6) Closing comments Anything that has been said during the Pre -bid Conference is for the purpose of assisting in the clarification of the details of this project. This discussion is intended to be helpful to the potential bidders, but in no way is it meant to change anything contained in the Bid Documents. Additional questions regarding to project plans or bid documents must be submitted in writing to the Design Engineer. Bidders must rely on Addenda for official answers to issues that are either not covered or are ambiguous in the Bid Documents. All Pre -Bid participants will be notified of future Addenda, if required. Interested bidders are responsible for obtaining Addenda from the Design Consultant. The City expects the highest standards of customer service and customer satisfaction. Field personnel must extend courtesy, cooperation, and rapid response to customer concerns. Communicate any customer request, complaints, and/or concerns to the Project Manager, Construction Manager, or the Construction Inspector as soon as possible. 7) Questions Design 2 of 2 D36 Revised 2016 Pre -Bid Sign -In Sheet Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan COP Project TR1201 March 18, 2021 http://pearlandtx.gov/departments/engineering-and-capital-proiects/projects Name Company Email Phone Dean Terrall Alcott Inc dba TCH dterrell(a)_tchdrillers.com Mike Handford The Fishel Company Roger Cole The Fishel Company rlcole(a�teamfishel.com Will Giovengo TDC2 wgiovengofttdc2.com M&T Underground Inc office.mtunderground(a@gmail.com 307.347.2663 Scott Mackinaw TDC2 smackinawtdc2.com Armando Sanchez texshot17naximail.com 713.261.9752 Ed Kupferer TDC2 ekufererftdc2.com Chad D. Evans, P.E. Evans Directional Drilling Services chad.evansOevansdirectional.com 281.615.7171 Veronica Pena City of Pearland voena atearlandtx.gov 281.652.1751 Sergio Becerril City of Pearland sbecerrMpearlandtx.gov 281.652.1642 Jennifer Lee (Project Manager) City of Pearland jlee(apearlandtx.gov 281.924.2005 Karl Rothermel (Engineer) Cobb Fendley krothermel(a�cobbfendley.com 225.938.5792 *To be included in consultant's meeting minutes *Consultant can add incorporate their information to bring to meetings Admin 1 of 1 4. Revised 7/25/08 'ARLAND OSAL PROPOSAL FORM PART B Quantity UOM Description Spec Reference Unit Price Total Amount Base Bid Site Preparation & Earthwork $15,000.00 $15,000.00 1 1 LS MOBILIZATION (MAXIMUM 3%) 1505 $7,000.00 $7,000.00 2 1 LS TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1555 $8,000.00 $8,000.00 Base Bid Signalization $224,999.58 $224,999.58 3 200 LF CONDUIT (HDPE 2" (ORANGE)) TxDOT-618 $12.50 $,2500.00 4 11,610 LF CONDUIT (HDPE 2" (BORED) (ORANGE) TxDOT-618 $12.50 $145,125.00 5 34 EA GROUND BOX TY 1 (122422) W/APRON TxDOT-624 $823.52 $27,999.68 6 1 EA FIELD ETHERNET SWITCH' BID ITEM 0001 $.01 $.01 7 7 EA FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURE - UNDERGROUND, WATERPROOF$2,500.00 TxDOT-6007 $17,500.00 8 12 EA POLI-MOD PATCH AND SPLICE MODULE] BID ITEM 0002 $582.22 $9,897.74 9 13,910 LF FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(12 FIBER) TxDOT-6007 .25 $3,477.50 10 13,560 EA FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(24 FIBER) TxDOT-6007 35 $4, Y46.00 $2,36U.0U 11 35 EA FIBER OPTIC CABLE ROAD MARKER TxDOT-6007 68.00 12 3 EA BBU SYSTEM (EXTERNAL BATT CABINET) - CABINET/POWER SOURCE ONLY - FOR FIBER SYSTEM USE BID ITEM 0003 $3,950.00 $11,850.00 13 1 EA FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (144 POSITION) BID ITEM 0004 765.25 $556.50 $ I65.25 14 3 EA FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (24 POSITION) BID ITEM 0005 $1, 669.50 NOTE: 1. Field Ethernet Switch will be supplied by the City. 2. Number of splice enclosures to be determined by length of fiber cable run lengths which may vary. Fiber cable run lengths shall be approved by the City. The cost of the splices within the enclosures are incidental to the cost of the enclosure. 3. The cost of the splices within the poli-mod patch and splice modules are incidental to the cost of the module. Bidder's Initials: 00300 - Part B - 1 of 1 PAFLBID ITEM 0005 Optical Connectivity WME01 WME01 rear mounting clip for DIN rail WME01 with DIN rail mounting kit LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric Narth America, Inc Wall Mount Interconnect Enclosure (WME) with One LGX® Mounting Position AFL's wall mount interconnect enclosure (WME01) provides a convenient convergence point for interconnecting and/or splicing in wall mount applications. Provisioned for one LGX-compatible adapter plate or optical module, the enclosure features a well -engineered solution for fiber and cable management on both the top and bottom openings of the enclosure. Robust steel construction ensures the highest level of protection for sensitive components while integrated roll -formed hinges eliminate possible fiber pinch points. The WME01 features a front access door which is lockable with a common pad -lock or tube -style keyed lock. Features • Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross -connect and co -location environments • U-shaped cable entry eliminates the need to feed preconnectoriized cables through an inconvenient access port • Modular design fully compatible with Poli-MOD® products and XFM®optical cassettes • Locking option for flexibility and security • Available empty, with adapters, or with adapters, splice chip and pigtails pre -installed • LGX 118 compatible • Optional DIN rail mounting kit (sold separately) • All major connector types are supported Applications • Co -Location sites • Customer premise • Hub/OTN sites • Telecommunication closets • Campus/enterprise environments Specifications • Solid steel construction • Powder coat black textured finish • Top or bottom cable entry with dust resistant grommets • Single -hasp locking/security system • 12 to 24 fiber patch and splice density • One LGX mounting position • Physical dimensions: 5.6"H x 7"W x 1.5"D • Empty version weight: 2.0 lbs. www.AFLglobaLcom or (800)235-3423 42 ® 2016, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00236, Revision 1, 2.15.16 Specifications are subject to change without notice. FAFL Optical Connectivity Wall Mount Interconnect Enclosure (WME) with One LGX® Mounting Position Ordering Information EMPTY DESCRIPTION AFL NO. WME01 Empty WME01 E HALF LOADED: WME•WITH ADAPTER PLATES AND ADAPTERS ONLY CONN. TYPE FIBER Ci. AFL NO. UPC SM (BLUE) APC SM (GREEN) PC MM 62.5 (BEIGE) PC MM 50 (BLACK) PC MM 0M3 (AQUA) PC MM 0M4 (AQUA) SC 6 WMEO1AS-USCSM-006000 WMEOIAS-ASCSM-006000 WMEOIAS•PSCM6-006000 WMEOIAS-PSCM5-006000 WMEOIAS-PSCML-006000 WMEO1AS-PSCMC-006000 12 WMEO1AS-USCSM-012000 WMEOIAS-ASCSM-012000 WMEOIAS-PSCM6-012000 WMEO1AS-PSCMS-012000 WMEOIAS-PSCML-012000 WMEOIAS-PSCMC-012000 LC 6 WMEQIAS-UDLSM-006000 WMEOIAS-ADLSM-006000 WMEOIAS-PDLM6.006000 WMEO1AS•PDLM5-006000 WMEOIAS-PDLML-006000 WMEOIAS-PDLMC-006000 12 WMEO1AS-UDLSM-012000 WMEO1AS•ADLSM-012000 WMEOIAS•PDLM6.012000 WMEO1AS•PDLMS-012000 WMEOIAS-PDLML-012000 WMEOIAS•PDLMC-012000 24 WMEO1AH-UDISM-024000 WMEOIAH-ADLSM•024000 WMEO1AH-PDLM6-024000 WMEO1AH-PDLM5-024000 WMEO1AH-PDLML-024000 WMEOIAH•PDLMC-024000 ST 6 WMEO1AS-USTSM-006000 — WMEO1AS-PSTM6-006000 WMEO1AS-PSTMS-006000 WMEo1AS-PSTML-006000 WMEOIAS-PSTMC-006000 12 WMEO1AS-USTSM-012000 — WMEO1AS-PSTM6-012000 WMEO1AS-PSTM5-012000 WMEO1AS-PSTML-012000 WMEOIAS-PSTMC-012000 FC 6 WMEO1AS-UFCSM-006000 WMEOIAS-AFCSM-006000 WMEOIAS-PFCM6.006000 WMEO1AS-PFCM5-006000 WMEO1AS-PFCML-006000 WMEOIAS-PFCMC-006000 12 WMEOIAS-UFCSM-012000 WMEO1AS-AFCSM-012000 WMEOIAS•PFCM6.012000 WMEOIAS-PFCM5-012000 WMEOIAS-PFCML-012000 WMEOIAS-PFCMC-012000 LOADED: WME WITH ADAPTER PLATES/ADAPTERS/SPLICE CHIP/PIGTAIL (900 pm TIGHT BUFFERED FIBERS 3 METERS IN LENGTH) CONN. TYPE FIBER CL AFL NO. UPC SM (BLUE) APC SM (GREEN) PC MM 62.5 (BEIGE) PC MM 50 (BLACK) PC MM 0M3 (AQUA) PC MM 0M4 (AQUA) SC 6 WMEO1FS-USCSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-ASCSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PSCM6.0061C0 WMEO1FS-PSCM5-0061C0 WMEO1FS=PSCML-0061C0 WMEO1FSPPSCMC-0061C0 12 WMEO1FS-USCSM-0121C0 WMEO1FS-ASCSM-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PSCM6-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PSCM5-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PSCML-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PSCMC-0121C0 LC 6 WMEO1FS-UDLSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-ADLSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PDLM6-0061C0 WMEO1FS•PDLMS-0061C0 WMEOIFS-PDLML-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PDLMC-0061C0 12 WMEO1FS-UDLSM-0121CO WMEO1FS-ADLSM-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PDLM6-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PDLM5-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PDLML-0121C0 WME01FS-PDLMC-0121C0 24 WMEO1FH-UDLSM-0241C0 WMEOIFH-ADI:SM-0241C0 WME01FH-PDLM6-0241C0 WMEO1FH-PDLM5-0241C0 WMEOIFH-PDLML-0241C0 WMEO1FH-PDLMC-0241C0 ST 6 WMEO1FS-USTSM-0061C0 — WMEO1FS-PSTM6-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PSTM5-0061C0 WME01FS`-PSTML-0061C0 WME01FS-PSTMC-0061C0 12 WMEO1FS-USTSM-0121CO — WMEO1FS-PSTM6-0121C0 WMEO1FS•PSTM5-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PSTML-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PSTMC-0121C0 FC 6 WMEO1FS-UFCSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-AFCSM-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PFCM6-0061C0 WMEO1FS-PFCM5-0061C0 WMEOIFS-PFCML-0061C0 WME01FS-PFCMC-0061C0 12 WMEO1FS-UFCSM-0121C0 WMEO1FS-AFCSM-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PFCM6-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PFCMS-0121C0 WMEOIFS-PFCML-0121C0 WMEO1FS-PFCMC-0121C0 ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION AFL NO. DIN Mount Kit, LGX® 118 (Nylon DIN Clips and Screws) FM003388 Connector/Adapter Key TYPE DESCRIPTION ASC Angle Polish SC (ZR) sleeve-SM ASF Angle Polish SC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM PSC Physical Polish SC (PB) sleeve-MM PSF Physical Polish SC Duplex (PB) sleeve-MM USC Ultra Polish SC with (ZR) sleeve-SM USF Ultra Polish SC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc. TYPE DESCRIPTION PST Physical Polish ST (PB) sleeve-MM UST Ultra Polish ST (ZR) sleeve-SM AFC Angle Palish FC (ZR) sleeve-SM PFC Physical Polish FC (PB) sleeve•MM UFC Ultra Polish FC (ZR) sleeve-SM TYPE DESCRIPTION ADL Angle Polish LC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM PDL Physical Polish LC Duplex (PB) sleeve-MM PLC Physical Polish LC (PB) sleeve-MM UDL Ultra Polish LC Duplex (ZR) sleeve-SM ULC Ultra Polish LC (ZR) sleeve-SM www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 235-3423 43 © 2016, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00236, Revision 1, 2.15.16 Spedfications are subject to change without notice. CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM PROJECT: BID NO.: BID DATE: FROM: Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date: March 29, 2021 Hughes Ranch Road -Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan 0321-20 Thursday, April 1, 2021 at 2:00 p.m. Karl F. Rothermel, P.E., PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager Cobb, Fendley & Associates, Inc. 1920 Country Place Pkwy tt'100, Pearland Tx 77584 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Section 00300 - Proposal Form Part B (Poli-mod quantity correction) Questions: 1. Project plan Sheet 7 proposed signal controller cabinet (by others). This will not be including in this RFP? Signal controller cabinet was installed as part of a separate project - BBU side cabinet is to be installed and the fiber will be connected to the controller via Poli-MOD splices and patch panel inside BBU cabinet. 2. The existing signal controller cabinets. Will any work need to be performed to these cabinets? Is this RFP to bring the fiber to the MMP at the signal controller only? Existing traffic signal controller cabinets shown on Sheets 7, 12, and 16 will need to have a side BBU cabinet installed so that the 12-fiber cable can be connected to the controller via Poli-MOD splices and patch panel inside BBU cabinet. 3. Is there any signal installation with this RFP or is this for the fiber install only? There are no signal installations for this project - this project connects 3 recently installed traffic control signals to the City's network as well as two school flasher assemblies. 2-22-12 00900 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM 4. Only materials to be provided by the City is Field Ethernet switch? That is correct - only the field ethernet switch will be provided by the City. 5. Ground boxes size? 12x24x22? This will house 2" duct and 50ft coils of 12ct & 24ct fiber. Would a 24x36x24 be more efficient? As shown on Sheet 3 of the plans, Type 1 ground boxes (12x24x22) will be used to minimize disruption of recent improvements within the project ROW. Also see question #14. 6. Project sheet 25 shows 2" orange HDPE to be ran up the outside of the wall. Does this need to be 2" EMT with a LB going inside the building instead? No. 7. Project sheet 25 also shows 2" HPDE going across the ceiling. Does this need to be plenum duct instead? No. 8. What are the fiber testing requirements? OTDR, Bi-Directional? Sheet 50 - 1300.22 Fiber Optic Cable Testing section states all of the City's testing requirements. 9. Will there be any electrical installation required? No. 10. Will 12AWG tracer wire be required to install along with the fiber inside the 2" HDPE duct? Yes. 11. Will there be any engineering or permits required by the contractor? It is not anticipated that permits will be required. 12. Will the City be providing 2" HDPE, 12/24 fiber/ tracer wire, and ground boxes? No, the contractor will supply and install those items. 13. RFP shows a quantity of 17 Poli-MOD patch panel but can only account for 12 through the project. Where are the remaining 5 to be intstalled? Original plans had a 96- and 12-fiber throughout the project, hence the 17 Poli-MODs. 12 Poli-MODs are to to be used. Plans and Project Manual will be changed in this Addendum to reduce that amount to 12. 14. Are the 12- and 24-fiber underground splice locations going to be combined in the same enclosure or spliced separately? That is up to the contractor's discretion. Groundbox size may prevent both cables to be spliced within the same enclosure. Type 2 boxes may be used (after City approval of the contractor's change order) if splices are to be co -located. SPECIFICATIONS: N/A CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: Plan Change 2 - Sheet 3 (Poli-MOD patch and splice module quantity correction) END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 2-22-12 00900 - 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Karl F. Rothermel, P.E., PTOE Senior Associate I Project Manager ... 4.. 7 KARL F. ROTHERMEL fr3tik. 116355 40 'fro siltoiTiCarxSieS" 3-29-2021 2-22-12 00900 - 3 of 3 CITY, - EARLAND _ PROPOSAL FORM PART B Quantity UOM Description Spec Reference Unit Price Total Amount Base Bid Site Preparation & Earthwork $15,000.00 $15,000.00 1 1 LS MOB1LIZATIONMAXTh4UM3%) 1505 $7,000.00 $7,000.00 2 1 LS TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1555 $8,000.00 $8,000.00 Base Bid Signalization $224,999.58 $224,999.58 3 200 LF CONDUIT PE 2" (ORANGE)) TxDOT-618 $12.50 $,2500.00 4 11,610 LF CONDUIT (HDPE 2" (BORED) (ORANGE) TxDOT-618 /$12.50 $145,125.00 5 34 EA GROUND BOX TY 1 (122422) W/APRON TxDOT-624 $823.52 $27.999.68 6 1 EA FIELD ETHERNET SWITCH' BID ITEM 0001 .01 $.01 7 7 EA FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURE - UNDERGROUND, WATERPROOF2 TxDOT-6007 $2,500.00 $17,500.00 8 17 EA POLI-MOD PATCH AND SPLICE ODULE3 13m ITEM 0002 $582.22 $9,897.74 9 13,910 LF FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(12 FIBER) TxDOT-6007 $.25 $3,477.50 $4,746.00 $2 380.00 10 13,560 EA FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(24 FIBER) TxDOT-6007 35 11 35 EA FIBER OPTIC CABLE ROAD MARKER TxDOT-6007 $68.00 12 3 EA BBU SYSTEM (EXTERNAL l3ATT CABINET) - CABINET/POWER SOURCE ONLY - FOR FIBER SYSTEM USE BID ITEM 0003 $3,950.00 $11,850.00 13 1 EA FB3ER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (144 POSITION) BID ITEM 0004 65.25 556.50 $765.25 $1.669.50 14 3 EA FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (24 POSITION) BID ITEM ocos NOTE: 1. Field Ethernet Switch will be supplied'by the City. 2. Number of splice enclosures to be determined by length of fiber cable run lengths which may vary. Fiber cable run lengths shall be approved by the City. The cost of the splices.within the enclosures are incidental to the cost of the "enclosure. 3. The cost of the splices within the poli-mod patch and splice modules are incidental to the cost of the module. Bidder's Initials: f, 00300 - Part B -1 of City of Pearland, Texas Hughes Ranch Road Fiber Optic Network Connection Plan TR1201 (March 2021) 03/04/2021 MAYOR Kevin Cole COUNCIL Mayor Pro Tern Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 5 Position 6 Position 7 Adrian Hernandez Luke Orlando Tony Carbone Alex Kamkar J. David Little Trent Perez Woody Owens CITY MANAGER Clay Pearson Deputy City Manager Trent Epperson Director of Engineering Robert D. Upton, P.E. Assistant City Manager Ron Fraser Director of Public Works Clarence Wittwer CobbFendley WIPE Firm Registration Na. 274 Firm ThPSI%N,1�O487p. 100487 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 ' Pearland; Texas17504 201.993.49521 rax281,993.8086 wvatcobbrendley,com / Drawing List NFAI 1 TITLE SHEET 2 GENERAL NOTES 3 SUMMARY OF QUANTITIES 4 TYPICAL SECTIONS FIBER-OPTIC PLAN LAYOUT6 5 OVERALL PRGJECTIAYOUT 6-24 FIBER PLAN SHEETS 25 WESTSIDE EVENT CENTER ACCESS AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS 26 FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS 27 TYPICAL SPLICE DETAIL STANDARDS AND DETAILe 28-39 TXDOT BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 40-42 TXDOT ELECTRICAL DETAILS 43-52 CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES 53 GROUND BOX STANDARD 54-55 ITS FIBER OPTIC CABLE MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 56-58 TXDOT TRAFFIC CONTROL STANDARDS SUBMITTED BY: APPROVED BY: Karl Rothermel, PTOE Cobb. Fendley & Asqpltes, Inc. Robert D. Upton, P.E. Director of Engineering DATE: 03/04/2021 DATE: 20e1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT DUMP ANY DIRT OR OTHER MATERIALS ONTO A PROPERTY BEING OUTSIDE OF THE BOUNDARY OF THE PERMITTED PROJECT AND WITHIN THE CITY OF PEARLAND CITY LIMITS WITHOUT A VALID DEVELOPMENT/GRADING PERMIT ISSUED TO THE OFFSITE PROPERTY OWNER BY THE CITY OF PEARLAND ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. IF SUCH DUMPING IS TO OCCUR WITHOUT A VALID PERMIT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF ANY DISCARDED DIRT OR OTHER MATERIALS TO AN APPROVED LOCATION AT THE CONTRACTOR EXPENSE. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADEQUATELY PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURES, UTILITIES, TREES, SHRUBS, AND PERMANENT OBJECTS WHICH ARE NOT SCHEDULED TO BE REMOVED AS A PART OF THIS PROJECT. PRIOR TO THE REMOVAL OF ANY TREES A CLEAR AND GRUB PERMIT MUST BE OBTAINED FROM THE URBAN FORESTER 281.412.8900. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN ACCESS TO RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO THE WORK AREA AT ALL TIMES. 4. ON ALL PAVEMENT TO BE REMOVED, INCLUDING CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS AND SIDEWALKS, ALL REMOVAL MUST BE APPROVED PRIOR TO WORK AND THE PAVEMENT SHALL BE SAWCUT TO FULL DEPTH PRIOR TO REMOVAL. 5. ALL WORK WITHIN CITY OF PEARLAND RIGHTS -OF -WAY OR PUBLIC EASEMENTS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIFICATIONS, ACCEPTED STANDARDS AND APPROVED DETAILS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING AND UNDERSTANDING ALL RELEVANT INFORMATION PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL EITHER SCHEDULE A PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING OR NOTIFY SKIPPER JONES AT 281.652.1748 OF A PREVIOUSLY SCHEDULED PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING. THE PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING SHALL BE HELD A MINIMUM OF 48 HOURS PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CONSTRUCTION METHODS WITH THE CITY OF PEARLAND. CONTACT SKIPPER JONES FROM THE CITY OF PEARLAND AT 281.652.1748 TO COORDINATE. 7. THE CONTRACTOR IS NOT AUTHORIZED TO OPERATE WATER/SANITARY INFRASTRUCTURE UTILITIES, OWNED OR OPERATED BY THE CITY OF PEARLAND. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE CITY OF PEARLAND PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT TO REQUEST CITY OF PEARLAND PUBLIC WORKS AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ALL UTILITY OPERATIONS. 8. ALL BORE PITS ARE TO BE CLOSED NIGHTLY. CLEAN UP AND RESTORE AREA ONCE BORING IS COMPLETE. CONTRACTOR MUST USE SILT FENCE AROUND ALL BORE PITS. SILT FENCE IS SUBSIDIARY TO CONDUIT BORING. 9. FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL MEASURES, SEE TXDOT STANDARDS TCP(1-1)-12 (SHEET 56), TCP(1-2)-12 (SHEET 57) AND TCP(1-4)-12 (SHEET 58) PROVIDED IN THIS PLAN SET. 10. PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL PROPOSED GROUND BOX LOCATIONS WITH THE. CITY OF PEARLAND. CONTACT SKIPPER JONES FROM THE CITY OF PEARLAND AT 281.652.1748 TO COORDINATE. 11. THERE SHOULD BE A COIL OF 50' OF FIBER OPTIC CABLE SLACK IN ALL PROPOSED GROUND BOXES UNLESS NOTED DIFFERENTLY IN THE SHEET NOTES AND THERE SHOULD BE A COIL OF 25' OF FIBER OPTIC CABLE SLACK FOR ALL EXISTING GROUND BOXES. 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAXIMIZE THE FIBER OPTIC CABLE RUN LENGTHS AND MINIMIZE THE NUMBER OF SPLICES AND ENCLOSURES REQUIRED. THE CONTRACTOR MUST RECEIVE APPROVAL OF THE FIBER OPTIC RUN LENGTHS FROM THE CITY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. SPLICES WITHIN THE ENCLOSURES ARE INCIDENTAL TO THE COST OF THE ENCLOSURES. 13. FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL SHALL BE XPRESS FIBER MANAGEMENT (XFM) 4RU PATCH PANEL OR EQUIVALENT TO BE APPROVED BY SKIPPER JONES FROM THE CITY OF PEARLAND. 14. SET BOXES TO A MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO FIBER PULL TENSILE STRENGTH LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 15. BORED CONDUIT MUST HAVE A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 42" BELOW THE SURFACE. 16. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT ONE CALL FOR UTILITY MARKING. 17. CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN UP AND RE -GRADE SHOULDERS AND ADJACENT GRASS AREAS, INCLUDING REMOVAL OF MUD OR DIRT STAINS ON FRESH CONCRETE. CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR OR REPLACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS THAT ARE DAMAGED OR REMOVED. CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR ALL VEGETATION, INCLUDING SOD OR SEEDING PER SECTION 1140. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. J•sP'. 9s+#�j 1*. /\ .*0 i KARL F.ROTHERMEL S y �'• 116355 �47 r �, SwfNAL �• .0 r ML0 3/4/2021 CobbFendley TVIS Firm aegstrat,, No. 1004e. 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993.4952114x 281.993.8086 www.cobbrendley.00m City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN GENERAL NOTES Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn By. JE Cbkd By. KR Seale: SHEET HO VE R: N/A VE2 RT: N/A OF 58 WESTSIDE EVENT CENTER TO CULLEN PARKWAY ITEM CODE ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY 1505 XXXX MOBILIZATION LS 1 1555 XXXX TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION LS 1 618 XXXX 2" HDPE (ORANGE) LF 200 618 XXXX 2" HDPE (ORANGE) (BORED) LF 11,610 624 6014 GROUND BOX TY 1 (122422) W/APRON EA 34 0001 XXXX FIELD ETHERNET SWITCH EA 1 0002 XXXX POLI-MOD PATCH AND SPLICE MODULE EA 12 6007 6012 FIBER OPTIC CBL (SNGLE-MODE)(24 FIBER) LF 13,560 6007 6026 FIBER OPTIC CABLE ROAD MARKER EA 35 0003 XXXX BBU SYSTEM (EXTERNAL BATT CABINET) - CABINET/POWER SOURCE ONLY - FOR FIBER SYSTEM USE EA 3 F P C ( I 1 0 5 XXXX FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL (24 POSITION) WME01 EA rv- =SET BOXES TO A MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO FIBER PULL TENSILE STRENGTH LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET ==TO BE SUPPLIED BY CITY ===MINIMIZE THE NUMBER OF SPLICES USED WHILE MAXIMIZING FIBER OPTIC RUN LENGTHS. NUMBER OF SPLICES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE CITY. FIBER SPLICES ARE INCIDENTAL TO THE SPLICE ENCLOSURES. ====FIBER PANEL RECOMMENDED BY THE CITY �I WME01 ADDED 3/19 JCE KFR A QUANTITY ADJUSTED 3/29JCE KFR MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. tE of t4944irp;�I S RL F.ROTHERMEL PdoKA116355 � ti4Fs•.�ENSF: G�•2'o 4 S/ONAL��r� j 3/4/2021 C_obbFendley TWEr acaPatxay;aas7 1920 Caunby Place Parkway. Soils 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 2131.993.495211.281.993.8086 www.cobbfeneley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN SUMMARY OF QUANTITIES Project No.: 09008 Dete: MARCH 2021 Own By JE Chia' By. KR Scale: SHEET HORT: N/A vERr: N/A OF 58 VARIES FROM 0 6' T O 15' 11' 1- SIDEWALK CENTERLINE COUNTRY PLACE PARKWAY 11' 11' fi 11' fi 12' 1 °k*NN---2" HDPE EXISTING TYPICAL SECTION WITH PROPOSED CONDUIT COUNTRY PLACE PARKWAY FACING NORTH CENTERLINE WB CENTERLINE CENTERLINE WB HUGHES RANCH ROAD HUGHES RANCH ROAD HUGHES RANCH ROAD 0 6' 2.5' 12' (/) X W SIDEWALK �I i 2/ 12' 8' i 8 12' r EXIST ROW 12' 2.5' 6' t 2/ PROPOSED TYPICAL SECTION HUGHES RANCH ROAD FACING EAST J Q uJ 0 (n EXIST ROW II 2 HDPE NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY. FIBER LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. UTILITY LOCATIONS NEED TO BE CONFIRMED BY THE CONTRACTOR. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. S KARL F. ROTHERMEL i 4 tii Fss/ ENS•-�G` r kg4.0 3/4/2021 CW116355 1 " dPCobbFendley TEIPLS ��;a!I ay.Sua 1920 Country Pleoe Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993A952 if. 281.993.8086 www.00bbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN TYPICAL SECTIONS Proloa No.: 09008 Dale: MARCH 2O21 Ms By. JE Chkd By KR Scale: HORZ: NIA VERT: N/A SHEET 4 OF 58 SCALE. N.T.S. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. 9`1 tkil,4 .fe•4 • d "•P' 9SIII a*. /" •* S KARL F.ROTHERMEL y $', 116355 �� T IIIryoFssi CENSF:NG��r NMM�r wre0 L. 744 3/4/2021 CobbFendley Tape Prm steam. 0e.575 TOPLaFirm 6 aoaas, 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 Pearland. Texas 77584 281.993495211.281.993.8086 ww4.coOMerkley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN OVERALL PROJECT LAYOUT Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn By. JE Chke By: KR SHEET 5 Scale: HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A OF 58 NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 5. SEE WESTSIDE EVENT CENTER ACCESS AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS (SHEET 25) PROPOSED_ GROUND-'BO) W/"APRON PROPOSED FIBER. MARKER — OE— E - - W — WW - - X — 2" HDPE St( 24 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SM. 12 FIBER OPTIC . CABLE TRACER WIRE - ` PROPOSED FIBER MARKER 2HDPE SM=-24 OPTIC CABLE. }SSA 12 FIB6R.•ORTIV*CABLE' TRACER WIRE :„., ', ,. PROPOSED TYPE .GROUNDjBOX W/ APRON GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON LEGEND PROOSED-TYPE 1~ GROU D 8OXF;W/ APRON MATCHLINE A ® EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET ❑ PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND —FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 - 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. vommmum- r 4 *. /\ .* 000;KAF.ROTHERMEL $'- 116355 ti•Fs. •CENSE-G``�� S/ NAL t. 4P ki40 3/4/2021 CobbFendley u113,5 Rpm Reghlration No l 00457 192D Country Place Parkway,Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281 993.49521 fax 281.993.8D86 www.cobblendley.00m City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN WESTSIDE EVENT CNTR TO MATCH LINE A Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Own By. JE Chkd By: KR Style: SHEET HORZ: 1,50' VERT: N/A 6 OF 58 MATCHLINE A 'PROPOSED?;TYPE GROUND 'BOX, W/ APRON - PROPOSED. FIBER MARKER' 2" -HDPE. •�� SM 24 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SM 12 FIBER OPTIC -CABLE, TRACER WIRE PROPOSED TYPE ,1 GROUND 'BOX W/ APRON - PROPOSED FIBER ° MARK SM 24 FIBER OPTI,C CABLE SM. 12 FIBER OPTICCABLE A 'TRACER WIRE NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 5. SEE SPLICE DETAIL (SHEET 27). 6. A COIL OF 50' OF 2 -12 STRAND SM FIBER OPTIC CABLE SLACK SHOULD BE IN PROPOSED GROUND BOX TO BE CONNECTED TO PROPOSED SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET. PROPOSED,ITTYPE 11 GROfNelkiap -Aim AFRO-. P OPOSED+FIBER `MARKER 12TOPE2 SM 12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TRACER WIRE PROPOSED S GNAL CONTROLLE CABINET (BY�OTHERS) ;,,�, 2" HDPE - • SM 24 FIBER- OPTIC CABLE '_ • SM 12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TRACER WIRR2` — G — GAS LINE — OE — OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY E - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY — W — WATER LINE - WW - WASTEWATER — X — ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON LEGEND: co MATCHLINE EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON - PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) 0 PROPOSED FIBER MARKER TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND —FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE I � I 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. w 1m ePEE OFT F�� , `s-I�*•��i$ i KARL F.ROTHERMEL i ' 116355 '�� ISFs• gEN .•04.• .. %I NAL - F .r% g1i�""`v 3/4/2021 C_obNobFenclley F.n aooP <way. u to 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77586 281.993.49521 fax 281.993.8086 mew.eobbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE A TO MATCH LINE B Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 owe By. JE Chkd By. KR Scale: HORZ: 1"=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 7 OF 58 OD w z J U 1- Q - PROPOSED TYPE i GROUND -:BOX; V APRON.' NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. - G —OE— E — UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY - W - WATER LINE - WW - WASTEWATER - X - ABANDONED WATER LINE GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I FGFND: - FOL- -C- EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) PROPOSED FIBER MARKER TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CNK. OesP ?s 4i a*:IP; /\ .* �GG KARL F. ROTHERMEL SI... 116355 �4, 4%hs• EN .•04.: Si *Alta: 6N�r tm� 3/4/2021 CObbFendley 'WE Finn lieg.ralian Me. VA rwr1n,ay.,ee,a 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993A95211ax 281.993.8086 ewx.cebbrendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE B TO MATCH LINE C Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 DwnOy. JE Cnlcd By: KR Scale: HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 8 OF 58, MATCHLINE C NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 2" HDPE n _ ..SM;,,24- FIBER 'OPTIC„CABLE_:~ 12 -FIBER OPTIC'CABL'E" " sTRACERr WIRE - 0 - -OE- - E — W - - WW - - X — ID GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON PROPOSED;TYPI GROUND_ BOX'=1N I F(,END: MATCHLINE 0 EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET QQ PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) o PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER — ABOVE GROUND — FOL— TIME WARNER — FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER — CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. �W\\q .tom 11 OF 41 1*. /\ •* i KARL F. ROTHERMEL 0 -- VW, 116355 Zir SFS•.CENSF:.G< S NAL E�.s►e gC 3/4/2021 CobbFendley rpm Rep.....tae�, -1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993.49521 fax 281.993.8088 www.cobbfendley.05m City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD — FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE C TO MATCH LINE D Project No.: 09008 Dale: MARCH 2021 Own By. JE Chkd By: KR Seale: HORZ: V 50' VERT: N/A SHEET 9 OF 58 MATCHLINE D NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. SM 24AFIBER OPTICCABLE SM'; _12 FGER OPTIC'; CABLE TRACER WIRE - G - GAS LINE - OE - OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY E - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY - W - WATER LINE - WW - WASTEWATER - X - ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON SED;FIBER MARKER k PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUN8 BOX /APRONkT I FGEND: MATCHLINE E EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET Do PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT GORED) O PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND -FOL- TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC - C - TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN: CHK. ,GG ROTHERMEL i355 • ��C i":11::./ C.. ENS��. G� rt 3/4/2021 CobbFendley TouF.m .kwayo. ;a0., 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearlane, Texas TT586 281.993A9521 fax 281.9939086 www.mbbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE D TO MATCH LINE E Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 own By JE CIIkd By. KR Scale: HORZ: VERT N/A 1'=50' SHEET . 10 OF 58 MATCHLINE E NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. — G — 2 HDPE- a, SM�24.`FIBER.,0 j ISM.12 :FIBER OPTI( ,TRACER* ;WIRED GAS LINE - OE - OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY E - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY - W - WATER LINE - WW - WASTEWATER - X - ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I FUND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET ) PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON - PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) 0 PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND -FOL- TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC - C - TIME WARNER - CABLE AMMER 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. +. /\ • ► i • EL t1;71,F(111.frm5Tclit, S�F h• Voivivir M0 3/4/2021 CobbFendley 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.99349521fax 281.993.8086 www.cobbfendley.eom City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE E TO MATCH LINE F Project No.: 09008 Dale: MARCH 2021 Dwn By: JE Cnkd ByKR SCAM. HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 11 OF 58 MATCHLINE F NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 5. SEE SPLICE DETAIL (SHEET 27). 2". HOPE SM 24 -FIBER OPTIC CABLE?' Sp�t2 FIBER OPTIC CABLE y TRACER WIRE-'—= PROPOSED' FIBER. MARKER` GGG OPOSED-TY ROUND BO 2 HOPE' 2 - SM 12 FABER=O= TRACER WIRE.- — G — GAS LINE — OE — OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY E — UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY — W — WATER LINE — WW — WASTEWATER — X — ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON UGHESRANCH:•r:R 2" HDPE SM-24. FIBER OPR1Tjl CABYE SM 12 FIBER OPTJC3CABLE TRACER WIRE_ I FCFND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON — — — — — PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND —FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25r 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN: CHK. .tom•-cE • O TF 41I J �P • ;yss I, s.� 1 � . a • s �.. i� .*. 1 RF.ROTHERMEL yKA•, L 116355 ��: h�E CENSF:• ?.0 jr ve&,NAIL MVis 3/4/2021 CobbFendley TSP.Pa,pistatimka100.7 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suile 319 Pearland, Texas T7584 281.993A952 b fax 281.993.8086 www.coCEfendlaycom City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE F TO MATCH LINE G Project No.: 09008 Dale: MARCH 2021 Dwn By. JE Cnkd Br KR Scale: SHEET HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A 12 OF 58 MATCHLINE G NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 'SM"24 IBER8OPTIC CABLE SM 12 FIBER- 0P,TIC' CABLE =_ TRACER WIRE • ` --• - — G - - OE— E — - W - - WW - -X— ID GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON •PROPOSED FIBER`FMARKER I FGEND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET ❑O PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) o PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND —FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. i*• /\ •* 40:KARL F.ROTHERMEL �' 116355 •��: �i�� .!i O• w.. y• Fssi • NG�r �Nao ia(L9 3/4/2021 CobbFendley aisualbn rN.224 IBMS Fmmaryeuetion No.1 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suiteulte 310 Pearland. Texas 72584 281.991.4952I fax 281.993.8086 www.00ehtemley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE G TO MATCH LINE H Project No.: 09008 Dale: MARCH 2021 Own By. JE Chkd By. KR Scale: HORZ: 1e=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 13 OF 58 MATCHLINE H NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. — G - -OE— E - - W - - WW - - X — jD GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON ( 2.4 HopE , SM 24 FIBER OPTICt CABLE ,')SM 12,:FIBER OPTIC `C ABLE TRACER WIRE I FGFND: MATCHLINE I 110 EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) O PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND — FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. W\p% a? OF TF441 P•• • KARL F.ROTHERMEL 7 • 116355 4; 10:10ENO. ki 4f .S.pNAL `.� 3/4/2021 CHK. CobbFendley eimalwn W. n4 m RepPPa 1920 Country Place Parkway Suite 310 Pearland. Texas 77584 201.993A9521 fax 281.993.8086 www.cobblendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE H TO MATCH LINE I Project No.: 09008 Date: .MARCH 2021 Dwn By JE Cbkd By KR Scale: HORZ: 1,50' VERT: N/A SHEET 14 OF 58 i PROPOS Qi+TOE1 1" GROUNDB090,/ APRON SEE NO NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS. GROUND, BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET., 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 5. INCLUDE SPLICE ENCLOSURE IN PROPOSED GROUND BOX FOR CONNECTION TO EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON ATA LATER DATE. 2"- HOPE-- SM - 24 FIBER 'OPTIC CABLE . SM. 12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE IRE•-�`- MATCHLINE J PROPOSED FIBER MARKER,,PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON-. — G — GAS LINE — OE — OVERHEAD. ELECTRICITY - E - - W - WW - - X — UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING. BEACON I FGEND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED' CONTROLLER W/ PROP'BBU CABINET l PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON - - - - - PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) 0 PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND —FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC . C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION . DATE DWN. S S*--- * ♦♦ KARL F.ROTHERMEL 71y$', 116355 tiFss, CEi G�Z PNL Whs% 3/4/2021 CHK. CobbFen l ey fFirmRepetretm No.100e61 1920 Country Place Parkway. Stile 310 Pearlan2, Texas 77584 201.893.4952 I .1 frzen 261. BB9.6066 wwws Cley.wm City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE I TO MATCH LINE J Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Own By. JE Cnka By. KR Scale: SHEET te HERZ: -50' 15 veRr: N/A OF 58 MATCHLINE NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK.. 5. SEE SPLICE DETAIL (SHEET 27). 6. INCLUDE SPLICE ENCLOSURE IN PROPOSED GROUND BOX FOR CONNECTION TO EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON AT A LATER DATE. ;HUGHES,°RANCH RQAD-,' HDPE.- SM 24'FIBER OPTIC CABLE M 12.E FIBER OPTIC a, CABLE_ TRACER , WIRE -') ► x—x=-x=x—x—X_—x — OE— E - - W - WW - - X — p PR00OSED;°EIBER IMARKER�"r_ *PROPOSED. -TYPE ;1 'GROUND -BOX W/ ..APRON ;. : P' OPTIC- 24 =FIBEOPTIC CABLE °_ 12' FIBER OPTIC CABLE ACER WIRE.t • ��� �� _tea HDPE ;.-SM„ 12 :FIBER RACER: WIR RPPOSED. FI XISTINGa CONTROLLER 1 • PROP -:,BBU- CABINET. GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I F(FND: 12 12 I1 — FOL- -C — EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED TYPE )GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) PROPOSED FIBER MARKER TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION • DATE DWN. CHK. a P•' qs♦ 744 Are- *�• •i* - *II $ KARL F. ROTHERMEL 3 ' 116355 .art /L hiss• CENSF• •\•2'd Ni I; AgV4 3/4/2021 41' CobbFendley Tan rem a°oarab�bnNo. ,,. T.5 non a,1o�1 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 PearlaM, Texas Tr584 281.993.4952 !fax 281.993.8086 www.mbbfendley.oam City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE J TO BRYAN COURT Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwe By. JE Chk' By. KR Scale: HORZ: 1,50' VERT: N/A SHEET 16 OF 58 MATCHLINE K 2-SM "12 'FIBER _OPTIC CABLE, -: TRACER WIRE SEE" ,NOT 15 PROPOSEDt=TYPE 1 GROUNDBOX W/ APRON NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 5. SEE SPLICE DETAIL (SHEET 27). SM.24(FIBER-OPTIC CABLE SM 12 'FIBER OPTIC CABLE TRACER -WIRE — G _ GAS LINE - OE - OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY E - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY W - WATER LINE - WW - WASTEWATER - X - ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I F(,FND: FOL— — C EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET 0❑ PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) O PROPOSED FIBER MARKER TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. OTHERMEL i i:Rx3: 55 ��EN�� G�L E�or ?// ^.'L 3/4/2021 CobbFendley 9eq ai0nNo.V/ Finn a rk ay. Sure 0.67 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993.4952119x 281.993.8086 www.cobbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE K TO MATCH LINE L Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 own B91 JE cbka By: KR Scale: HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 17 OF 58 MATCHLINE L NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. - OE- - E - - W - - WW - - X — k GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I FS3FND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET ) PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON - PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) 0 PROPOSED FIBER MARKER - OC OC•••• TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND -FOL- TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC - C - TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. 00womb 47444 a *: /\ * j i KARL F. ROTHERMEL S V 0• ', 116355 Z1 .44S/ NA:gr. N'r.u� 3/4/2021 CobbF_end1ey 1920 County Place TENS ruin 6Parkway. on No l_ Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993.49521 fax 281.993.8086 www.cobbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE L TO MATCH LINE M Project No.: 00008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn By: JE Chka Sy: KR Scale: HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 18 OF 58 MATCHLINE ,PROPOSED FIBER MARKE NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 2' HOPE SM ,24 fjIBER.'OPTIC SM124FIBE .OPTIC TRACER WIRE; - G - - OE— E - - W — - WW - - X — ID GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I F(;END: z MATCHLINE 1E2 EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET ❑O PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) • PROPOSED FIBER MARKER -••OC OC•••' TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND — FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE f 0 25 50 MK DESCRIPTION DATE OWN. CHK. ds SE . OF T a' •• 9b• • • a*. AN *y KARL F.ROTHERMEL $' 116355 €�C •--•.Z(CENSE0G4/ S/ NAL E.4r 3/4/2021 41 CobbFendley 1920 Country Place Parkway Suite 310 Pearland. Texas 77584 281.993.49521 tax 281.993.8086 www.cobbfendley.wm City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE M TO MATCH LINE N Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn By. JE Chid By. KR Scale: HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 19 OF 58 MATCHLINE N 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 0 z J 0 I- Q 2" HDPE .-, SM'_=24.2.FIBER OPTICCABLE .- SM 12 FIBER OPTIC`CABLE . TRACER WIRE — G — GAS LINE — OE — OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY — E - - W — - WW - - X — I' PROPOSED TYPE_i ,t GROUND BOX ;W/'APRON UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I FGFND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET ❑� PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON - PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) o PROPOSED FIBER MARKER •••OC•••••OC•••• TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND — FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION _ DATE DWN. CHK. CobbFendley TBDE Fora aeg,n,ae. n� 279 TIVLS P,n9,o enN9.Suit, 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.893.99521184 281.993.8086 wwwmbbfendley.wm City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE N TO MATCH LINE 0 Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Own By. JE Chkr1 1310 KR Seale: HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 20 OF 58 MATCHLINE 0 PROPOSED FIBER MpRKER NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. UGHES `: RANCh —2" HDPE SM 24 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SM'-12'-FIBER OPTIC CABLE :TRACER WIRE — G - -OE— E - - W - - WW - - X — ID GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I F(,FND: IOU EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET I PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) o PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC- TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND — FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE OWN. CHK. OF 6'NAE�11 Ns`i. - . * , 7oKAR ,LFn.6R3O5T5HERME_ #S9FS</CENS9G'.4� Iii!:!)4( jw3/am2`� I' CobbFend1ey TOPE rna0,,,St,atorl No. 2,. 1131.1.9. ran _ 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 5uite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993.49521 lex 281.993.8086 vnaw.cobbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE 0 TO MATCH LINE P Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Own By. JE Chkd By. KR Scale: HORZ 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 21 OF 58 SM 24 FIBER,6OPTIC-.-CABLE,1 SM" 12 :FIBER -OPTIC -CABLE .-- TRACER; PROPOSED FIBER MARKER ti M: NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. HUGHES-,RANCH ROAD PROPOSEDTYPE Y GROUND*BOX W/,APRON — OE— E - - W WW - - X GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON MATCHLINE Q I FGFND: ▪ EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET oQ PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED/ o PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND — FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE OWN. CHK. ems`%%%pFy�1 • 9`1+*I��� F.ROTHERMEL t-;.7L 116355 ��n• E rLO • G\�,�� IAL 6�rr 3/4/2021 CobbFendley TSPE TBPLS eg% omma. 1.671920 Cooney Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77583 281,993A9521fax 281.993.8086 www.cobbfentlley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE P TO MATCH LINE Q Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Own BY JE Cbke By: KR Scale: HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 22 OF 58 z2= HOP • r SM Y2'4t FIBER`_ OPT jIC GABLE - SM 12. FIBER. OMc CABLE TRACER IRE NOTES: 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. - G - GAS LINE — OE — OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY - E - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY — W — WATER LINE - WW — WASTEWATER — X — ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON MATCHLINE R I FGFND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET • PROPOSED TYPE 1 GROUND BOX W/ APRON - - - - - PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) o PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC OC TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND —FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION _ DATE DWN. CHK. �watyy �,* �E . 9F.11.11j8 4 s�?•' L F.ROTL 11635S' CENNala`e 3/4/2021 CobbFendley 'WE Fern Ferna,gson 1 , 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 Pearlen2, Texas 77584 281.993A 952 0.281.993.8086 281.993.8086 waw.cobbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE Q TO MATCH LINE R Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Own B9 JE Chka Ew KR Scale: HORZ: 1'=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 23 OF 58 Ct MATCHLINE 2" HOPE SM_24 FIBER OPTIC -CABLE SM 12 FIBERuOPTIC CABLE TRAGERAIRE u - PROPOSEOTTYPE . 4 GROU D BaX W/ APRON A NOTES: .;SEE NOTE 5 PROPOSED FIBER MARKER-- , 1. LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND AND ABOVEGROUND INSTALLATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. 2. SEE FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS (SHEET 26) FOR INTERCONNECT DETAILS, GROUND BOX DETAILS AND FIBER MARKER DETAILS. 3. SET BOXES TO MINIMUM OF 500 FEET TO TENSILE STRENGTH OF FIBER LENGTH (SHOW TENSILE STRENGTH) OR MAXIMUM OF 1000 FEET. 4. GROUND BOXES SHALL BE OUTSIDE OF SIDEWALK. 5. A COIL OF 200' OF 12 STRAND SM FIBER OPTIC CABLE AND 24 STRAND SM FIBER OPTIC CABLE SLACK SHOULD BE IN PROPOSED GROUND BOX TO BE CONNECTED TO PROPOSED SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET. "2" HOPE SM 24' FIBER OPTIC CABLE .11 SM 12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TRACER WIRE — OE— - E - - W - - ww - - X — I" GAS LINE OVERHEAD ELECTRICITY UNDERGROUND ELECTRICITY WATER LINE WASTEWATER ABANDONED WATER LINE EXISTING SCHOOL ZONE FLASHING BEACON I F,GFND: EXISTING CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED CONTROLLER W/ PROP BBU CABINET PROPOSED TYPE 1GROUND BOX W/ APRON PROPOSED CONDUIT (BORED) 0 PROPOSED FIBER MARKER OC- TIME WARNER - ABOVE GROUND —FOL— TIME WARNER - FIBER OPTIC — C — TIME WARNER - CABLE 0 25 50 MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. J�a� Q aJoN t 4 *= /\-; KARL F.ROTHERMEL -�', 116355 • • ,�• �,�CENSO.`�`�o ,�Si /PNAL E WomigeOf.� 3/4/2021 I' CobbFendley TOPE Form lispistraton No. 274 TOOLS Fern Reg isiraton No. l_ 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993A952 1lax 281.993.8086 www.cobblen0ley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER OPTIC PLAN MATCH LINE R TO END Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn BY JE Cnka By KR Scale: HORZ: 11=50' VERT: N/A SHEET 24 OF 58 7-1 2sL-m,.-,-1121*171181'13RANQGPAID) I SM 12-„EisER OPTI( FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL 2,wNDPE .40,RAN, CD, BM' 124t;EIBERORTIC GABLi. 41,0e5:10-Eas1iE r',e0P,c18t4 )(PE EiNs-tlfo SCALE: N.T.S. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. 0 CobbFendley TipE rum TEIPLS nrrn eac.r.c.No- 10m. 1920 County Place Parkway. Suite 310 Peadand, Texas 77584 281.993.49521f. 281.993.8086 www.cobbterealccoro City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN WESTSIDE EVENT CENTER ACCESS AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn BY, JE Ulla! 89: KR Saab: HORZ : N/A VERT : N/A SHEET 25 OF 58 GROUND BOX COVER DETAIL CTMS WESTSIDE EVENT CENTER PROPOSED FIBER MARKERS PROPOSED GROUND BOX co z v f WON PROPOSED INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM SM 12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE CONTROLLER ETHERNET SWITCH SFDU SPLICE ENCLOSURE COMMUNICATION X 2 OPTIC CAB FIBER 2 - SM 12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 2 OPTIC CABLEER SM 12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE i HUGHES RANCH ROAD D PROPOSED SIGNAL CONTROLLER HUGHES RANCH ROAD GROUND BOX DETAILS COIL 50' OF FIBER CABLE INSIDE GROUND BOX PROPOSED APRON \ PROPOSED GROUND BOX PROPOSED CONDUIT Print Is an two &dee 131 PROPOSED GROUND BOX PROPOSED FIBER MARKER PROPOSED GROUND BOX PROPOSED GROUND BOX PROPOSED CONTROLLER CABINET EXISITNG CONTROLLER CABINET NOTE: THIS DIAGRAM SHOWS GENERAL LAYOUT OF GROUND BOX AND FIBER MARKER SPACING. ADDITIONAL INTERSECTIONS WILL HAVE SIGNALIZATION AS SHOWN IN PLANS. OVON HONVd 8311I11 Q N 250' PROPOSED FIBER MARKER PROPOSED FIBER MARKER HUGHES RANCH ROAD PROPOSED CONDUIT PROPOSED GROUND BOX 250' 1 250' 1 250' 500' MAX —1 PROPOSED GROUND BOX •••1 PROPOSED FIBER MARKER laf1OO EXISTING CONTROLLER CABINET AVMNdNd N31710 ITY FTEAREAN� CALL ENGINEERING. leif 281 652 FIBER MARKER DETAILS MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. .Te•cE•9F.•T 14. i#.Ar*/\ .#g L F.ROTHERMEL 1.3,KAR.. 116355 '�� ,,So � <css: ri Et NG�.� MVO 0' 1O 3/4/2021 CobbFendley ramser a ml � 1920 Country Pace Parkway. Suite 310 Pearland, Texas nssa 281.993A95211ex 281.993.8086 www.cobbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN FIBER DETAILS & FIBER MARKER LOCATIONS Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Own BY. JE Chka By KR Scale: HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A SHEET 26 OF 58, SM 12 FIBER TO SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET SM 12 FIBER ALONG HUGHES RANCH ROAD -SM 12 FIBER TO SIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET SM 12 FIBER ALONG HUGHES RANCH ROAD C SPLICE DETAIL MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. tE of TFx4�i *. '•,t�I • i KARL F.ROTHERMEL 4 �iy'. 116355 ��r ,4iqF, • ���ENS�N0*_ 'h•__:�DhNAL Eto k0 3/4/2021 CobbFendley - TIVERTa. e.1 , 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearlantl, Texas 71584 281.993.49521 fax 281.993.8096 www.cobbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN SPLICE DETAIL Project No.: 09008 _ Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn By: JE Cbka By: KR Scale: HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A SHEET 27 OF 58 BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION (BC) STANDARD SHEETS GENERAL NOTES: R-.44" 19.7" 6•' 24.5" 4.9"1 c TO o: o' c yo co o� of 0 0 —11 z 1x EE C RI' .U`N o00 041 Eo Boa w.- o O o o_ o a v, -;d 0 W y aoo d ec no a p o- 0 ND aw � o N� � �oE o-, a-4 -rn O u a> 0 0 z 0) i cD tY I c 0 0 1) 0 0 1 0 CC 0 0 Q= co co eo 00 o M o O/ �oo 0 N N(NI O 0 In M L- 1. The Barricade and Construction Standard Sheets (BC sheets) are intended to show typical examples for placement of temporary traffic control devices, construction pavement markings, and typical work zone signs. The information contained in these sheets meet or exceed the requirements shown in the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (TMUTCD). 2. The development and design of the Traffic Control Plon (TCP)is the responsibility of the Engineer. 3. The Contractor may propose changes to the TCP that ore signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer for approval. The Engineer may develop, sign and seal Contractor proposed changes. 4. The Contractor is responsible for installing and maintaining the traffic control devices os shown in the plans. The Contractor may not move or change the approximate location of any device without the approval of the Engineer. 5. Geometric design of lane shifts and detours should, when possible, meet the applicable design criteria contained in manuals such as the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), "A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets," the TxDOT "Roadway Design Manual" or engineering judgment. 6. When projects abut, the Engineer(s) may omit the END ROAD WORK, TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE, and other advance warning signs if the signing would be redundant and the work areas oppeor continuous to the motorists. If the adjacent project is completed first, the Contractor shall erect the necessary warning signs as shown on these sheets, the TCP sheets or os directed by the Engineer. The BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES sign shall be revised to show appropriate work zone distance. 7. The Engineer may require duplicate warning signs on the median side of divided highways where median width will permit and traffic volumes justify the signing. 8. All signs shall be constructed in accordance with the details found in the "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas," latest edition. Sign details not shown in this manual shall be shown in the plans or the Engineer shall provide a detail to the Contractor before the sign is manufactured. 9. The temporary traffic control devices shown in the illustrations of the BC sheets are examples. As necessary, the Engineer will determine the most appropriate traffic control devices to be used. 10. As shown on BC(2), the OBEY WARNING SIGNS STATE LAW sign, STAY ALERT TALK OR TEXT LATER (see Sign Detail G20-10T) and the WORK ZONE TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE sign with plaque shall be erected in advance of the CSJ limits. However, the TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE sign will not be required on projects consisting solely of mobile operotion work, such as striping or milling edgeline rumble strips. The BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES, CONTRACTOR and END ROAD WORK signs shall be erected at or near the CSJ limits. 11. Except for devices required by Note 10, traffic control devices should be in place only while work is actually in progress or o definite need exists. 12. The Engineer hos the final decision on the location of all traffic control devices. 13. Inactive equipment and work vehicles, including workers' private vehicles must be parked away from travel lanes. They should be as close to the right-of-way line as possible, or located behind a barrier or guordroil, or as approved by the Engineer. WORKER SAFETY APPAREL NOTES: 1. Workers on foot who are exposed to traffic or to construction equipment within the right-of-way shall wear high -visibility sofety apparel meeting the requirements of ISEA "American Notional Standard for High -Visibility Apparel," or equivalent revisions, and labeled as ANSI 107-2004 standard performance for Class 2 or 3 risk exposure. Class 3 garments should be considered for high traffic volume work areas or night time work. R-1 1" WHITE BLACK R-.13" R•.79" v a1 COLORS: FLUORESCENT YELLOW BACKGROUND BLACK BORDER AND LEGEND ORANGE FLUORESCENT BACKGROUND BLACK LEGEND, BORDER AND SYMBOL .75 M STAY, ALERTT_, ,,,L _ 1.25" i _1 l! m f \ �' �•.. �+ AIN) / t J . N ,o ■ 1.25" _ � � � l ,,i TALK OR TEXT LATER 9: tee- i v� 20" 20" 20" 3.5'1 12" i .s'rs_3 2.8F 11.7,. . -1.8'r 60" 14.6" 3.5" 3.0" Radius, 1.25" Border, 0.75" Indent, Block on Yellow; [STAY ALERT) Font: D 3.0" Radius, 1.25" Border. 0.75" Indent, Block on Orange; (TALK OR TEXT LATER] Font: C specified length; SIGN DETAIL (G20-10T) Only pre -qualified products shall be used. The "Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List" (CWZTCD) describes pre -qualified products and their sources and may be found on-line at the web address given below or by contacting: Texas Deportment of Transportation Traffic Operations Division - TE Phone (512) 416-3118 THE DOCUMENTS BELOW CAN BE FOUND ON-LINE AT http://www.txdot.gov COMPLIANT WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES LIST (CWZTCD) DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS (DMS) MATERIAL PRODUCER LIST (MPL) ROADWAY DESIGN MANUAL - SEE "MANUALS (ONLINE MANUALS)" STANDARD HIGHWAY SIGN DESIGNS FOR TEXAS (SHSD) TEXAS MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (TMUTCD) TRAFFIC ENGINEERING STANDARD SHEETS SHEET 1 OF 12 Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION GENERAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS BC(1)-14 FILE bc-14.dgn ©TxDOT November 2002 ON: TxDOT Icx: TxDOT low. TxDOT ICK: TxDOT CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 4-03 5-10 8-14 9-07 7-13 DST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 28 1,5,6 a,o oth v of c T O U od atei ;La 0 z ,., Y ='ao U N 0" a0 V N15 02 • O otwo D 0.11 E00' •G 09. WQ O o�� oI— "5 m om -t.°md ,o`o otu •S d E N O 0 O a ac off¢ 0n� T oc 0 (5 o` o 9) 1c4.-/ dv &moo E 3 E N 0 's V a3 0 z 1- N 1- 0 a 3- 0 0 0 c 0 I a) L Q 0) co 0 0 O 0") .— o/ -0 0 N Rn N ON 0 tea` M L: G20-2 TYPICAL LOCATION OF CROSSROAD SIGNS END ROAD WORK ROAD WORK a TEXT X LEES NEXT X LEES G20-laT (Optional see Note land 4) (Optional see Note 1 and 4) G20-2 ROAD WORK a NEXT X LILES NEXT X VIES b /G20-10T END ROAD WORK A /\May be mounted on back of "ROAD WORK AHEAD"(CW20-ID) sign with approval of Engineer. (z (See note 2 below) 1. The typical minimum signing on o crossroad approach should be a "ROAD WORK AHEAD" (CW20-1D)sign and o (G20-2) "END ROAD WORK" sign, unless noted otherwise in plans. 2. The Engineer may use the reduced size 36" x 36" ROAD WORK AHEAD (CW20-1D) sign mounted back to back with the reduced size 36" x 18" "END ROAD WORK"(G20-2) sign on low volume crossroads (see Note 4 under "Typical Construction Warning Sign Size and Spocing"). See the "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas" manual for sign details. The Engineer may omit the advance warning signs on low volume crossroads. The Engineer willdetermine whether o rood is low volume. This information sholl be shown in the plans. 3. Based on existing field conditions, the Engineer/Inspector may require additional signs such as FLAGGER AHEAD, LOOSE GRAVEL, or other appropriate signs. When odditionalsigns are required, these signs will be considered part of the minimum requirements. The Engineer/Inspector willdetermine the proper locution and spacing of any sign not shown on the BC sheets, Traffic Control Plan sheets or the Work Zone Standard Sheets. 4. The "ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES"(G20-1oT)sign shall be required at high volume crossroads to advise motorists of the length of construction in either direction from the intersection. The Engineer vial determine whether a roadway is considered high volume. 5. Additional traffic controldevices may be shown elsewhere in the plans for higher volume crossroads. 6. When work occurs in the intersection area, oppropriote traffic control devices, as shown elsewhere in the pions or os determined by the Engineer/Inspector, shall be in place. ROAD WORK NEXT X LEES c G20-1bTR T-INTERSECTION G20-1bTL ROAD WORK NEXT X LEES 4 y 4 INTERSECTED ROADWAY k X x-k 1 Block - City 1000'-1500' - Hwy 1000E-1500' - Hwy 1 Block - City G20-5oP R20-5T R20-5aTP WORK ZONE TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE men PPCSDH G20-5T G20-6T CSJ LIMITS AT T-INTERSECTION BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X NILES NAME AOOREss OTT STATE CONTRACTOR 80' min. Y C.L CSJ Limit G20-5oP R20-5T R20-5oTP END ROAD WORK G20-2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE comes .Ix PMSUR 1. The Engineer will determine the types and locution of any additional traffic control devices, such as a flogger and accompanying signs, or other signs, thot should be used when work is being performed of or near on intersection. 2. If construction closes the rood at a T-intersection the Controctor shallploce the "CONTRACTOR NAME"(G20-6T) sign behind the Type 3 Barricades for the rood closure (see BC(10) also). The "ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES" left orrow(G20-1bTL) and "ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES" right arrow (G20-1bTR)' signs shall be replaced by the detour signing coiled for in the plans. WORK AREAS IN MULTIPLE LOCATIONS WITHIN CSJ LIMITS k x x G20-5T x x 620-6T CW20 TD CW13-1P. Type 3 Barricade or channelizing devices 3X Chonnelizing Devices XX ae a e e e e s e a Vo ,/ WORK SPACE SAMPLE LAYOUT OF SIGNING FOR WORK BEGINNING AT THE CSJ LIMITS BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X LEES NAME AOOESS OTT STATE CONTRACTOR CSJ Limit When extended distances occur between minimal work spaces, the Engineer/Inspector should ensure additional "ROAD WORK AHEAD"(CW20-1D)signs ore placed in advance of these work areas to remind drivers they ore still within the project limits. See the applicable TCP sheets for exact locotion and spacing of signs and channelizing devices. SAMPLE LAYOUT OF SIGNING FOR WORK BEGINNING DOWNSTREAM OF THE CSJ LIMITS ROAD CLOSED R11-2 CW1-6 Type 3 Barricade or channelizing devices 1< XX X CW13-1P x❑ 4 BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X NIES NAME AOORESS OTT STATE CONTRACTOR SPEED LIMIT XX x x R2-1 x k CW13-1P IIPH XX fs END ROAD WORK G20-2 x z :: G20-5oP o x R20-5T x x R20-5oTP X WORK ZONE TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE .oM rat x x❑ R4-1 (as appropriate) 4 DO NOT PASS X 4 SPEED LIMIT XX 4 X G20-9TPz x R20-5Tx x BEGIN WORK ZONE TRAFFIC FNES DOUBLE R20-5oTP: z .wNxo, O 4 X 4 STAY ALERT TALK OR TEXT LATER OBEY WARNING SONS STATE LAW G20-10T : x \ R20-3Tz : X yl X 4 4 N-PASS of NO-PASof line should coordinate with sign locotion STAY ALERT TALK OR TEXT LATER G20-10T z 4< x OBEY WARNING SIGNS STATE LAW x \:2x 3T 4 WORK SPACE Channelizing ���CSJ Limit Devices /1 END ROAD WORK G20-2x x SPEED LIMIT XX R2-1 O END WORK ZONE NOTES O G20-2bT x x TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGN SIZE AND SPACING SIZE Sign Number or Series Conventional Road Expresswoy/ Freeway CW204 CW21 CW22 CW23 CW25 48" x 48" 48" x 48" CW1, CW2, CW7, CW8, 36" CW9, CW11, CW14 x 36" 48' x 48" CW3, CW4, CW5, CW6, 48" CW8-3, CW10, CW12 x 48" 48" x 48" SPACING Posted Speed Sign Spacing MPHFeet (Apprx.) 30 120 35 160 40 240 45 320 50 400 55 500 2 60 600 2 65 700 2 70 800 2 75 900 2 80 1000 2 * * 3 * For typical sign spacings on divided highways, expressways and freeways, see Port 6 of the "Texas Monuolon Uniform Traffic ControlDevices" (TMUTCD) typicalapplication diagrams or TCP Standard Sheets. n Minimum distance from work oreo to first Advance Warning sign nearest the work oreo and/or distance between each additional sign. GENERAL NOTES 1. Special or larger size signs may be used os necessary. 2. Distonce between signs should be increased os required to hove 1500 feet advance warning. 3. Distonce between signs should be increased as required. to hove 1/2 mile or more advance warning. 4. 36" x 36" "ROAD WORK AHEAD" (CW20-1D)signs may be used on low volume crossroads at the discretion of the Engineer. See Note 2 under "Typicol Location of Crossroad Signs". 5. Only diamond shoped warning sign sizes ore indicated. 6. See sign size listing in "TMUTCD", Sign Appendix or the "Standard Highwoy Sign Designs for Texas" monuol for complete list of available sign design sizes. The Contractor shall determine the oppropriote distonce to be placed on the G20-1 series signs and "BEGIN ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES"(G20-5T)sign for each specific project. This distance shall replace the "X" and shall be rounded to the nearest whole mile with the opprovol of the Engineer. No decimals shall be used. O The "BEGIN WORK ZONE"(G20-9TP) and "END WORK ZONE" (G20-2bT) sholl be used as shown on the sample layout when advance signs ore required outside the CSJ Limits. They inform the motorist of entering or leoving o port of the work zone lying outside the CSJ Limits where troffic fines may double if workers ore present. x z Required CSJ Limit signing. See Note 10 on BC(1). TRAFFIC FINES DOUBLE signs will not be required on projects consisting solely of mobile operations work. Area for placement of "ROAD WORK AHEAD" (CW20-1D)sign and other signs or devices os called for on the Troffic Control Plan. zOContractor will install o regulatory speed limit sign at the end of the work zone. LEGEND I --I Type 3 Barricade 0 0 0 Chonnelizing Devices i Sign X See Typical Construction Warning Sign Size and Spacing chort or the TMUTCD for sign spacing requirements. . SHEET 2 OF 12 ,Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT LIMIT BC(2)-14 FILES bc-14.dgn DN: TXDOT ICn TxDOT IDm TxDOT Imo TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. HOU BRAZORIA 29 96 TYPICAL APPLICATION OF WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT SIGNS c 0. o' To V O z �- ao= ate` U q C U O O N ace q C I p, .509 Woo 0 en q oF3 ' m L � y .. q E0 v Tp • ac o ; c mm � q O 0t 0 O e N r .0 F O 90V q, T'€ dm w�0 �dE ar m U ut s O erg 0 0 0 z 1- N D 0 N 1- 0 O a a 0 0 0 0 En cn rncc; ‘-o di r70 .o o/ 0 N N U ON o moo` r)L` Signing shown for one direction only. See BC(2) for additional odvonce signing. SPEED LIMIT 70 R2-1 — CSJ LIMITS tr GUIDANCE FOR USE: Work zone speed limits shall be regulotory, established in accordance with the "Procedures for Establishing Speed Zones," and approved by the Texas Transportation Commission, or by City Ordinance when within Incorporoted City Limits. Reduced speeds should only be posted in the vicinity of work activity and not throughout the entire project. Regulatory work zone speed signs (R2-1) shall be removed or covered during periods when they are not needed. I°\ WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT 00 See General Note 4 G20-5oP R2-1 LONG/INTERMEDIATE TERM WORK ZONE SPEED LIMITS This type of work zone speed limit should be included on the design of the traffic control plans when restricted geometrics with a lower design speed are present in the work zone and modification of the geometrics to a higher design speed is not feasible. Long/Intermediate Term Work Zone Speed Limit signs, when approved as described above, should be posted and visible to the motorist when work activity is present. Work activity may also be defined as a change in the roadway that requires a reduced speed for motorists to safely negotiate the work area, including: a) rough rood or damaged pavement surface b) substantial alteration of roadway geometrics (diversions) c) construction detours d) grade e) width f) other conditions readily apparent to the driver As long as any of these conditions exist, the work zone speed limit signs should remain in place. SHORT TERM WORK ZONE SPEED LIMITS This type of work zone speed limit may be included on the design of the traffic control plans when workers or equipment are not behind concrete barrier, when work activity is within 10 feet of the traveled way or actually in the travelled way. Short Term Work Zone Speed Limit signs should be posted and visible to the motorists only when work octivity is present. When work activity is not present, signs shall be removed or covered. (See Removing or Covering on BC(4)). Signing shown for one direction only. See BC(2) for additional advance signing. J r See GeneralNote 4 WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT 30 G20-5oP R2-1 GENERAL NOTES SPEED LIMIT 70 R2-1 CSJ LIMITS T (750' - 1500') CW3-5 1. Regulatory work zone speed limits should be used only for sections of construction projects where speed control is of major importance. 2. Regulatory work zone speed limit signs shall be placed on supports at a 7 foot minimum mounting height. 3. Speed zone signs are illustroted for one direction of travel and are normally posted for each direction of travel. 4. Frequency of work zone speed limit signs should be: 40 mph and greater 0.2 to 2 miles 35 mph and less 0.2 to 1 mile 5. Regulatory speed limit signs shall have black legend and border on a white reflective background (See "Reflective Sheeting" on BC(4)). 6. Fabrication, erection and maintenance of the"ADVANCE SPEED LIMIT"(CW3-5)sign, "WORK ZONE"(G20-5aP) plaque and the "SPEED LIMIT"(R2-1)signs shall not be paid for directly, but shall be considered subsidiary to Item 502. 7. Turning signs from view, laying signs over or down will not be allowed, unless as otherwise noted under "REMOVING OR COVERING" on BC(4). 8. Techniques that may help reduce traffic speeds include but are not limited to: A. Law enforcement. B. Flogger stationed next to sign. C. Portable changeable message sign (PCMS). D. Low -power (drone) radar transmitter. E. Speed monitor trailers or signs. 9. Speeds shown on details above are for illustration only. Work Zone Speed Limits should only be posted as approved for each project. 10.For more specific guidance concerning the type of work, work zone conditions and factors impacting allowable regulatory construction speed zone reduction see TxDOT form •1204 in the TxDOT e-form system. See General Note 4 G20-5oP R2-1 WORK ZONE G20-5aP SPEED LIMIT 50 R2-1 SPEED LIMIT 70 SHEET 3 OF 12 R2-1 ,Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION WORK ZONE SPEED LIMIT $C(3)-14 FILE bc-14.dgn DN:TxDOT Imo TxDOTIDw TxDOT I0K TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. HOU BRAZORIA 30 197 I GENERAL NOTES FOR WORK ZONE SIGNS o y o oYai o In i :•a o Q o� ao O � � ooai c� � 2 ° 0 moo wr o o H-5 Q u, .Leos m� >00 • x.DLc e o, 15. E 8 c 0' -^ >, o • a o; N0• 0_0 .E- ~ v oP sobBo K G g Mv6-CZ aim tvn ccr, 8 `s o0 0 0) 0 0 z 1- 0 N 1- 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c c 0) o O o rho o/ 0 V oN 0 in 12' min. 0' 6' • TYPICAL MINIMUM CLEARANCES FOR LONG TERM AND INTERMEDIATE TERM SIGNS 7.0' min. 9.0' max. Paved-Jj\ //�� oC///„ shoulder v w 0 0 6' or greater 1 7.0' min. 9.0' max. Paved \///:-' //C/i/\\\/ shoulder 2' minimum from curb .0 e) x When placing skid supports on unlevelground, the leg post lengths must be odjusted so the sign appears straight and plumb. Objects sholl NOT be placed under skids os a meons of leveling. x x When plaques are placed on dual -leg supports. they should be attached to the upright nearest the travel lone. Supplementalploques (odvisory or distance) should not cover the surfoce of the porent sign. 7 0' min. 9 0' max. Support shall not T protrude above sign s II T I DC FRES Dovpu W67,1(ERE ARE RESEWR Support shall not protrude above sign Sign supports shall extend more thon 1/2 way up the bock of the sign substrate. FRONT ELEVATION Wood, metal or Fiber Reinforced Plastic ATTACHMENT FOR SIGN SUPPORTS Splicing embedded perforated square metal tubing in order to extend post height will only be allowed when the splice is mode using four bolts, two above and two below the spice point. Splice must be located entirely behind the sign substrate, not near the base of the support. Splice insert lengths should be at least 5 times nominal post size, centered on the splice and of ot least the some gouge moteriol. OR SIDE ELEVATION Wood Attachment to wooden supports will be by bolts and nuts or screws. Use TxDOT's or manufacturer's recommended procedures for attaching sign substrates to other types of sign suppor ts Nails shall NOT be allowed. Each sign shall be attached directly to the sign support. Multiple signs shall not be joined or spliced by any means. Wood supports shall not be extended or repaired by splicing or other means. STOP/SLOW PADDLES 1. STOP/SLOW paddles ore the primary method to control lroffic by (loggers. The STOP/SLOW paddle size should be 24" x 24" os detailed below. 2. When used at night, the STOP/SLOW paddle shall be retroreflectorized. 3. STOP/SLOW paddles moy be attached to a staff with o minimum length of 6' to the bottom of the sign. 4. My lights incorporated into the STOP or SLOW poddle faces shall only be os specifically described in Section 6E.03 Hand Signaling Devices in the TMUTCD. -A- 24" 1 Boekgrcend - Red Legend & Border - write 24 Boekground - a.enge Legend & Border - Block CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTAINING PERMANENT SIGNS WITHIN THE PROJECT LIMITS 1. Permanent signs ore used to give notice of lroffic lows or regulations. call attention to conditions that ore potentially hazardous to traffic operations, show route designations. destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, and other geographical, recreational, or culturalinformation. Drivers proceeding through a work zone need the same, if not better route guidonce os normolly installed on a roodwoy without construction. 2. When permanent regulotory or worning signs conflict with work zone conditions, remove or cover the permanent signs until the permanent sign message matches the roadway condition. 3. When existing permanent signs ore moved and relocated due to construction purposes, they shall be visible to motorists of all times. 4. If existing signs are to be relocated on their originolsupports, they shallbe installed on croshworthy bases os shown on the SMD Standard sheets. The signs shollmeet the required mounting heights shown on the BC Sheets or the SMD Standards. This work should be paid for under the appropriate pay item for relocating existing signs. 5. 1f permanent signs ore to be removed and relocated using temporary supports, the Contractor shall use croshworthy supports as shown on the BC sheets or the CWZTCD. The signs shollmeet the required mounting heights shown on the BC Sheets or the SMD Standards during construction. This work should be paid for under the appropriate pay item for relocating existing signs. 6. My sign or traffic controldevice that is struck or domoged by the Contractor or his/her construction equipment shollbe replaced as soon as possible by the Contractor to ensure proper guidance for the motorists. This willbe subsidiary to Item 502. 1. Contractor shall ond maintain signs in a straight and plumb condition and/or as directed by the Engineer. 2. Wooden sign posts shall be painted white. 3. Barricades shall NOT be used as sign supports. 4. All signs shag be installed in accordance with the plans or os directed by the Engineer. Signs shall be used to regulote, warn, and guide the traveling public safely through the work zone. 5. The Contractor may furnish either the sign design shown in the plans or in the "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas" (SHSD). The Engineer/Inspector may require the Contractor to furnish other work zone signs thot ore shown in the TMUTCD but may have been omitted from the pions. My variation in the plans shollbe documented by written ogreement between the Engineer and the Contractor's Responsible Person. All changes must be documented in writing before being implemented. This con include documenting the changes in the Inspector's TxDOT diary and having both the Inspector and Contractor initial and dote the agreed upon changes. 6. The Contractor shall furnish sign supports listed in the "Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Device List" (CWZTCD). The Contractor shall install the sign support in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations -If there is a question regording installation procedures, the Controctor shall furnish the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer's installation recommendotions so the Engineer con verify the correct procedures ore being followed. 7. The Controctor is responsible for installing signs on approved supports and replacing signs with damaged or cracked substrates and/or damaged or marred reflective sheeting os directed by the Engineer/Inspector. 8. Identification markings may be shown only on the back of the sign substrate. The moximum height of letters and/or company logos used for identification shall be 1 inch. 9. The Controctor shall reploce domoged wood posts. New or damaged wood sign posts shall not be spliced. DURATION OF WORK (os defined by the "Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" Port 6) 1. The types of sign supports, sign mounting height,the size of signs, and the type of sign substrates con vary bosed on the type of work being performed. The Engineer is responsible for selecting the oppropriote size sign for the type of work being performed. The Controctor is responsible for ensuring the sign support, sign mounting height and substrate meets manufacturer's recommendotions in regard to crashworthiness and duration of work requirements. a. Long-term stationary - work that occupies a location more than 3 days. b. Intermediate -term stotionory - work that occupies a location more than one daylight period up to 3 days, or nighttime work lusting more than one hour. c. Short-term stationary - daytime work that occupies o location for more than 1 hour in a single daylight period. d. Short, durotion - work that occupies a locotion up to 1 hour. e. Mobile - work that moves continuously or intermittently (stopping for up to approximately 15 minutes.) SIGN MOUNTING HEIGHT 1. The bottom of Long-term/Intermediate-term signs shall be at least 7 feet, but not more than 9 feet, above the paved surface, except as shown for supplemental plaques mounted below other signs. 2. The bottom of Short-term/Short Duration signs shollbe a minimum of 1 foot above the pavement surface but no more than 2 feet above the ground. 3. Long-term/Intermediate-term Signs moy be used in lieu of Short-term/Short Durotion signing. 4. Short-term/Short Durotion signs shall be used only during daylight and shall be removed at the end of the workday or raised to oppropriote Long-term/Intermediate sign height. 5. Regulatory signs shollbe mounted at least 7 feet, but not more than 9 feet, above the poved surface regordless of work durotion. SIZE OF SIGNS 1. The Contractor shall furnish the sign sizes shown on BC (2) unless otherwise shown in the plans or as directed by the Engineer. SIGN SUBSTRATES 1. The Contractor shall ensure the sign substrate is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of sign support thot is being used. The CWZTCD lists each substrote that con be used on the different types and models of sign supports. 2. "Mesh" type materiels ore NOT an approved sign substrate, regardless of the tightness of the weove. 3. All wooden individual sign panels fabricated from 2 or more pieces shollhave one or more plywood cleat, 1/2" thick by 6" wide, fastened to the bock of the sign and extending fully across the sign. The cleat shall be attached to the back of the sign using wood screws that do not penetrate the face of the sign panel. The screws shallbe placed on both sides of the splice and spaced at 6" centers. The Engineer moy approve other methods of splicing the sign face. REFLECTIVE SHEETING 1. All signs shollbe retroreflective and constructed of sheeting meeting the color and retro-reflectivity requirements of DMS-8300 for rigid signs or DMS-8310 for roll -up signs. The web address for DMS specifications is shown on BC(1). 2. White sheeting, meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type A. shall be used for signs with a white background. 3. Orange sheeting, meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type B or Type ,shollbe usp{d for rigid signs with orange backgrounds. $IGN LETTERS 1. AO sign letters and numbers shall be clear, and open rounded type uppercose alphabet letters as approved by the Federal Highwoy Administration (FHWA) and os published in the "Standard Highway Sign Design for Texos" manual. Signs, letters and numbers shallbe of first class workmanship in accordance with Department Standards and Specifications. REMOVING OR COVERING 1. When sign messages moy be confusing or do not apply, the signs sholl be removed or completely covered. 2. Long-term stotionory or intermediate stationary signs installed on square metal tubing moy be turned away from traffic 90 degrees when the sign message is not opplicable. This technique moy not be used for signs installed in the median of divided highways or near ony intersections where the sign may be seen from approaching traffic. 3. Signs installed on wooden skids shall not be turned of 90 degree angles to the roadway. These signs should be removed or completely covered when not required. 4. When signs ore covered, the moteriol used shall be opaque, such as heavy mil black plastic, or other materials which will cover the entire sign face and maintain their opaque properties under outomobile headlights ot night, without damaging the sign sheeting. 5. Burlap sholl NOT be used to cover signs. 6. Duct tope or other adhesive materialshollN0T be of fixed to a sign face. 7. Signs and anchor stubs shallbe removed and holes bockfilled upon completion of work. SIGN SUPPORT WEIGHTS 1. Where sign supports require the use of weights to keep from turning over, the use of sondbogs with dry, cohesionless sond should be used. 2. The sandbogs will be tied shut to keep the sand from spilling and to maintain o constont weight. 3. Rock, concrete, iron, steel or other solid objects shall not be permitted for use as sign support weights. 4. Sandbags should weigh o minimum of 35 lbs and o moximum of 50 lbs. 5. Sondbogs shall be mode of a durable material that teors upon vehicular impoct. Rubber (such os tire inner tubes) shall NOT be used. 6. Rubber ballasts designed for channelizing devices should not be used for ballast on portable sign supports. Sign supports designed and manufactured with rubber bases may be used when shown on the CWZTCD list. 7. Sondbogs shall only be placed along or laid over the base supports of the traffic controldevice and shall not be suspended above ground level or hung with rope, wire, chains or other fasteners. Sondbogs shall be placed along the length of the skids to weigh down the sign support. 8. Sandbags shall NOT be placed under the skid and shot not be used to level sign supports placed on slopes. FLAGS ON SIGNS 1. Flags moy be used to draw attention to worning signs. When used the flog shall be 16 inches square or larger and shall be orange or fluorescent red -orange in color. Flogs shall not be allowed to cover any portion of the sign face. SHEET 4 OF 12 ,Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION TEMPORARY SIGN NOTES BC(4)-14 FILE, bc-14.dgn DN: TxDOT ICK: TxDOT IDw: TxDOT ICK, TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 DST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 31 98 t•-o o03 To c 0 oy ai 82 N z�- =•ao UN"- n Q = o m_ a, U ". N °od add -E°' ao Gov c La NO C K-3 0 j I- .0 01 tov Y N `• El; c p a t d cNo obi` CD T0' 0 8 ° o ml 0 90 gp 4abD N.a �wEo N c� o 'x 0 a> 0 0. z 1- N 0 E- I v a 0 d I 0 0 0 0 mII 0) 2 a x oQ NO 0o MCo o/ 0 N a N Oo i,-) L. 40" Front Maximum 21sq.ft. of / sign face 4x4 wood X f post See BC(4) for sign height requirement 24" 4x4 wood post 2x6 Top 2x4 x 40" 2x6 36" Side Maximum 12 sq. ft. of if sign face See BC(4) for sign height requirement Front A 24" 2x4 broce 4x4 block Side SKID MOUNTED WOOD SIGN SUPPORTS 2x6 Length of skids may be increased for additional stability. 4x4 block LONG/INTERMEDIATE TERM STATIONARY - PORTABLE SKID MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS ❑ Top 3/8" bolts w/nuts or 3/8" x 3 1/2" (min.) lag screws 48" minimum OPTION 1 (Direct Embedment) Mchor Stub (1/4" larger than sign post) — n Np P� Post 9„ desirable "" 34" min. in strong soils, 55" min. in weok soils. OPTION 2 (Mchor Stub) a Optionol reinforcing sleeve (1/2" larger than sign post) x 18" Anchor Stub (1/4" larger than Sign post) 11 Sign Post 9„ desirable 18" 34" min. in 1111 strong soils, 55" min. in weak soils. OPTION 3 (Mchor Stub and Reinforcing Sleeve)) PERFORATED SQUARE METAL TUBING Sign Post Bose See the CWZTCD I■ Post for embedment. WING CHANNEL Lap-splice/base bolted onchor GROUND MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS Refer to the CWZTCD and the manufacturer's installation procedure for eoch type sign support. The maximum sign square footage shall adhere to the manufacturer's recommendation. Two post installations con be used for larger signs. Upright must telescope to provide 7' height above pavement weld weld starts here A 36" 48" Welds to start on opposite sides going in opposite directions. Minimum weld, do not bock fill puddle. weld starts here weld 9 sq. ft. or less- l0mm extruded lhinwoll plastic sign only 13/4" x 13/4" x 11 foot 12 ga post (D0 NOT SPLICE) 13/4" golv. round with 5/16" holes or 1 3/4" x 13/4" squore tubing pin of angle needed to match sideslope 48" 2" 2.5' L 5' SINGLE LEG BASE Side View 2"x2"x 12 ga. upright 16 sq. fl. or less of any rigid sign substrate listed in section J.2.d of the CWZTCD, except 5/8" plywood. 1/2" plywood is °flowed. 13/4 " x 13/4 " x 129" (hole to hole) 12 go. support telescopes into sleeve 1 3/4 " x 1 3/4 " x 52" (hole to hole) 12 go. square perforated tubing diogonalbroce 13/4 " x 1 3/4 " x 32" (hole to hole) 12 ga. square perforated tubing cross brace 3/8" X 4-1/2 gr. 5 BOLT (TYP.) 0 7/16" 32' 0 3/8" x 3" gr. 5 bolt (2 per support) joining sign panel and supports SKID MOUNTED PERFORATED SQUARE STEEL TUBING SIGN SUPPORTS 11/2" Dio.(typ) Direction / of Traffic Nominal Post Size Number of Posts Maximum Sq. feet of Sign Foce Minimum Soil Embedment Drilled Hole(s) Required 4 x 4 1 12 36" NO 4 x 4 2 21 36" NO 4 x 6 1 21 36" YES 4 x 6 2 36 36' YES WOOD POST SYSTEM FOR GROUND MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORTS WEDGE ANCHORS Both steeland plastic Wedge Mchor Systems as shown on the SMD Stondord Sheets may be used as temporary sign supports for signs up to 10 square feet of sign face. They may be set in concrete or in sturdy soils if approved by the Engineer.(Seeweb address for "Traffic Engineering Standard Sheets" on BC(1)). OTHER DESIGNS MORE DETAILS OF APPROVED LONG/INTERMEDIATE AND SHORT TERM SUPPORTS CAN BE FOUND ON THE CWZTCD LIST. SEE BC(1) FOR WEBSITE LOCATION. 13/4 " x 13/4 " x 129" (hole to hole) 12 ga. square perforated tubing upright 2" x 2" x 59" (hole to hole) 12 go. perforated tubing skid 0 3/8 " X 3" gr. 5 bolt Completely welded around tubing 2"x2"x8" (hole to hole) 12 ga. square perforated tubing sleeve welded to skid GENERAL NOTES 1. Nois moy be used in the assembly of wooden sign supports, but 3/8" bolts with nuts or 3/8" x 3 1/2" log screws must be used on every joint for final connection. 2.No more than 2 sign posts shallbe placed within o 7 ft. circle, except for specific moteriols noted on the CWZTCD List. 3. When project is completed, 01 sign supports and foundations shall be removed from the project site. This will be considered subsidiary to Item 502. ❑ See BC(4) for definition of "Work Duration." Wood sign posts MUST be one piece. Splicing will NOT be allowed. Posts shot' be painted white. A See the CWZTCD for the type of sign substrate that can be used for each approved sign support. SHEET 5 OF 12 Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION TYPICAL SIGN SUPPORT BC(5)-14 FILE' bc-14.dgn ©TxDOT November 2002 DN: TxDOT JCK: TxDOT low: TxDOT ICK. TxDOT CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 99 1 DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 32 WHEN NOT IN USE, REMOVE THE PCMS FROM THE RIGHT-OF-WAY OR PLACE THE PCMS BEHIND BARRIER OR GUARDRAIL WITH SIGN PANEL TURNED PARALLEL TO TRAFFIC RECOMMENDED PHASES AND FORMATS FOR PCMS MESSAGES DURING ROADWORK ACTIVITIES (The Engineer may approve other messages not specifically covered here.) c 0 y o0 d To c w ai z >.' E a o E oc v,c V '• to a`o oc� �Ec 0 aov c woo m Oin Ox_ 0 N � TO azo =No F-qc N T O• o €o vow o al ys0 j =9, n oa O m w E J N c� o s-C.' a) 0 0. z 1- 0 E- I 0 0 N 0 0 I c 0 a) cn Q 7 o- O O O O oo 0 N N N U O O \a In u PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS 1. The Engineer/Inspector shall approve all messages used on portable changeable message signs (PCMS). 2. Messages on PCMS should contain no more than 8 words (obout four to eight characters per word), not including simple words such os "TO.' "FOR," "AT," etc. 3. Messages should consist of a single phase, or two phoses that ollernote. Three-phose messages are not allowed. Each phase of the message should convey a single thought, and must be understood by itself. 4. Use the word "EXIT" to refer to an exit romp on a freeway; i.e., "EXIT CLOSED." Do not use the term "RAMP." 5. Always use the route or interstate designation (IH, US, SH, FM) along with the number when referring to a roodwoy. 6. When in use the bottom of a stationary PCMS message panel should be o minimum 7 feet above the roadway, where possible. 7. The message term "WEEKEND" should be used only if the work is to start on Saturday morning and end by Sunday evening ot midnight. Actual days and hours of work should be displayed on the PCMS if work is to begin on Friday evening and/or continue into Monday morning. 8. The Engineer/Inspector may select one of two options which ore avail- able for displaying a two-phose message on o PCMS. Each phose moy be displayed for either four seconds each or for three seconds each. 9. Do not "flash" messages or words included in o message. The messoge should be steady burn or continuous while displayed. 10. Do not present redundant information on o two-phase message; i.e., keeping two lines of the message the some and changing the third line. 11. Do not use the word "Danger" in message. 12. Do not display the message "LANES SHIFT LEFT" or "LANES SHIFT RIGHT" on a PCMS. Drivers do not understand the message. 13. Do not display messages that scrollhorizontolly or vertically ocross the face of the sign. 14. The following table lists abbreviated words and two -word phroses that ore acceptable for use on a PCMS. Both words in o phrase must be displayed together. Words or phrases not on this list should not be abbreviated, unless shown in the TMUTCD. 15. PCMS character height should be at least 18 inches for trailer mounted units. They should be visible from of least 1/2 (.5) mile and the text should be legible from at least 600 feet ot night and 800 feet in daylight. Truck mounted units must hove o chorocter height of 10 inches and must be legible from at least 400 feet. 16. Eoch line of text should be centered on the message board rather than left or right justified. 17. If disabled, the PCMS should default to an illegible display that will not alarm motorists and will only be used to alert workers that the PCMS hos malfunctioned. A pattern such as a series of horizonlolsolid bars is appropriate. WORD OR PHRASE ABBREVIATION WORD OR PHRASE ABBREVIATION Access Rood /CCS RD Major MAJ Alternate ALT Miles MI Avenue AVE Miles Per Hour MPH Best Route BEST RTE Minor MNR Boulevard BLVD Monday MON Bridge BRDG Normal NORM Cannot CANT North N Center CTR Northbound (route) N Construction Ahead CONST AHD Parking PKING Rood RD CROSSING RING Right Lone RT LN Detour Route DETOUR RTE Saturday SAT Do Not DONT Service Rood SERV RD East E Shoulder SHLDR Eastbound (route) E Slippery SLIP Emergency EMER South S Emergency Vehicle EMER VEH Southbound (route) S Entrance, Enter _ ENT Speed SPD Express Lone EXP LN Street ST Expressway EXPWY Sunday SUN XXXX Feet _ XXXX FT Telephone PHONE Fog Ahead FOG AHD Temporary TEMP Freeway FRWY, FWY Thursday THURS Freeway Blocked FWY BLKD To Downtown TO DWNTN Fridoy FRI Traffic TRAF Hazardous Driving HAZ DRIVING Travelers TRVLRS Hazardous Materiol HAZMAT TueSdoy TUES High -Occupancy HOV Time Minutes TIME MIN Vehicle Highwoy HWY Upper Level UPR LEVEL Vehicles (s) VEH, VEHS Hour(s) HR,HRS Warning WARN Information INFO Wednesdoy WED It Is ITS Weight Limit WT LIMIT Junction JCT West W Left LFT Westbound (route) W Left Lone LFT LN Wet Pavement WET PVMT Lone Closed LN CLOSED Will Not WONT Lower Level LWR LEVEL Maintenance MAINT Roodwoy designation • IH-number, US -number, SH-number, FM -number Road/Lone/Romp FREEWAY CLOSED X MILE ROAD CLOSED AT SH XXX ROAD CLSD AT FM XXXX RIGHT X LANES CLOSED CENTER LANE CLOSED NIGHT LANE CLOSURES VARIOUS LANES CLOSED EXIT CLOSED MALL DRIVEWAY CLOSED XXXXXXXX BLVD CLOSED Phase 1: Condition Lists Closure List FRONTAGE ROAD CLOSED SHOULDER CLOSED XXX FT RIGHT LN CLOSED XXX FT RIGHT X LANES OPEN DAYTIME LANE CLOSURES I-XX SOUTH EXIT CLOSED EXIT XXX CLOSED X MILE RIGHT LN TO BE CLOSED X LANES CLOSED TUE - FRI Other Condition List ROADWORK XXX FT FLAGGER XXXX FT RIGHT LN NARROWS XXXX FT MERGING TRAFFIC XXXX FT LOOSE GRAVEL XXXX FT DETOUR X MILE ROADWORK PAST SH XXXX BUMP XXXX FT TRAFFIC SIGNAL XXXX FT ROAD REPAIRS XXXX FT LANE NARROWS XXXX FT TWO-WAY TRAFFIC XX MILE CONST TRAFFIC XXX FT UNEVEN LANES XXXX FT ROUGH ROAD XXXX FT ROADWORK NEXT FRI-SUN US XXX EXIT X MILES LANES SHIFT x LANES SHIFT in Phose 1 must be used with STAY IN LANE in Phase 2. APPLICATION GUIDELINES 1. Only 1 or 2 phases ore to be used on o PCMS. 2. The 1st phase (or both) should be selected from the "Rood/Lone/Romp Closure List" and the "Other Condition List". 3. A 2nd phase con be selected from the "Action to Take/Effect on Trove!, Location, General Warning, or Advance Notice Phase Lists". 4. A Location Phase is necessory only if o distonce or locotion is not included in the first phose selected. 5.11 two PCMS ore used in sequence, they must be separated by o minimum of 1000 ft. Each PCMS shollbe limited to two phases, and should be understandable by themselves. 6. For advance notice. when the current dote is within seven days of the actual work dote, calendar days should be replaced with days of the week. Advance notification should typically be for no more than one week prior to the work. x Phase 2: Possible Component Lists Action to Take/Effect on Travel List MERGE RIGHT DETOUR NEXT X EXITS USE EXIT XXX STAY ON US XXX SOUTH TRUCKS USE US XXX N WATCH FOR TRUCKS EXPECT DELAYS REDUCE SPEED XXX FT USE OTHER ROUTES STAY IN LANE x FORM X LINES RIGHT USE XXXXX RD EXIT USE EXIT I-XX NORTH USE I-XX E TO I-XX N WATCH FOR TRUCKS EXPECT DELAYS PREPARE TO STOP END SHOULDER USE WATCH FOR WORKERS WORDING ALTERNATIVES Location List AT FM XXXX BEFORE RAILROAD CROSSING NEXT X MILES PAST US XXX EXIT XXXXXXX TO XXXXXXX US XXX TO FM XXXX Warning List SPEED LIMIT XX MPH MAXIMUM SPEED XX MPH MINIMUM SPEED XX MPH ADVISORY SPEED XX MPH RIGHT LANE EXIT USE CAUTION DRIVE SAFELY DRIVE WITH CARE x x See Application Guidelines Note 6. 1. The words RIGHT, LEFT and ALL con be interchanged as appropriate. 2. Roodwoy designotions IH, US, SH, FM and LP can be interchanged as appropriate. 3. EAST, WEST, NORTH and SOUTH (or abbreviations E, W, N and S) con be interchanged as appropriate. 4.Highwoy nomes and numbers replaced os appropriate. 5. ROAD, HIGHWAY and FREEWAY con be interchanged os needed. 6. AHEAD may be used instead of distances if necessary. 7. FT and MI, MILE and MILES interchanged as appropriate. 8. AT, BEFORE and PAST interchonged os needed. 9. Distances or AHEAD con be eliminated from the messoge if a location phose is used. PCMS SIGNS WITHIN THE R.O.W. SHALL BE BEHIND GUARDRAIL OR CONCRETE BARRIER OR SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4) PLASTIC DRUMS PLACED PERPENDICULAR TO TRAFFIC ON THE UPSTREAM SIDE OF THE PCMS, WHEN EXPOSED TO ONE DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC. WHEN EXPOSED TO TWO WAY TRAFFIC, THE FOUR DRUMS SHOULD BE PLACED WITH ONE DRUM AT EACH OF THE FOUR CORNERS OF THE UNIT. FULL MATRIX PCMS SIGNS 1. When Full Matrix PCMS signs ore used, the chorocter height and legibility/visibility requirements shall be maintained as listed in Note 15 under "PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS" above. 2. When symbolsigns, such as the "Flogger Symbol"(CW20-7) ore represented graphically on the Full Matrix PCMS sign and, with the approval of the Engineer, it shall maintain the legibility/visibility requirement listed above. 3. When symbol signs ore represented graphically on the Full Matrix PCMS, they shall only supplement the use of the static sign represented, and shall not substitute for, or replace that sign. 4. A full motrix PCMS moy be used to simulate a flashing arrow board provided it meets the visibility, flosh rote and dimming requirements on BC(7), for the some size arrow. Advance Notice List TUE-FRI XX AM- X PM APR XX- XX X PM-X AM BEGINS MONDAY BEGINS MAY XX MAY X-X XX PM - XX AM NEXT FRI-SUN XX AM TO XX PM NEXT TUE AUG XX TONIGHT XX PM- XX AM SHEET 6 OF 12 ,Texas Department of Transportation, Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN (PCMS) BC(6) -14 ME: bc-14.dgn ON, TxDOT IC* TxDOT low: TxDOT IcK� TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. HOU BRAZORIA 33 100 c 0 o4, of To - 50 .L..w sa O , o 4 • o a W w C W �� o oai ace 0E SI rn §o 0 9 Lai o m OF 01 0 - -v a o 0 D L C m 5 yOj 0 oeoc rn arc N TO , Don o,-.• o- w y• ~�V o_, y O tfg dmo "J -o arm J' V1 ... O You V 0 0 0 H In N v 0 0 m a 0 0 0 c m r Q� N GD 0 60 o/ 0 N rn N V ON O tea` 1. Barrier Reflectors shall be pre-quolified, and conform to the color and reflectivity requirements of DMS-8600. A list of prequalified Barrier Reflectors con be found at the MaterialProducer List web address shown on BC(1). 2. Color of Barrier Reflectors shollbe as specified in the TMUTCD. The cost of the reflectors shollbe considered subsidiary to Item 512. orrier Reflectors CONCRETE TRAFFIC BARRIER (CTB) See D & OM (VIA) 3. Where traffic is on one side of the CTB, two (2) Barrier Reflectors shall be mounted in approximately the midsection of each section of CTB. An olternote mounting location is uniformly spaced at one end of each CTB. This will allow for ottochment of a barrier grapple without damaging the reflector. The Sorrier Reflector mounted on the side of the CTB shollbe located directly below the reflector mounted on top of the barrier, as shown in the detoil obove. 4. Where CTB separates two-way traffic, three barrier reflectors shall be mounted on each section of CTB. The reflector unit on top shall hove two yellow reflective faces (Bi-Directionol)whle the reflectors on each side of the barrier shollhove one yellow reflective face, as shown in the detoil obove. 5. When CTB separates traffic traveling in the some direction. no barrier reflectors will be required on top of the CTB. 6.8orrier Reflector units shollbe yellow or white in color to match the edgeline being supplemented. 7. Maximum spacing of Barrier Reflectors is forty (40) feet. 8. Pavement markers or temporary flexible -reflective roodwoy marker tabs sholINOT be used as CTB delineation. 9. Attachment of Barrier Reflectors to CTB shollbe per manufacturer's recommendations. 10.Missing or damaged Borrier Reflectors shall be replaced os directed by the Engineer. 11.Single slope barriers shollbe delineated as shown on the obove detail. Barrier Reflector on 16" tall plastic bracket Max. spacing of barrier reflectors is 20 feet. Attach the delineotors as per manufacturer's recommendations. LOW PROFILE CONCRETE BARRIER (LPCB) nstolla minimum of 3 Barrier Reflectors as per monufacturer's recommendations. DELINEATION OF END TREATMENTS END TREATMENTS FOR CTB'S USED IN WORK ZONES End treatments used on CTB's in work zones shall meet croshworthy stondords as defined in the Notionol Cooperative Highway Research Report 350. Refer to the CWZTCD List for approved end treatments and manufacturers. BARRIER REFLECTORS FOR CONCRETE TRAFFIC BARRIER AND ATTENUATORS 0 Type C Warning Light or approved substitute mounted on a drum adjacent to the travel way. Warning reflector moy be round or square.Must hove a yellow reflective surfoce oreo of at least 30 squore inches WARNING LIGHTS 1. Warning lights shollmeet the requirements of the TMUTCD. 2. Warning lights shall NOT be installed on borricodes. 3. Type A -Low Intensity Flashing Warning Lights ore commonly used with drums. They ore intended to warn of or mark o potentially hozordous area. Their use shollbe as indicated on this sheet and/or other sheets of the plans by the designation "FL". The Type A Warning Lights shall not be used with signs manufactured with Type B or C kheetin9Lmeeting the requirements of DeportmentolMoteriolSpecificotion DMS-8300. 4. Type-C and Type D 360 degree Steady Burn Lights ore intended to be used in a series for delineation to supplement other traffic control devices. Their use she be as indicated on this sheet and/or other sheets of the plans by the designation "SB". 5. The Engineer/Inspector or the plans shollspecify the location and type of warning lights to be installed on the traffic control devices. 6. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish o copy of the warning lights certificotion. The warning light monufacturer wit certify the warning lights meet the requirements of the latest ITE Purchase Specificotions for Floshing and Steady -Burn Warning Lights. 7. When used to delineate curves, Type-C and Type D Steady Burn Lights should only be placed on the outside of the curve, not the inside. 8. The location of worning lights and warning reflectors on drums shall be as shown elsewhere in the plans. WARNING LIGHTS MOUNTED ON PLASTIC DRUMS 1. Type A flashing warning lights are intended to warn drivers that they ore approaching or are in o potentially hozordous oreo. 2. Type A random floshing warning lights ore not intended for delineation and shollnot be used in o series. 3. A series of sequential flashing warning lights placed on chonnelizing devices to form a merging taper may be used for delineation. If used. the successive flashing of the sequential warning lights should occur from the beginning of the toper to the end of the merging toper in order to identify the desired vehicle path. The rate of flashing for each light shollbe 65 flashes per minute, plus or minus 10 flashes. 4. Type C and D steady -burn warning lights ore intended to be used in a series to delineote the edge of the travellone on detours. on lane changes, on lone closures. and on other similar conditions. 5. Type A, Type C and Type D worning lights shollbe installed of locations as detailed on other sheets in the plans. 6. Warning lights shollnot be installed on a drum that hos o sign, chevron or verticolpanel. 7. The maximum spocing for worning lights on drums should be identical to the chonnelizing device spacing. WARNING REFLECTORS MOUNTED ON PLASTIC DRUMS AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR TYPE C (STEADY BURN) WARNING LIGHTS 1. A warning reflector or approved substitute moy be mounted on a plastic drum os a substitute for a Type C, steady burn warning light of the discretion of the Contractor unless otherwise noted in the plans. 2. The warning reflector shollbe yellow in color and shollbe monufactured using o sign substrate approved for use with plastic drums listed on the CWZTCD. 3. The warning reflector shollhove a minimum retroreflective surface area (one -side) of 30 squore inches. 4. Round reflectors shall be fully reflectorized, including the area where attached to the drum. 5. Square substrotes must hove a minimum of 30 squore inches of reflectorized sheeting. They do not hove to be reflectorized where it attaches to the drum. 6. The side of the warning reflector facing approaching traffic shollhove sheeting meeting the color and retroreflectivity requirements for DMS 8300-Type B or Type C. 7. When used near two-way traffic, both sides of the warning reflector shollbe reflectorized. 8. The warning reflector should be mounted on the side of the handle neorest approaching troffic. 9. The maximum spocing for warning reflectors should be identical to the chonnelizing device spacing requirements. Arrow Boards may be located behind chonnelizing devices in ploce for a shoulder toper or merging toper, otherwise they shollbe delineated with four (4) chonnelizing devices placed perpendicular to troffic on the upstream side of troffic. 1. The Flashing Arrow Boord should be used for all lone closures on multi -lone roadways, or slow moving maintenance or construction activities an the trovellones. 2. Flashing Arrow Boards should not be used on two -lone, two-woy roadwoys, detours, diversions or work on shoulders unless the "CAUTION" display (see detoil below) is used. 3. The Engineer/Inspector shall choose all oppropriote signs, borricodes and/or other traffic controldevices that should be used in conjunction with the Flushing Arrow Boord. 4. The Flashing Arrow Board should be able to display the following symbols: • • • • 4 CORNER CAUTION • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • DOUBLE ARROW OR • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ALTERNATING DIAMOND CAUTION • • • • • • • • • • • LEFT & RIGHT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • CHEVRON ARROW LEFT & RIGHT 5. The "CAUTION" display consists of four corner lamps flashing simultaneously. or the Alternating Diamond Caution mode as shown. 6. The straight line caution display is NOT ALLOWED. 7. The Flashing Arrow Board shollbe capable of minimum 50 percent dimming from rated lomp voltage. The flashing rate of the lamps shollnot be less than 25 nor more than 40 flashes per minute. 8. Minimum lamp "on time" shall be approximately 50 percent for the flashing arrow and equal intervals of 25 percent for each sequentiolphose of the flashing chevron. 9. The sequential arrow display is NOT ALLOWED. 10. The flashing arrow display is the TxDOT standard: however. the sequential Chevron display moy be used during daylight operations. 11. The Flashing Arrow Board shollbe mounted on a vehicle. troller or other suitoble support. 12. A Flushing Arrow Board SHALL NOT BE USED to laterally shift traffic. 13. A full matrix PCMS moy be used to simulote o Flashing Arrow Board provided it meets visibility, flush rate and dimming requirements on this sheet for the some size arrow. 14. Minimum mounting height of trailer mounted Arrow Boards should be 7 feet from roodwoy to bottom of pone). REQUIREMENTS TYPE MINIMUM SIZE MINIMUM NUMBER OF PANEL LAMPS MINIMUM VISIBILITY DISTANCE B 30 x 60 13 3/4 mile C 48 x 96 15 1 mile ATTENTION Flashing Arrow Boords shall be equipped with outomotic rimming devices. FLASHING ARROW BOARDS WHEN NOT IN USE, REMOVE THE ARROW BOARD FROM THE RIGHT-OF-WAY OR PLACE THE ARROW BOARD BEHIND CONCRETE TRAFFIC BARRIER OR GUARDRAIL. SHEET 7 OF 12 TRUCK -MOUNTED ATTENUATORS 1. Truck -mounted ottenuotors (TMA) used on TxDOT facilities must meet the requirements outlined in the National Cooperative Highway Research Report No. 350 (NCHRP 350) or the Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH). 2. Refer to the CWZTCD for the requirements of Level2 or Level3 TMAs. 3. Refer to the CWZTCD for a list of approved TMAs. 4. TMAs ore required on freeways unless otherwise noted in the plans. 5. A TMA should be used anytime that it con be positioned 30 to 100 feet in advance of the area of crew exposure without odversely offecting the work performance. 6. The only reason a TMA should not be required is when o work oreo is spread down the roadway and the work crew is on extended distonce from the TMA. ,Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION ARROW PANEL, REFLECTORS, WARNING LIGHTS & ATTENUATOR BC(7)-14 Foe bc-14.dgn ON: TxDOT ICK= TxDOT low: TxDOT CK: TXDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 34 101 GENERAL NOTES 0 oa TO u L �. ai a � O o• V z T_ ='p o Iva 2 ac n o rn � u ` N °o acoe cr, w E0 c woo o fix_ N m toga - y To LLp C my oO- O c '- o o'n2, N TO • o08Ecp 0 � o a, 0,- „is IC X b• • 0 m vv-p W�oo Eom� • N -J N y C o 's o� / 0 0 0. Z 1- N O N F- I c 0 0 0 0 a I 0 0 0 I c 0 col 6, o 0 in O 0) O/ O Er, N U O N 0 �n- N)L 1. For long term stationary work zones on freeways. drums sholl be used as the primary chonnelizing device. 2. For intermediate term stotionory work zones on freeways, drums should be used os the primary channelizing device but may be replaced in tangent sections by verticolponels, or 42" two-piece cones.ln tangent sections one-piece cones may be used with the opproval of the Engineer but only if personnel are present on the project at all times to maintain the cones in proper position and Iocotion. 3. For short term stotionory work zones on freeways, drums ore the preferred channelizing device but may be replaced in topers, transitions and tangent sections by verticolponels, two-piece cones or one-piece cones as opproved by the Engineer. 4. Drums and all related items shall comply with the requirements of the current version of the "Texas Manual on Uniform Troffic Control Devices" (TMUTCD) and the "Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List" (CWZTCD). 5. Drums, bases, and related moteriols sholl exhibit good workmanship and shall be free from objectionable marks or defects that would adversely affect their oppearonce or serviceability. 6. The Contractor shall hove o maximum of 24 hours to replace any plastic drums identified for replacement by the Engineer/Inspector. The replace- ment device must be an approved device. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Pre -qualified plastic drums shall meet the following requirements 1. Plostic drums shall be a two-piece design: the "body" of the drum shall be the top portion and the "base" shall be the bottom. 2. The body and base shall lock together in such o manner that the body separates from the base when impacted by a vehicle traveling at a speed of 20 MPH ,or greater but prevents accidentolseporotion due to normol handling and/or oir turbulence created by possing vehicles. 3. Plastic drums shollbe constructed of lightweight flexible, and deformoble moteriols. The Contractor shall NOT use metal drums or single piece plastic drums os channelization devices or sign supports. 4. Drums shall present a profile that is a minimum of 18 inches in width at the 36 inch height when viewed from any direction. The height of drum unit (body installed on base) shollbe o minimum of 36 inches and a maximum of 42 inches. 5. The top of the drum shall have o built-in handle for easy pickup and shot be designed to drain water and not collect debris. The handle shot hove a minimum of two widely spaced 9/16 inch diameter holes to allow attachment of o warning light. worning reflector unit or approved compliant sign. 6. The exterior of the drum body sholl hove a minimum of four alternating orange and white retroreflective circumferentialstripes not less than 4 inches nor greater than 8 inches in width. My non-reflectorized space between ony two adjacent stripes shall not exceed 2 inches in width. 7. Bases shall hove a maximum width of 36 inches, o maximum height of 4 inches. and a minimum of two footholds of sufficient size to ollow bose to be held down while separating the drum body from the bose. 8. Plastic drums shall be constructed of ultra -violet stabilized, oronge, high -density polyethylene (HOPE) or other approved material. 9. Drum body shollhove a maximum unbollosted weight of 11 lbs. 10.Drum and bose shall be marked with manufacturer's name and modelnumber. RETROREFLECTIVE SHEETING 1. The stripes used on drums shollbe constructed of sheeting meeting the color and retroreflectivity requirements of DeportmentalMoteriols Specification DMS-8300. "Sign Face Materials." Type A reflective sheeting sholl be supplied unless otherwise specified in the plans. 2. The sheeting shollbe suitable for use on and shall adhere to the drum surface such that, upon vehicular impocl, the sheeting shall remain adhered in-ploce and exhibit no delominoting, cracking, or loss of retroreflectivity other than that loss due to abrasion of the sheeting surface. BALLAST 1. Unbollosted boses shall be lorge enough to hold up to 50 lbs. of sand. This base, when filled with the bollost material, should weigh between 35 lbs (minimum) and 50 Ibs (maximum). The ballast may be sand in one to three sandbags separate from the base, sand in o sand -filled plastic base, or other ballasting devices as opproved by the Engineer. Stocking of sandbags will be allowed. however height of sandbags obove pavement surface may not exceed 12 inches. 2. Bases with built-in ballast shall weigh between 40 Ibs. and 50 lbs. Built-in ballast can be constructed of an integral crumb rubber base or a solid rubber base. 3. Recycled truck tire sidewolls may be used for bollost on drums approved for this type of ballast on the CWZTCO list. 4. The ballast shall not be heavy objects, water, or any material that would become hozordous to motorists, pedestrians, or workers when the drum is struck by a vehicle. 5. When used in regions susceptible to freezing. drums shall hove drainage holes in the bottoms so that water willnot collect and freeze becoming a hazard when struck by a vehicle. 6. Bollost shollnot be placed on top of drums. 7. Adhesives may be used to secure base of drums to pavement. Handle Top should not allow collection of woter or debris 1 E 1a 4" max 4" min 8" max (typ) 2" max (typ.) 18" min 9/16" dio. (typ) for mounting signs and warning lights Each drum shall hove o minimum of 2 orange and 2 white stripes using Type A retro- reflective sheeting with the top stripe being orange_ Toperto allow for stocking a minimum of 5 drums Base (36" dio. mox) 4" Orange 4" White DIRECTION INDICATOR BARRICADE 1. The Direction Indicator Borricode may be used in topers, transitions, and other areas where specific directional guidance to drivers is necessary. 2. 11 used, the Direction Indicator Barricade should be used in series to direct the driver through the transition and into the intended trovel lane. 3. The Direction Indicator Barricade shall consist of One -Direction Large Arrow (CW1-6) sign in the size shown with a block orrow on a background of Type B opLType C 0rpe9e retroreflective sheeting above a roil with Type A retroreflective sheeting in alternoting 4" white and oronge stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees in the direction road users are to poss. Sheeting types shollbe as per DMS 8300. 4. Double arrows on the Direction Indicator Borricode will not be allowed. 5. Approved monufocturers ore shown on the CWZTCD List. Ballast shollbe os approved by the manufacturers instructions. 36" Detectable Edge This detoil is not intended for fabricotion. See note 3 and the CWZTCD list for providers of opproved Detectable Pedestrian Barricades Continuous smooth rail for hand trailing 2" Max. DETECTABLE PEDESTRIAN BARRICADES 1. When existing pedestrion facilities ore disrupted. closed. or relocated in o ITC zone, the temporary facilities shollbe detectable and include accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian facility. 2. Where pedestrians with visual disabilities normally use the closed sidewalk, a device that is detectable by a person with o visual disability traveling with the aid of a long cone shollbe placed across the full width of the closed sidewalk. 3. Detectable pedestrion borricodes similar to the one pictured above. longitudinal channelizing devices, some concrete barriers. and wood or chain link fencing with a continuous detectable edging con satisfactorily delineate o pedestrian path. 4. Tope, rope. or plastic chain strung between devices ore not detectable, do not comply with the design standards in the "Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and should not be used as a control for pedestrion movements. 5. Warning lights shollnot be attached to detectable pedestrion barricodes. 6. Delectable pedestrian borricodes moy use 8" nominal barricade robs as shown on BC(10) provided that the top rail provides a smooth continuous roil suitable for hand trailing with no splinters. burrs. or sharp edges. 18" x 24" Sign (Maximum Sign Dimension) Chevron CW1-8, Opposing Traffic Lone Divider, Driveway sign D70o, Keep Right R4 series or other signs os approved by Engineer 12" x 24" Vertical Panel mount with diagonals sloping down towards travel way Plywood, Aluminum or Metal sign substrates shall NOT be used on plastic drums SIGNS, CHEVRONS, AND VERTICAL PANELS MOUNTED ON PLASTIC DRUMS 1. Signs used on plostic drums shollbe manufactured using substrotes listed on the CWZTCD. 2. Chevrons and other work zone signs with on orange background shall be manufactured with Type B or Tape C ()rang?, sheeting meeting the color and retroreflectivity requirements of DMS-8300,"Sign Face Material," unless otherwise specified in the pions. 3. VerticalPonels shall be manufactured with orange and white sheeting meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type A Diogonol stripes on Vertical Panels shall slope down toward the intended traveled lone. 4. Other sign messages (text or symbolic) moy be used as approved by the Engineer. Sign dimensions shall not exceed 18 inches in width or 24 inches in height. except for the R9 series signs discussed in note 8 below. 5. Signs shall be installed using a 1/2 inch bolt (nominol) and nut, two washers, and one locking wosher for each connection. 6. Mounting bolts and nuts sholl be fully engaged and adequately torqued. Bolts should not extend more than 1/2 inch beyond nuts. 7. Chevrons moy be placed on drums on the outside of curves. on merging topers or on shifting tapers. When used in these locations they moy be placed on every drum or spaced not more than on every third drum. A minimum of three (3) should be used at each location called for in the plons. 8. R9-9, R9-10. R9-11 and R9-11a Sidewalk Closed signs which are 24 inches wide moy be mounted on plastic drums, with approval of the Engineer. SHEET 8 OF 12 Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION CHANNELIZING DEVICES BC(8)-14 FILE bc-14.dgn on, TxDOT TxDOT low: TxDOT Io TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 4-03 7-13 9-07 8-14 DST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 35 102 c To o� u � c To .• U jai ;sue z T_ e' a o a ▪ g` a rn • V 0 d_ ood N cal E o, gOD w~ o ox ,..N o x m, w •d g TOO t 2 dy doh o aoc rn0 Dcn N >03 oo o-� co` o wj 0 ODD- S w v12 ooc � w -J ala trip 0 ��� 8 12 0 i z 1- D 0 N 0 0 0 0 •I 0 0 1 co (c) c N • N 0 00 0 o/ 0 N N V o N 0 8" to 12" 45° VP -IL Fixed Bose w/ Approved Adhesive 24" min. Surface Mount Bose 8" .to 12" See note 7 Roadway urface FIXED (Rigid or self-righting) I I (Rigid or self-righting) See note 7 PORTABLE 8" to 12" Self -righting Support 8" to 12" 4 12" minimum embedment depth y 4" See 4., note 7 Rigid Support DRIVEABLE 8" to 12" 1. VerticalPonels (VP's) ore normally used to channelize traffic or divide opposing lanes of traffic. 2. VP'smoy be used in daytime or nighttime situations. They may be used at the edge of shoulder drop-offs and other oreos such as lane transitions where positive daytime and nighttime delineation is required. The Engineer/Inspector shollrefer to the Roadway Design Manuol Appendix B "Treatment of Pavement Drop -of fs in Work Zones" for additional guidelines on the use of VP's for drop-offs. 3. VP's should be mounted bock to back if used at the edge of cuts adjacent to two-way two lone roadways. Stripes ore to be reflective orange and reflective white and should olwoys slope downward toward the trovel lone. 4. VP's used on expressways and freeways or other high speed roadways. moy hove more than 270 square inches of retroreflective area facing traffic. 5. Self-righting supports are available with portable base. See "Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Devices List" (CWZTCD). 6. Sheeting for the VP's shollbe retroreflective Type A conforming to Depar tmental Material Specification DMS-8300, unless noted otherwise. 7. Where the height of reflective material on the vertical ponelis 36 inches or greater, a panel stripe of 6 inches shollbe used. VERTICAL PANELS (VPs) 18" Min. A 36" Fixed Base w/ Approved Adhesive (Driveable Bose, or Flexible Support con be used) 1. The chevron shollbe a vertical rectangle with a minimum size of 12 by 18 inches. 2. Chevrons ore intended to give notice of a sharp change of alignment with the direction of travel and provide additional emphasis and guidance for vehicle operators with regard to changes in horizontal alignment of the roodwoy. 3. Chevrons. when used, shall be erected on the out- side of o sharp curve or turn. or on the far side of an intersection. They shollbe in line with and at right ongles to approaching traffic. Spocing should be such that the motorist olwoys has three in view, until the change in alignment eliminates its need. 4. To be effective, the chevron should be visible for at least 500 feet. 5. Chevrons shollbe orange with o black nonreflec- tive legend. Sheeting for the chevron shall be retroreflective Type B or ITiype C conforming to Deportmentol Material Specification DMS-8300, unless noted otherwise. The legend shollmeet the requirements of DMS-8300. 6. For Long Term Stotionary use on topers or transitions on freeways and divided highways self-righting chevrons moy be used to supplement plastic drums but not to replace plastic drums. CHEVRONS GENERAL NOTES 1. Work Zone chonnelizing devices illustrated on this sheet moy be installed in close proximity to traffic and are suitable for use on high or low speed roadways. The Engineer/Inspector shall ensure thot spacing and placement is uniform and in accordance with the "Texos Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (TMUTCD). 2. Channelizing devices shown on this sheet may have o driveable, fixed or portable base. The requirement for self-righting chonnelizing devices must be specified in the General Notes or other plan sheets. 3. Channelizing devices on self-righting supports should be used in work zone oreos where chonnelizing devices are frequently impacted by erront vehicles or vehicle related wind gusts making alignment of the chonnelizing devices difficult to maintoin.Locations of these devices shollbe detailed else- where in the plons. These devices sholl conform to the TMUTCD and the "Compliant Work Zone Traffic ControlDevices List" (CWZTCD). 4. The Contractor shall maintain devices in o clean condition and replace damaged. nonreflective, faded. or broken devices and bases os required by the Engineer/Inspector. The Controctor shall be required to mointoin proper device spacing and alignment. 5. Portable bases shall be fobricated from virgin and/or recycled rubber. The portable bases shall weigh a minimum of 30 lbs. 6. Pavement surfaces shollbe prepored in a manner (hot ensures proper bonding between the adhesives, the fixed mount bases and the povement surface. Adhesives shollbe prepared and applied according to the monufacturer's recommendations. 7. The installation and removal of chonnelizing devices sholl not cause detrimental ef fects to the final pavement surfaces, including pavement surface discoloration or surface integrity. Driveable bases shollnot be permitted on final pavement surfaces. The Engineer/Inspector shall approve all application and removal procedures of fixed bases. 18" CW6-4 Panels mounted back to bock Portable, Fixed or Driveable Bose moy be used. or moy be mounted on drums. 1. Opposing Traffic Lane Dividers (OTLD) ore delineation devices designed to convert o normal one-way.roadwoy section to two-way operation. OTLD's ore used on temporory centerlines. The upward and downward arrows on the sign's face indicate the direction of troffic on either side of the divider. The base is secured to the povement with an adhesive or rubber weight to minimize movement caused by a vehicle impact or wind gust. 2. The OTLD may be used in combination with 42" cones or VPs. 3. Spacing between the OTLD shall not exceed 500 feet. 42" cones or VPs placed between the OTLD's should not exceed 100 loot spacing. 4. The OTLD shollbe orange with o block non - reflective legend. Sheeting for the OTLD shall be retroreflective Type B or Type C confprming to Departmental MoteriolSpecification DMS-8300, unless noted otherwise. The legend sholmeet the requirements of DMS-8300. OPPOSING TRAFFIC LANE DIVIDERS (OTLD) LONGITUDINAL CHANNELIZING DEVICES (LCD) 1. LCDs are croshworthy, lightweight, deformoble devices that are highly visible, have good target value and con be connected together. They are not designed to contain or redirect a vehicle on impoct. 2. LCDs moy be used instead of a line of cones or drums. 3. LCDs sholl be placed in accordance to application and installation requirements specific to the device, and used only when shown on the CWZTCD list. 4. LCDs should not be used to provide positive protection for obstacles. pedestrians or workers. 5. LCDs shall be supplemented with retroreflective delineotion as required for temporary borriers on BC(7) when placed roughly parallel to the travel lanes. 6. LCDs used os borricades placed perpendicular to traffic should hove at least one row of reflective sheeting meeting the requirements for barricade roils as shown on BC(10) placed near the top of the LCD along the full length of the device. WATER BALLASTED SYSTEMS USED AS BARRIERS 1. Water ballasted systems used os barriers shollnot be used solely to chonnelize rood users. but also to protect the work space per the appropriate NCHRP 350 croshworthiness requirements based on roodwoy speed and barrier application. 2. Water bollosted systems used to chonnelize vehicular troffic shall be supplemented with retroreflective delineotion or chonnelizing devices to improve daytime/nighttime visibility. They may also be supplemented with pavement markings. 3. Water bollosted systems used os barriers shollbe placed in accordance to application and installation requirements specific to the device, and used only when shown on the CWZTCD list. 4. Water bollosted systems used os barriers should not be used for a merging toper except in low speed (less than 45 MPH) urban oreos. When used on a toper in a low speed urban oreo, the taper shollbe delineated and the toper length should be designed to optimize road user operations considering the ovoiloble geometric conditions. 5. When woter bollosted systems used os barriers have blunt ends exposed to troffic, they should be attenuated os per manufacturer recommendations or flared to a point outside the clear zone. If used to channelize pedestrians, longitudinal chonnelizing devices or water bollosted systems must have o continuous detectable bottom for users of long cones and the top of the unit shollnot be Tess thon 32 inches in height. HOLLOW OR WATER BALLASTED SYSTEMS USED AS LONGITUDINAL CHANNELIZING DEVICES OR BARRIERS Posted Speed x Formulo Minimum Desirable Toper Lengths x x Suggested Moximum Spocing of Chonnelizing Devices 10' Offset 11' Offset - 12' Offset On o Toper On a Tangent 30 W52 150' 165' 180' 30' 60' 35 205' 225' 245' 35' 70' L- 60 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' 45 L • W S 450' 495' 540' 45' 90' 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 55 550' 605' 660' 55' 110' 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 120' 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 80 800' 880' 960' 80' 160' x x Toper lengths hove been rounded off. L•Leng h of Toper (FT.) W•Width of Offset (FT.) S•Posted Speed (MPH) SUGGESTED MAXIM CHANNELIZING MINIMUM DESIRABLE TAPER LENGTHS SHEET 9 OF 12 Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION CHANNELIZING DEVICES BC(9)-14 roe bc-14.dgn DN: TxDOT Icx, TxDOT low, TxDOT Icx, TxDOT ©TxDOT November 2002 CONT SECT JOB' HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. HOU BRAZORIA 36 10 3 c- O . N oYai t) 2 0 Z =' a o a7,3 - o REuw a, a2E `E0' Eo OO D W80 O o�"f0' . m h- Ot tom N TOO L t = dv _moo 8 p'C �00 °'nm-0 m =� o� o cr 3 a'I 0 w�5U n ,o- wwva wOC �a)E • c.� o 0 O) 0 0 z (n D 0 N 1- c C 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 c 0)) Q� N • N O 60 O o/ 0 N 0 N 0 M TYPE 3 BARRICADES 1. Refer to the Compliant Work Zone Traffic ControlDevices List (CWZTCO) for details of the Type 3 Borricodes and o list of all materials used in the construction of Type 3 Barricades. 2. Type 3 Barricades shollbe used at each end of construction projects closed to all troffic. 3. Borricodes extending across a roadway should hove stripes thot slope downward in the direction toward which traffic must turn in detouring. When both right and left turns are provided. the chevron striping may slope downward in both directions from the center of the barricade. Where no turns ore provided at a closed road striping should slope downword in both directions toward the center of roadway. 4. Striping of rails, for the right side of the roadway, should slope downward to the left. For the left side of the roodwoy, striping should slope downward to the right. 5.Identification markings may be shown only on the bock of the barricade rails. The maximum height of letters and/or company logos used for identification shall be 1". 6. Borricodes shollnot be placed parallel to traffic unless on odequote clear zone is provided. 7. Warning lights shaliNOT be instolled on barricades. 8. Where barricades require the use of weights to keep from turning over, the use of sondbogs with dry, cohesionless sand is recommended. The sandbags will be tied shut to keep the sond from spilling and to mointoin a constant weight. Sond bogs shall not be stacked in o manner thot covers any portion of a barricade rails reflective sheeting. Rock, concrete, iron, steel or other solid objects will NOT be permitted. Sondbogs should weigh a minimum of 35 lbs and a maximum of 50 lbs. Sandbags shall be mode of o durable moleriol that tears upon vehicular impact. Rubber (such as tire inner tubes) shollnot be used for sandbags. Sandbags shall only be placed along or upon the base supports of the device and shollnot be suspended above ground level or hung with rope, wire, chains or other fasteners. 9. Sheeting for barricades shall be retroreflective Type A conforming to DepartmentalMaterialSpecificotion DMS-8300 unless otherwise noted. Borricodes shall NOT be used as o sign support. Minimum 8" Width of nominal I I Reflective 450 / Sheeting A �Y 64:N 7 inches. TYPICAL STRIPING DETAIL FOR BARRICADE RAIL 4' min., 8' max. Eo 11PAdOr Adr/AdI.47 Flat roil Stiffener may be inside or outside of support. but no more than 2 stiffeners shall be allowed on one barricade. TYPICAL PANEL DETAIL FOR SKID OR POST TYPE BARRICADES Each roodwoy of a divided highway shall be barricaded in the same manner. PERSPECTIVE VIEW The three roils on Type 3 borricodes shollbe reflectorized orange and reflective white stripes on one side facing one-way traffic and both sides for two-way traffic. Barricade striping should slant downward in the direction of detour. R11-2 M4-10L ROAD CLOSED 1. Signs should be mounted on independent supports of a 7 foot mounting height in center of roadway. The signs should be o minimum of 10 feet behind Type 3 Barricades. 2. Advance signing shollbe os specified elsewhere in the plans. NAME ADDRESS CITY STATE CONTRACTOR Detour Roadway G20-6T 30 feet 8' mox. length Type 3 Borricodes PLAN VIEW TYPE 3 BARRICADE (POST AND SKID) TYPICAL APPLICATION O � 0 V Typical Plastic Drum PERSPECTIVE VIEW These drums ore not required on one-way roodwoy 1. Where positive redirectionol capability is provided, drums may be omitted. 2. Plastic construction fencing may be used with drums for safety as required in the plans. 3. VerticolPonels on flexible support moy be substituted for drums when the shoulder width is less than 4 feet. 4. When the shoulder width is greater than 12 feet, steady -burn lights moy be omitted if drums we used. 5. Drums must extend the length of the culvert widening. LEGEND Plastic drum ®Plastic drum with steady burn light or yellow warning reflector 0-0 Steady burn warning light or yellow warning reflector I I Increase number of plastic drums on the iiside of approaching traffic if the crown width makes it necessory. (minimum of 2 and maximum of 4 drums) PLAN VIEW CULVERT WIDENING OR OTHER ISOLATED WORK WITHIN THE PROJECT LIMITS mm. 2" min. L4" min. 28" min. Two -Piece cones I4" min. oronge 2" min. 14" min. white 2" min. 4" min. orange 2" min. 4" min. white Alternate Min.2 drums or 1 Type 3 barricade y On one-way roads downstream drums or borricode moy be omitted here Approx. Drums, vertical ponels or 42" cones 50' 1 _ of 50' moximum spacing ❑ ❑ Desirable stockpile location is outside clear zone. Alternate Approx. 50' Chonnelizing devices parallel to traffic should be used when stockpile is within 30' from travel lane. Min. 2 drums or 1 Type 3 borricode TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR MATERIAL STOCKPILES CONES pI \ 3t"-4" 16" min. 42" min. 1 28" min. One -Piece cones T2" mox. _ 3" min. 2" to 6" 3" min. 28" min. Tubulor Marker 28" Cones shall have a minimum weight of 9 1/2 lbs. 42" 2-piece cones shall hove o minimum weight of 30 Ibs. including base. 1. Traffic cones and tubular markers shollbe predominantly orange, and meet the height and weight requirements shown above. 2. One-piece cones have the body and base of the cone molded in one consolidated unit. Two-piece cones have a cone shaped body and o seporote rubber base, or ballast, that is added to keep the device upright and in place. 3. Two-piece 'cones moy hove a handle or loop extending up to 8" above the minimum height shown, in order to aid in retrieving the device. 4. Cones or tubular markers used at night shall hove white or white and orange reflective bands os shown obove. The reflective bonds shollhave a smooth, sealed outer surface and meet the requirements of DepartmentolMaterialSpecification DMS-8300 Type A. 5. 28" cones and tubular markers are generally suitable for short duration and short-term stotionory work os defined on BC(4). These should not be used for intermediate -term or long-term stationary work unless personnel is on -site to mointoin them in their proper upright position. 6.42" two-piece cones, vertical panels or drums ore suitable for all work zone durations. 7. Cones or tubular markers used on each project should be of the same size and shape. 1 42" 1. This device is intended only for use in place of o vertical panel to channelize traffic by indicating the edge of the trovellane.lt is not intended to be used in transitions or topers. 2. This device shollnot be used to separate lanes of traffic (opposing or otherwise) or warn of objects. 3. This device is based on o 42 inch, two-piece cone with on alternate striping pattern- four 4 inch retroreflective bonds, with an approximate 2 inch gap between bands. The color of the bond should correspond to the color of the edgeline (yellow for left edgeline, white for right edgeline) for which the device is substituted or for which it supplements. The reflectorized bonds shallbe retroreflective Type A conforming to DeportmentalMaterialSpecificotion DMS-8300, unless otherwise noted. 4. The bose must weigh o minimum of 30 lbs. SHEET 10 OF 12 THIS DEVICE SHALL NOT BE USED ON PROJECTS LET AFTER MARCH 2014. ;. to 4" 2" 4" EDGELINE CHANNELIZER Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION CHANNELIZING DEVICES BC(10)-14 riLE= bc-14.dgn ©TxDOT November 2002 DNS TxDOT jce� TxDOT Dw: TxDOT Ice: TxDOT CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 9-07 8-14 7-13 DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 37 104 i C UI 6 of c To c � oy ai o .- O 0 Z ' D E 1 a= 0 a' a•�,c U � n ad = `Eo 0 0,09 who ooa • •d d N a .t..od m0 Tp0 aL0 m = H O 00 c 0�. u5J a'o00, m Tf Dom oa ..E.0 v1"9D N ° O LA'wE"o, a�H N c� c O a) 0 0. z N D 0 N C O 0 0 re I c I L N CO N O O O M 01 O/ O N _ N O N N 0 ro WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS GENERAL 1. The Contractor sholl be responsible for maintaining work zone and existing pavement markings, in accordonce with the standard specifications and specialprovisions, on allroodwoys open to tropic within the CSJ limits unless otherwise stated in the plans. 2. Color, patterns and dimensions shollbe in conformance with the "Texas Monuol on Uniform Troffic Control Devices" (TMUTCO). 3. Additionol supplemental pavement marking details may be found in the plans or specifications. 4. Pavement markings shall be installed in occordonce with the TMUTCO and as shown on the plans. 5. When short term markings are required on the plans, short term markings shall conform with the TMUTCD, the plans and details os shown on the Standard Plan Sheet WZ(STPM). 6. When standard pavement morkings ore not in place and the roadway is opened to traffic, DO NOT PASS signs shollbe erected to mark the beginning of the sections where passing is prohibited and PASS WITH CARE signs ot the beginning of sections where passing is permitted. 7. All work zone pavement markings shollbe installed in accordance with Item 662, "Work Zone Povement Markings." RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS 1. Raised pavement markers are to be placed according to the po(terns on BC(12). 2. All raised pavement markers used for work zone markings shall meet the requirements of Item 672, "RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS" and Departmental MaterialSpecification DMS-4200 or DMS-4300. PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1. Removable prefabricoted pavement markings shalmeet the requirements of DMS-8241. 2. Non -removable prefabricated pavement markings (foil bock) shall meet the requirements of DMS-8240. MAINTAINING WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1. The Contractor wllbe responsible for maintaining work zone pavement markings within the work limits. 2. Work zone povement markings shollbe inspected in accordance with the frequency and reporting requirements of work zone traffic control device inspections os required by Form 599. 3. The markings should provide a visible reference for a minimum distance of 300 feet during normal daylight hours and 160 feet when illuminated by automobile low-beom headlights ot night, unless sight distance is restricted by roadway geometrics. 4. Markings failing to meet this criterio within the first 30 doys after placement shollbe replaced at the expense of the Contractor as per Specification Item 662. REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1. Pavement markings that are no longer applicable, could create confusion or direct a motorist toward or into the closed portion of the roadway shall be removed or obliterated before the roadway is opened to traffic. 2. The above shall not apply to detours in place for less than three days. where floggers and/or sufficient chonnelizing devices are used in lieu of markings to outline the detour route. 3. Povement markings sholl be removed to the fullest extent possible, so as not to leave a discernable marking. This shall be by any method approved by Tx00T Specification Item 677 for "Eliminating Existing Povement Markings and Markers". 4. The removal of pavement markings may require resurfacing or seal cooling portions of the roodwoy os described in Item 677. 5. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, any method that proves to be successful on o particular type pavement may be used. 6. Blast cleaning may be used but will not be required unless specifically shown in the plans. 7. Over -pointing of the morkings SHALL NOT BE permitted. 8. Removal of raised pavement markers shall be as directed by the Engineer. 9. Removal of existing povement markings and markers will be paid for directly in accordance with Item 677, "ELIMINATING EXISTING PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND MARKERS,' unless otherwise stated in the plans. 10.Block-out marking tope may be used to cover conflicting existing markings for periods less than two weeks when approved by the Engineer. Temporary Flexible -Reflective Roadway Marker Tobs TOP VIEW 4 '_ 1/4 2I' FRONT VIEW Height of sheeting is usually more than 1/4" and less lhon 1". SIDE VIEW Adhesive pod STAPLES OR NAILS SHALL NOT BE USED TO SECURE TEMPORARY FLEXIBLE -REFLECTIVE ROADWAY MARKER TABS TO THE PAVEMENT SURFACE 1. Temporary flexible -reflective roadway marker tabs used os guidemarks shotmeet the requirements of DMS-8242. 2. Tabs detoiled on this sheet ore to be inspected and accepted by the Engineer or designated representotive- Sampling and testing is not normolly required, however of the option of the Engineer, either "A" or "8" below may be imposed to ossure quality before placement on the roadway. A.Select five (5) or more tabs at random from each lot or shipment and submit to the Construction Division, Moterials and Pavement Section to determine specificotion compliance. B. Select five (5) tabs and perform the following test. Affix five (5) tabs at 24 inch intervals on on asphaltic pavement in o straight line. Using o medium size passenger vehicle or pickup. run over the markers with the front and rear tires at a speed of 35 to 40 miles per hour. four (4) times in each direction. No more than one (1) out of the five (5) reflective surfaces shall be lost or displaced as a result of this test. 3. Small design variances may be noted between tab manufacturers. 4. See Standard Sheet WZ(STPM) for lob placement on new pavements. See Standard Sheet TCP(7-1) for tab placement on seal coat work. RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS USED AS GUIDEMARKS 1. Raised pavement markers used os guidemorks shall be from the approved product list, and meet the requirements of DMS-4200. 2. All temporary construction raised pavement markers provided on a project shollbe of the same manufocturer. 3.Adhesive for guidemorks shall be bituminous moteriolhot applied or butylrubber pad for ollsurfaces, or thermoplostic for concrete surfaces. Guidemarks shollbe designated as: YELLOW - (two omber reflective surfaces with yellow body). WHITE - (one silver reflective surface with white body). DEPARTMENTAL MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS PAVEMENT MARKERS (REFLECTORIZED) DMS-4200 TRAFFIC BUTTONS DMS-4300 EPDXY AND ADHESIVES DMS-6100 BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS DMS-6130 PERMANENT PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS DMS-8240 TEMPORARY REMOVABLE, PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS DMS 8241 TEMPORARY FLEXIBLE. REFLECTIVE ROADWAY MARKER TABS DMS 8242 A list of prequalified reflective raised pavement markers, non -reflective traffic buttons, roodwoy marker tobs and other povement markings con be found at the Material Producer List web oddress shown on BC(1). SHEET 11 OF 12 ,Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PAVEMENT MARKINGS BC(11)-14 FILE. bc-14.dgn UN: TxDOT Icx TxDOTDw< TxDOT ICU TxDOT ©TxDOT February 1998 COST SECT JOB HIGHWAY 2-98 9-07 1-02 7-13 (11-02 8-14 105 REVISIONS DIT COUNTY SHEET NO. HOU BRAZORIA 38 PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS STANDARD WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS DETAILS >, o o`A o I w ro C oy v w 3 � O� z0 ' - ='P = oo, n 4. U 22 01 0' §o moo c I- 0 a ° tad atu m E 1142 0 o n0c c;0 o'n-0 N '• Ec `I 0 o iY 0 NO O� - H- N o > v2 Si yp0 gc �a,Evy. aruK N C o Y9O+ 0 a^ O z 1— 0 N 1- 0 0 a • I 0 O C 0 rr I 2 rn Q 7 N) O Oco of 0 N N o L�. M 10 to 12" 1:),� Yellow t Yellow ///�T\ypee II -A -A 10 to 12" Type II -A -A a ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ O ❑ �❑ O O O ❑ O O❑ O O O ❑ O ❑ ❑ ❑ o o o ❑ o o o a o 0 0 0 0 OO ❑ o4 o❑ o 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ 0 • Type II -A -A Type Y buttons REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS - PATTERN A RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS - PATTERN A oL r ®� Yellow 4 to 8" aType II -A -A O 00,7000000001000000000000000 O 00000,40000 ❑❑ ❑❑ C> Type Y buttons 6 to 8" Type II -A -A Oil 0 REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS - PATTERN 8 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS - PATTERN 8 Pattern A is the TXDOT Standard, however Pattern B may be used if oppraved by the Engineer. Prefabricated markings moy be substituted for reflectorized povement morkings. CENTER LINE & NO -PASSING ZONE BARRIER LINES FOR TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY HIGHWAYS White 4, Yellow Type I-C O 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000 a Type W buttons �' C> C> White cr ❑❑❑ ❑❑❑ ❑❑❑ Type I -A Type I-C or II-C-R ❑❑❑ 000 000 Type Y buttons o a o 0 0❑ 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0 ❑ a a o ❑ o ❑ 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ 0 0 o a o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ Yellow Type I -A , Type Y buttons -3 ❑❑❑ ❑❑❑ ❑❑❑ 00❑� a0a ❑❑❑ Type W buttons Type I-C or II-C-R M 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS Prefobricoted markings may be substituted for reflectorized povement morkings. EDGE & LANE LINES FOR DIVIDED HIGHWAY White C> E> White Yellow Type I-C Type I-C ❑❑❑ 000 000 000fr/ 000 00❑ Type II -A -A Type Y buttons a 000 o 0 0 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o"o a o 0 0❑ 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ 0 0 0 0 0 0o 0 0 0❑ 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ o 0 0❑ C> 0,Sa�aa ❑❑❑ 000 ❑❑❑ 000 000 `r/ Type I-C REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS Prefabricated markings may be substituted for reflectorized pavement markings. LANE & CENTER LINES FOR MULTILANE UNDIVIDED HIGHWAYS White �' 3 < Type I-C a ems' 000 000 000 41000 000 aao a 00000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ O 00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ o Imam 000 ❑❑O ❑❑O a❑❑ ❑❑❑ ❑❑❑ Yellow Type Y buttons Type II A A 000 Oa0 ❑❑❑ a❑O 000 000 0 0❑ 0 0 0❑ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ 0 0 0❑ O O❑ 0 0 0 0 0 0❑ 0 0 0❑ O O O❑ 0 0 0❑ C> C> -White _ 000 c> 000 ❑❑0 ❑❑❑R 000 \Type I-C 000 REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS Prefobricoted morkings moy be substituted for reflectorized povement markings. TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE SOLID LINES DOUBLE NO -PASSING LINE RAISED PAVEMENT 4 to 12" MARKERS REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT 4 to 12" MARKINGS 'Lo O O o ❑ O o o \❑ O O j 0 ❑ o V0 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 4„ 4 Type Y buttons 60" • 3" Type II -A -A Yellow EDGE LINE OR SINGLE NO -PASSING LINE Type I-C , I -A or II -A -A Type W or Y buttons RAISED �l PAVEMENT ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0 0 MARKERS -I I1.- 60" • 3" t 4" White or Yellow WIDE LINE (FOR LEFT TURN O0ANNELIZPIG LINE OR 0-40zeELIZING LNE USED TO DISCOURAGE LANE CHANGING.) RAISED PAVEMENT 1-2" MARKERS REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS Type I-C Type W buttons L60" •_ 3" ❑1O O 0 ❑ 0 0 0 ❑ 0�0 O ❑ 0 TO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 siimiscommim White BROKEN LINES CENTER LINE OR LANE LINE RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS Type I-C or II -A -A 0 0 ❑ 0 ❑ ❑ Ir 10 30' -01 I-- 40' • 1' 1 ❑ ❑ 10' 30' -� Type I-C or II -A -A (when required) ❑ ❑ ks -1-5'A White or Yellow RAISED 0 0 ❑ 0 0 0 0 0 PAVEMENT AUXILIARY MARKERS �C 3' ale s� Type I-C or II-C-R OR LANEDROP LINE RAISED111111 PAVEMENT MARKERS Fc 3' + 9' si f REMOVABLE MARKINGS 5' • s" WITH RAISED _'1 PAVEMENT MARKERS IF 10' 30 -"I If raised pavement markers are used to supplement REMOVABLE markings, the markers shollbe applied to the top of the tope ot the opproximote mid length of tope used for broken lines or ot 20 foot spacing for solid lines. This allows on easier removal of raised pavement markers and tape. Raised Povement Markers L 20' • 1' Centerline only not to be used on edge lines SHEET 12 OF 12 Raised pavement markers used as standard povement markings shall be from the approved products list and meet the requirements of Item 672 "RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS." J Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard BARRICADE AND CONSTRUCTION PAVEMENT MARKING PATTERNS BC(12)-14 rLE� bc-14.dgn 01xDOT February 1998 ON: TOOT ILK. TXDOT IONA TXDOT ILK. T%DOT LONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS 1-97 9-07 2-98 7-13 it-02 8-14 106 I GIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 39 GENERAL NOTES FOR ALL ELECTRICAL WORK 1. The location of all conduits, junction boxes, ground boxes, and electrical services is diagrammatic and moy be shifted to occommodate field conditions. 2. Provide new and unused materials. Ensure that oil materials and instollotions comply with the oppticobie articles of the Notional Electrical Code (NEC), TxDOT stondards and specifications, Notional Electrical Monufocturers Associotion (NEMA), and ore listed by Underwriters Loborotories (UL) or o Notionally Recognized Testing Lob (NRTL). NRTLs such as Canadian Standard Association (CSA), Intertek Testing Services NA Inc., or FM Approvals LLC can be considered equivolent to UL. Where reference is mode to NEMA listed devices, Internotionol Electrotechnicol Commission (IEC) listed devices will not be considered on acceptable equal to a NEMA listed device. Acceptable devices may have both o NEMA and IEC listing. Faulty fabrication or poor workmonship in ony moteriol, equipment, or installation is justification for rejection. Replace or reinstoll rejected material or equipment at no additional cost to the Department. 3. Miscellaneous nuts, bolts and hordwore, except for high strength bolts, moy be stainless steel when pions specify golvonized, provided the bolt size is 1/2 in. or less in diameter. 4. Provide the following test equipment os required by the Engineer to confirm complionce with the contract and the NEC: voltmeter, ammeter, megohm meter (1000 volt DC), ground resistance tester, torque wrenches, and torque screwdrivers. Ensure alt equipment has been properly calibrated within the lost year. Provide calibration certification to the Engineer upon request. Operate test equipment during inspection as requested by the Engineer. 5. Install grounding os shown on the pions and in accordance with the NEC. Ensure all metallic conduits; metal poles; luminaires; and metal enclosures are bonded to the equipment grounding conductor. Provide stranded bore copper or green insulated grounding conductors. Ground rods, connectors, and bonding jumpers are subsidiary to the various bid items. 6. When required by the Engineer, notify the Department in writing of materiels from the Material Producers List (MPL) intended for use on each project. Prequolified materials ore listed on the MPL on TxDOT's website under "Roadway Illumination and Electrical Supplies." No substitutions will be ollowed for materials on this list. CONDUIT A. MATERIALS 1. Provide conduit, junction boxes, fittings, and hardware os per TxDOT Departmental Material Specification (DMS) 11030 "Conduit" and Item 618 "Conduit" of TxDOT's "Standard Specifications For Construction And Mointenonce Of Highways, Streets, And Bridges," latest edition. Provide conduits listed under Item 618 on the MPL under "Roadway Illumination and Electrical Supplies." Provide conduit types according to the descriptive code or os shown on the plans. Do not substitute other types of conduits for those shown. Provide liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) when flexible conduit is called for on galvanized steel rigid metallic conduit (RMC) systems. Provide liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) when flexible conduit is called for on polyvinyl chloride (PVC) systems. 2. Provide golvonized steel RMC for all exposed conduits, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Properly bond all metal conduits. 3. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, provide junction boxes with o minimum size as shown in the following table, which opplies to the greatest number of conductors entering the box through one conduit with no more than four conduits per box. When o mixture of conductor sizes is present, count the conductors os if all are of the larger size. For situations not applicable to the table, size junction boxes in accordonce with NEC. AWG 3 CONDUCTORS 5 CONDUCTORS 7 CONDUCTORS •1 10" x 10" x 4" 12" x 12" x 4" 16" x 16" x 4" •2 8" x 8" x 4" 10" x 10" x 4" 12" x 12" x 4" •4 8" x 8" x 4" 10" x 10" x 4" 10" x 10" x 4" •6 8" x 8" x 4" 8" x 8" x 4" 10" x 10" x 4" •8 8" x 8" x 4" 8" x 8" x 4" 8" x 8" x 4" 4. Junction boxes with on internal volume of less than 100 cu. in. and supported by entering raceways must hove threaded entries or hubs identified for the intended purpose and supported by connection of two or more rigid metal conduits. Secure conduit within 3 ft. of the enclosure or within 18 in. of the enclosure if all conduit entries are on the some side. Mechanically secure all junction boxes with on internol volume greater than 100 cu. inches. 5. Provide hot dipped golvonized cost iron or sand cost aluminum outlet boxes for junction boxes contoining only 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors. Do not use die cost aluminum boxes. Size outlet boxes occording to the NEC. 6. Do not use intermediate metal conduit (IMC) or electricol metallic tubing (EMT) unless specifically required by the plan sheets. When EMT is called for, provide junction boxes mode from golvonized steel sheeting, listed and approved for outdoor use, unless otherwise noted on the pions. Size all golvonized steel junction boxes in occordance with the NEC. Provide junction boxes for IMC conduit systems thot meet the some requirements for junction boxes used with RMC systems. 7. Provide PVC junction boxes intended for outdoor use on PVC conduit systems, unless otherwise noted on the plans. 8. Provide PVC elbows in PVC conduit systems, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use only a flat, high tensile strength polyester fiber pull tope for pulling conductors through the PVC conduit system. When galvanized steel RMC elbows are specificolly coiled for in the plans and any portion of the RMC elbow is buried less than 18 in., ground the RMC elbow by means of a grounding bushing on a rigid metol extension. Grounding of the rigid metal elbow is not required if the entire RMC elbow is encased in a minimum of 2 in. of concrete. PVC extensions ore ollowed on these concrete encased rigid metal elbows. RMC or PVC elbows are subsidiary to various bid items. 9. When required, provide High -Density Polyethylene (HDPE) conduit with factory installed internal conductors occording to Item 622 "Duct Coble." At the Contractor's request and with approval by the Engineer, substitute HDPE conduit with no conductors for bored schedule 40 or schedule 80 PVC conduit bid under Item 618. Ensure bored HDPE substituted for PVC is schedule 40 and of the some size PVC called for in the plans. Ensure the substituted HDPE meets the requirements of Item 622, except that the conduit is supplied without foctory-instolled conductors. Make the tronsition of the HDPE conduit to PVC (or RMC elbow when required) at the bore pit. Provide conduit of the size and schedule os shown on the plans. Do not extend substituted conduit into ground boxes or foundations. Provide PVC or galvanized steel RMC elbows as called for of all ground boxes and foundations. 10. Use two -hole straps when supporting 2 in. and larger conduits. On electrical service poles, properly sized stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized one -hole standoff strops are allowed on the service riser conduit. B. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 1. Provide and instoll exponsion joint conduit fittings on all structure -mounted conduits of the structure's expansion joints to allow for movement of the conduit. In addition, provide and instoll exponsion joint fittings on all continuous runs of galvanized steel RMC conduit externolly exposed on structures such os bridges at moximum intervals of 150 ft. When requested by the project Engineer, supply manufacturer's specification sheet for exponsion joint conduit fittings. Repair or replace exponsion joint fittings that do not allow for movement of no odditionol cost to the Department. Provide the method of determining the amount of expansion to the Engineer upon request. Do not use LFMC or LFNC as o substitute for the required exponsion conduit fittings. 2. Space all conduit supports of maximum intervals of 5 ft. Install conduit spacers when attaching metol conduit to surface of concrete structures. See "Conduit Mounting Options" on ED(2). Install conduit support within 3 f t. of all enclosures and conduit terminations. 3. Do not ottoch conduit supports directly to pre -stressed concrete beams except os shown specifically in the plans or os approved by the Engineer. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, jack or bore conduit ploced beneath existing roadways, driveways, sidewalks, or after the base or surfacing operation has begun. Backfillond compoct the bore pits below the conduit per Item 476 "Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box" prior to installing conduit or duct cable to prevent bending of the connections. 5. When placing conduit in the sub-grode of new roadways, bockfill all trenches with excavated material unless otherwise noted on the pions. When placing conduit in the sub-bose of new roodwoys, bockfill all trenches with cement -stabilized bose os per requirements of Items 110 "Excavation", 400 "Excavation and Backfill for Structures", 401 "Flowoble Backfill", 402 "Trench Excavation Protection", and 403 "Temporary Special Shoring." 6. Provide and place warning tope opproximateiy 10 in. above all trenched conduit as per Item 618. 7. During construction, tempororily cop or plug open ends of all conduit and raceways immediotely after installation to prevent entry of dirt, debris and animals. Temporary cops constructed of durable duct tape ore allowed. Tightly fix the tope to the conduit opening. Clean out the conduit and prove it clear in accordance with Item 618 prior to installing ony conductors. 8. Ensure conduit entry into the top of ony enclosure is woterproof by installing conduit sealing hubs or using boxes with threaded bosses. This includes surface mounted safety switches, meter cans, service enclosures, auxiliary enclosures and junction boxes. Grounding bushings on woter tight sealing hubs ore not required. 9. Fit the ends of all PVC conduit terminations with bushings or bell end fittings. Provide and instoll o grounding type bushing on all metal conduit terminations. 10. Instoll o bonding jumper from each grounding bushing to the nearest ground rod, grounding lug, or equipment grounding conductor. Ensure ollbonding jumpers are the same size as the equipment grounding conductor. Bonding of conduit used as o casing under roodwoys for duct cable is not required, if the duct extends the full length through the cosing. 11. At all electrical services, install a 6 AWG solid copper grounding electrode conductor. 12. Place conduits entering ground boxes so that the conduit openings are between 3 in. and 6 in. from the bottom of the box. See the ground box detail on sheet ED(4). 13. Seal ends of all conduits with duct seal, expondobie foam, or by other methods opproved by the Engineer. Seal conduit immediately after completion of conductor installation and pull tests. Do not use duct tope as a permanent conduit sealant. Do not use silicone caulk as o conduit sealant. 14. File smooth the cut ends of all mounting strut and conduit. Before installing, point the field cut ends of all mounting strut and RMC (threaded or non -threaded) with zinc rich point (94% or more zinc content) to alleviate averspray. Use zinc rich point to touch up galvanized material os ollowed under Item 445 "Golvonizing." Do not paint non-golvonized moteriol with a zinc rich point as on olternotive for moteriols required to be galvanized. Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard ELECTRICAL DETAILS CONDUITS & NOTES ED(1)-14 FILE ed1-14.dgn ©TxDOT October 2014 DN: CONT SECT ICK: IDW� ICK, JOB HIGHWAY (7m I REVISIONS DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 40 TRAFFIC SIGNAL NOTES 1. Do not pass luminoire conductors through the signal controller cabinet. 2. Include an equipment grounding conductor in all conduits throughout the electrical system. Bond all exposed metal ports to the grounding conductor. 3. Provide roadway luminaires, when required, in accordance with the material and construction sections of Item 610. "Roadway Illumination Assemblies," except for performance testing of luminoires. Test installed roadway luminaires for proper operation as a port of the associated traffic signol system test. 4. If internolly illuminated street nome signs ore opproved for use, ground the fixture to the pole with a 12 AWG green XHHW conductor. 5. Bond anchor bolts to rebar cage in two locations using •3 bars or 6 AWG stranded copper conductors. Use listed mechonicol connectors rated for embedment in concrete. See TXDOT standard TS-FD for further de toils. 6. Drill and top signol poles for 1/2 in. X 13 UNC tonk ground fitting. Provide and instoll tank ground fitting 4 in. to 6 in. directly below electrical service enclosure. Provide properly sized hole through the bottom of the enclosure for the service grounding electrode conductor. Connect the electrical service grounding electrode conductor to the tank ground fitting. Ensure electrical service grounding electrode conductor is os short and straight os possible from the enclosure to the tank ground fitting. See Inset A detail for further information. Size service entrance conduit and bronch circuit conduit os shown in the plans. 7. Mount electrical service enclosure and meter to signol pole with stainless steel bonds. Ensure bonds ore o minimum width of 3i in. Secure enclosures to bonds using two -bolt brackets. Install brackets neor top and bottom of each enclosure. Install properly sized stainless steel woshers on each bolt in the enclosure. Bond or drill and top properly sized stond-off strops to signol pole for attaching conduit. 8. Conduct pull tests and insulotion resistance tests on all illumination and power conductors os required in Item 620 "Electrical Conductors" and ED(3). To prevent electronics damage, do not conduct insulation resistance tests on traffic signal cables of ter terminotion. 9. Lock all enclosures and bolt down all ground box covers before applying power to the signal installation. 10. Terminote conduits entering the top of enclosures with o conduit -sealing hub or threaded boss such as meter hub. Install o grounding bushing on all metal conduits not connected to conduit -sealing hub or threoded boss. Bond the grounding bushing to the ground bus with a bonding jumper. Seol all conduits entering enclosures with duct seal or expending foam. Do not use silicone to seal conduit ends. 11. For all conduits, ensure the burial depth is a minimum of 18". Ensure the minimum buriol depth for conduit placed under a roodwoy is 24". SIGNAL CONTROLLER SIDE VIEW Service Entronce Une Meter See Note 7 — Service Enclosure See Note 7 Inset A Bushing or Bell End Fitting White insulation or color code 6" of neutral conductor's insulation with white tope where conductor exits weotherhead. Red insulation or color code 6" length of Line 1 or Line 2 conductor's insulation with red tope where conductor exits the weotherhead. Conductor NNN_slock length, 12" min., 18" max. 120/240 Volt 3 Wire Drill, top and threod /2' X 13 UNC. Install tonk ground fitting, connect electrical service grounding electrode conductor See Note 6 SIGNAL POLE WITH SERVICE Type T electricol service mounted on signol pole shown os on example. See electrical details. loyout sheets. and electricol service data chart for odditionol detoils. See TS-CF stondord for conduit and grounding requirements. See layout sheets for ground box locutions and ony additional conduits that ore required. INSET A See TS-CF standard for controller foundation detoils, number of required conduits, and grounding requirements (see side view) Conduits (See layout sheet for details) SIGNAL CONTROLLER FRONT VIEW See layout sheets for signol pole type Ground box - 0 See TS-FD standard sheet for foundation and conduit details SIGNAL POLE Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard ELECTRICAL DETAILS TYPICAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM DETAILS ED(8)-14 rae ed8-14.dgn DN1 TxDOT ]cK: TxDOT IDW. TxDOT IcK: TxDOT ©TxDOT October 2014 REVISIONS CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 41 DUCT CABLE & HDPE CONDUIT NOTES 1. Provide duct cable in occordance with Departmental Material Specification (DMS) 11060 "Duct Coble" and Item 622 "Duct Coble." Provide duct cable os listed on the Material Producer List (MPL) on the Department web site under "Roodwoy Illuminotion and Electricol Supplies" Item 622. 2. Provide High -Density Polyethylene (HDPE) conduit in occordonce with DMS 11060 and Item 618, "Conduit." Provide HDPE os listed on the MPL on the Deportment web site under "Roadway Illumination and Electricol Supplies," Item 618. 3. Supply duct cable with o minimum 2 in. diameter, unless otherwise shown in the pions. Provide duct coble and HDPE conduit as shown by descriptive code or on the plans. Bend duct cable and HDPE conduit as recommended by the manufacturer, with a minimum bending radius of 26 in. for 2 in. duct. Follow monufocturers' recommendations when handling duct cable and HDPE conduit reels and during installation of duct cable and HDPE conduit. 4. Do not splice conductors within duct cable or HDPE conduit. Couple duct cable and HDPE entering o ground box or foundation to o PVC elbow. When galvanized steel RMC elbows ore called for in the plans and any portion of the RMC elbow is buried less thon 18" from possible contoct, ground the RMC elbow. 5. Furnish and install duct cable with factory installed conductors, sized os shown in the plans and os required by the Notional Electrical Code (NEC). The NEC contains specific requirements for duct cable in Article, "Nonmetallic Underground Conduit with Conductors: Type NUCC." 6. When conduit casing is called for in the plans, extend duct cable or HDPE conduit through the conduit casing in one continuous length without connection to the casing. 7. Seal the ends of duct coble or HDPE conduit with duct seol, expandable foam, or other approved method of ter completing the pull tests required by Item 622. 8. Provide minimum cover of 24 in. under roadways, 18 in. in other locations, or as shown on the plans. 9. Furnish and install listed fittings to couple duct coble or HDPE conduit to other types of conduit. Duct cable and-HDPE conduit may be field-threoded and spliced with PVC or RMC threaded couplings; connected with listed tie -wrap fittings; connected using listed coupling mode of HDPE with stainless steel external bonding clomps and locking rings; connected with opproved electrofusion conduit couplings; or connected using on approved chemical fusion method using an epoxy or adhesive specificolly designed for HDPE couplings and connectors ollinstalled in occordonce with their manufacturer's instructions. Do not use PVC glue on HDPE. Do not use water pipe fittings, or connect conduit with heat shrink tubing. Duct Coble/HDPE Listed Nonmetollic Liquidtight Connector 00000O: o 0CJ0p0 l�• �0) O°C�°��CO0DOI U •O1 o,,�2o0O0opt°C �� -1 ii-1 HDPE coupling body Externolbond clomps and locking rings. DUCT CABLE/HDPE TO PVC Duct Coble/HDPE PVC Conduit Rigid Coupling Rigid Metallic Conduit Duct Cable/HDPE Couple duct to conduit elbow at foundations. Ensure conductors extend into pole base. Do not splice conductors in conduit. 3" to 6" uct Cable/HDPE to PVC Conduit Coupling Ground box —ram PVC Bell End Fitting PVC Elbow DUCT CABLE/HDPE AT GROUND BOX Bell end fitting PVC extension RMC to PVC - I - . .4 t t •d DUCT CABLE / HDPE AT FOUNDATION Cosing ggregote bed is to be a minimum, f 9 inches deep, placed under and ot in the ground box. Ensure the ggregote does not encroach into the interior of the box. When the upper end of on RMC EII does not enter the ground box,it may be extended with a SCH-40 PVC conduit nipple and bell end, provided there is a minimum of 18" of cover over all parts of the elbow. If not. o rigid extension and ground bushing is required. 1"-3" exposed 2" min., from top of drill shaft to RMC RMC elbow Ground rods are not shown on this standard sheet. but may be required elsewhere in plans. Drill shaft foundation Class A Concrete Bored Conduit 4�/ e , 4,0 4• % ,44/ .4 o,, 4 4• / 4 /4 ^, , Compact bockfill to bottom of conduit casing prior to plocing duct cable, to prevent kinking. Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard ELECTRICAL DETAILS DUCT CABLE/ HDPE CONDUIT ED(11)-14 FILE: ed11-14.dgn ©TxDOT October 2014 DAP T%DOT Ick: TxDOT OW= txDOT cx: T%DOT DUCT CABLE/HDPE TO RMC BORE PIT DETAIL CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY REVISIONS DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 42 711 I CABINET CONTROLLER EXTERNAL BATTERY CABINET FOR FIBER SYSTEM USE ,,-PATCH PANEL ice///,'///W ///,W/. ii~////W////SW-t//i/W •''//�///yiiy///yii/�///� ~//i y///•. A 42'MIN A GROUNED IBOXTYP 2'HDPE (DIRECTIONAL BORE) GROUND BOX TO GROUND BOX (BORE) TO CABINET DETAIL e/A-4,0, '//5////, GRADE FIBER OPTIC DROP CABLE(S) PER PROJECT DRAWINGS HDPE SIZED PER PROJECT DRAWINGS SF(TTIN A -A N()TFS• 1. THIS DETAIL SHALL BE UTILIZED WHERE APPLICABLE FOR ALL AERIAL SLACK STORAGE, AERIAL TO UNDERGROUND TRUNK CABLE TRANSITIONS, AND AERIAL SPLICING ACTIVITIES FOR TRUNK AND DROP CABLE INSTALLATIONS. 2. CABLE STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT WITHIN FIELD CABINETS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY SECURING FIBER OPTIC CABLE SLACK AND CONNECTORS IN THE TOP OF THE CABINETS. 3. SLACK CABLE STORAGE REOUIREMENTS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT DRAWING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 4. ALL TRUNK CABLE NOT DESIGNATED FOR SLACK STORAGE OR SPLICING ACTIVITIES SHALL BE OVERLASHED TO THE MESSENGER CABLE. ALL OTHER CABLE SHALL BE ATTACHED AERIALLY USING STAINLESS STEEL TIE WRAPS (PANDUIT PART" NKT 4H LP OR APPROVED EOUAL). 5. ALL SPLICING SHALL OCCUR IN SPLICE ENCLOSURES APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. ALL CABLES SHALL ENTER THE ENCLOSURE FROM THE SAME END AND SHALL BE SPLICED IN BUTT CONFIGURATION UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. 6. NO SPLICE CLOSURE OR SLACK STORAGE SHALL BE LOCATED OVER PUBLIC OR PRIVATE TRAVEL WAYS. 7. ALL REOUIRED HARDWARE SHALL BE GALVANIZED. 8. REFER TO CENTERPOINT ENERGY 'POLE ATTACHMENT GUIDELINES AND PROCEDURES'.CENTERPOINT ENERGY CAN BE REACHED AT WWW.CENTERPOINTENERGY.COM OR AT 713-207-6551. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE OWN. CHK. F,ROTHL ZERME • tr. 116355 b�ySh.S�NAL ;r`� 3/4/2021 dil' CobbFendley �a•.��a, x,. 1928 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 Pearland, Texas77586 38t.8omv.co lfendlo .cor, 88 www.wbbiendley.mm ' City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project Na.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 own By. JE Chkel By. KR Seale: HORZ: N/A vERT: N/A SHEET 43 OF 58 1300.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK All work necessary to complete furnishing and installing all fiber optic communications infrastructure shown in the project drawings, complete and in place, shall be performed in accordance with the details shown within the pion set, and in keeping with the requirements set forth in these "Notes For Plan Layouts. All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner to meet the highest industry standards, and in accordance with the requirements of the latest editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and National Electrical Safety Code. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer all submittals identified in these notes no later than two (2) weeks following award of the contract. 1300.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TECHNICIAN AND LINEMAN QUALIFICATIONS 1300.02.1 Work To Be Performed By Fiber Optic Technicians Any task requiring the opening of the fiber optic cable jacket, installation of fiber optic connectors, fusion splicing together of two fibers, or the testing of any fiber optic cable, drop cable, or patch cords shall be performed by Fiber Optic Technicians that have been pre —approved by the Engineer. 1300.02.2 Minimum Requirements for Fiber Optic Technicians and Lineman Certifications — All fiber optic technicians and lineman shall maintain International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) Fiber Optic ITS Certification level II or approved equal. Also, fiber optic technicians and lineman shall be certified in (IMSA), "Workzone" or approved equal. It should be noted that approved fiber optic technicians shall maintain all certifications on their person at all times while working on the subject project. Work History for Fiber Optic Technicians — All Fiber Optic Technicians and Linemen who will perform work on this project shall be able to demonstrate a minimum of three years work experience, with a minimum of one (1) year continuous work experience prior to award of proposed project. Work experience shall be any work activity involving those work elements described in 1300.02.1. 1300.02.3 Submittals for Fiber Optic Technician and Lineman Qualifications Prior to the start of construction on this project, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all documentation necessary to demonstrate that all fiber optic technicians and lineman providing services on this contract meet the minimum requirements established in 1300.02.1 and 1300.02.2. The Contractor understands that written approval of the technicians submitted for review by the Engineer is required prior to beginning any work on the fiber optic cable plant. It is further understood that the Contractor will address any deficiencies noted by the Engineer prior to beginning any work on the fiber optic cable plant. 1300.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE MANUFACTURER 1300.03.1 Minimum Requirements It is understood by the Contractor that no cable shall be purchased for use on this project prior to receiving written approval of submittals for fiber optic cable by the Engineer, as established in Section 1300.05. All fiber optic cable(s) supplied and utilized on this project shall be from a single manufacturer. Manufacturers proposing to supply fiber optic cable for this project shall be Certified ISO-9001, and TL 9000 Certified. As a prerequisite to acceptance of fiber optic cable proposed for this project, said cable manufacturer shall demonstrate that, for a continuous period of two (2) years, they have engaged in the production of each, every and all specified fiber optic cable(s) herein. Further, said manufacturer shall warrant that all cables supplied for this project will be produced utilizing the construction processes noted herein. 1300.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE MANUFACTURER — CONTINUED 1300.03.2 Submittals for Fiber Optic Cable Manufacturers The Contractor shall provide submittal documentation for the fiber optic cable manufacturer that documents, as a minimum, the following information: (1) Manufacturer ISO-9001, and TL 9000 Certification. (2) "Proof of Compliance" with Bellcore GR-20—CORE, Issue No. 1 TL 9000. (3) Documentation for each cable indicating that the cable is listed by the Rural Utilities Service (RUS), 7CFR 1755.900 or PE-90 if cable is in transition to RUS. (4) Manufacturing Site Testing Procedures. The Engineer reserves the right to require verification of any or all of the manufacturer's test procedures and those test results. When required by the Engineer, the cable manufacturer issuing the test data as verification of testing shall conduct this testing, and/or the testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or his Agent. 1300.04 OPTICAL FIBER MATERIALS 1300.04.1 General Requirements Each optical fiber shall be glass and consist of a doped silica core surrounded by concentric silica cladding. All fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical and environmental requirements of these specifications. The optical fiber utilized in the manufacture of all fiber optic cable for this project shall be produced by OFS Technologies or Corning. The optical fiber characteristics shall be in accordance with Section 1300.04. 1300.04.2 Technical Requirements Only dispersion unshifted Single Mode (SM) fiber as specified by EIA 492—BA000, Class 4a shall be utilized in the manufacture of all cable for this project. All fibers shall be coated with a dual layered, UV cured acrylite. The coating shall be mechanically or chemically strippable without damaging the fiber. All optical fibers shall have a tensile strength of 100 kpsi. The required optical fiber grade shall reflect the maximum individual fiber attenuation, to guarantee the required performance of every fiber in the cable. The optical fiber shall comply with all optical and mechanical requirements over an operating temperature range of —20°C to +70°C. The cable shall meet all requirements stated in this specification. The cable shall be an accepted product of the United States Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service (RUS) 7 CFR 1755.900 (PE-90) and meet the requirements of ANSI/ICEA Standard for Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable, ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2006. Dispersion Un—shifted and Non —zero Dispersion Shifted Single —mode Fiber: Generic Specification F1, "Generic Specification for Single —mode Optical Fiber in Loose Tube and Ribbon Cables." 1300.04.3 Optical Specifications Maximum Attenuation Wavelength (nm) Maximum Value (dB/km) 1310 0.33 — .35 1550 0.19 — .20 Dimensional Specifications Glass Geometry Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) Value (ps/Vkm) PMD Link Design Value <0.06 Maximum Individual Fiber <0.02 Fiber Curl >_ 4.0m radius of curvature Cladding Diameter 125.0 ± 0.7 pm Core —Clad Concentricity 5 0.5 pm Cladding Non —Circularity 50.7% Coating Geometry Coating Diameter 245 ± 5 pm Coating —Cladding Concentricity <5 pm k/K. DESCRIPTION _ DATE DWN: CFIK. wealittAmi KARL F. ROTHERMEL 116355 .4 ��SS�NAL E�r� gag^"..D 3/4/2021 C_oSLPSE bbFendley Fm6 ay.Su6, 1920 Country Place Parkway. Suite 310 Peadana, Texas 77584 281.993A9521 lax 281.993.8086 • www.mbbrandley.mm City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn By, JE Chkd By. KR SHEET Scale: NORz: N/A VERT N/A 44 OF 58 1300.04 OPTICAL FIBER MATERIALS — CONTINUED 1300.04.4 Submittals for Optical Fiber Materials Submittal documentation to be used in the construction of all fiber optic cable proposed for this project shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer no later than two (2) weeks following the award of the contract. It is understood by the Contractor that no cable shall be purchased for use on this project prior to receiving written approval of submittals for fiber optic cable by the Engineer. Submittal documentation for the optical fiber used shall sufficiently document that the optical fiber meets all criteria specified in Section 1300.04. The Contractor shall also provide the manufacturer's SOP for installation of this cable. 1300.05 GEL —FREE LOOSE TUBE OPTICAL FIBER CABLES SPECIFICATIONS 1300.05.01 General Specifications Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube. The nominal outer diameter of the buffer tube shall be either 2.5 mm or 3.0 mm. Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibers. The fibers shall not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube. Each fiber shall be distinguishable by means of color coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-598—B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding." The fibers shall be colored with ultraviolet (UV) curable inks. Buffer tubes containing fibers shall be color coded with distinct and recognizable colors in accordance with TIA/EIA-598—B, "Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding." Buffer tube colored stripes shall be inlaid in the tube by means of co —extrusion when required. The nominal stripe width shall be 1 mm. For cables containing more than 12 buffer tubes, standard colors ore used for tubes 1 through 12 and stripes are used to denote tubes 13 through 24. The color sequence applies to tubes containing fibers only, and shall begin with the first tube. If fillers are required, they shall be placed in the inner layer of the cable. The tube color sequence shall start from the inside layer and progress outward. In buffer tubes containing multiple fibers, the colors shall be stable across the specified storage and operating temperature range and shall not be subject to fading or smearing onto each other. Colors shall not cause fibers to stick together. The buffer tubes shall be resistant to external forces and shall meet the buffer tube cold bend and shrinkback requirements of 7 CFR 1755.900. Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross—section where needed. Fillers shall be placed so that they do not interrupt the consecutive positioning of the buffer tubes. In duol layer cables, any fillers shall be placed in the inner layer. Fillers shall be nominally 2.5 mm or 3.0 mm in outer diameter. The central member shall consist of a dielectric, glass reinforced plastic (GRP) rod (optional steel central member). The purpose of the central member is to provide tensile strength and prevent buckling. The central member shall be overcooted with a thermoplastic when required to achieve dimensional sizing to accommodate buffer tubes/fillers. Each buffer tube shall contain a water—swellable yarn or water blocking element for water —blocking protection. The water—swellable yarn or water blocking element shall be non —nutritive to fungus, electrically non—conductive, and homogeneous. It shall also be free from dirt or foreign matter. This yarn or element will preclude .the need for other water —blocking material; the buffer —tube shall be gel —free. The opticol fibers shall not require cleaning before placement into a splice tray. Buffer tubes shall be stranded around the dielectric central member using the reverse • oscillation, or "S—Z", stranding process. 1300.05 GEL —FREE LOOSE TUBE OPTICAL FIBER CABLES SPECIFICATIONS — CONTINUED 1300.05.01 General Specifications — Continued Water swellable yorn(s) shall be applied longitudinally along the central member during stranding. Water blocking elements shall be applied uniformly throughout the buffer tube. Two polyester yarn binders shall be applied controhelically with sufficient tension to secure each buffer tube layer to the dielectric central member without crushing the buffer tubes. The binders shall be non_hygroscopic, non_wicking, and dielectric with low shrinkage. For single layer cables, a water swellable tape shall be applied longitudinally around the outside of the stranded tubes/fillers. The water swellable tape shall be non —nutritive to fungus, electrically non—conductive, and homogenous. It shall also be free from dirt and foreign matter. For dual layer cables, a second (outer) layer of buffer tubes shall be stranded over the original core to form a two layer core. A water swellable tope shall be applied longitudinally over both the inner and outer layer. The water swellable tape shall be non —nutritive to fungus, electrically non—conductive, and homogenous. It shall, also be free from dirt and foreign matter. Non —armored cables shall contain one ripcord under the sheath for easy sheath removal. Armored cables shall contain two ripcords under the steel armor for easy armor removal. Additionally, armored cables that hove an inner sheath will also contain one ripcord under the inner sheath. Tensile strength shall be provided by the central member, and additional dielectric yarns as required. The dielectric yarns shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable core. Non —armored cables shall be sheathed with medium density polyethylene (MDPE). The minimum nominol jacket thickness shall be 1.3 mm. For reduced diameter (RD) cables, the minimum nominal jacket thickness shall be 1.4mm. Jacketing material shall be applied directly over the tensile strength members (as required) and water swellable tape. The polyethylene shall contain carbon black to provide ultraviolet light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus. 1300.06 FIBER OPTIC DROP CABLE PIG TAILS AND PATCH CORDS 1300.06.1 Drop Coble Pigtails All drop cable pigtails shall be pre—connectorized at the factory on one end, and shall meet applicable cable, cordage and fiber specifications stated in whole or in part in 1300.03, 1300.04, and 1300.05. Shall be ISO Certified, Telcordia GR-326—Core Compliant, Preterminote Coble Assembly, Each polishis100% Tested, Indoor/Outdoor Cable, SM, Riser Rated,. 900 Micron, Tight —buffered design, All —dielectric cable construction, UV —Resistant, Flame Retardant, Dry Cable waterblocking Technology, ICEA S-104-696 test criteria, Maximum Attenuation (db/km) 1.0/0.75, ST termination on one end, UPC Polish. ST is mode up of a Metallic Bayonet design, Prerodiused Zirconia ceramic ferrule, Compliant with TIA/EIA 604-2,-55db for Ultra PC, Average Insertion Loss 0.2db, Temperature change ,0.3 db, Automated polishing equipment, test data included. Single mode fiber optic drop cable shall be utilized to connect the network data loop to the trunk to sub —trunk, video, traffic controllers, VDS/DMS via mid —span fusion splicing of drop cable via the fusion splice process. The optical fibers shall meet all optical fiber specifications as listed in 1300.04. All drop cable shall be of a central core design. Fibers within drop cables shall be housed in on extruded plastic tube in which a filling compound displaces air within the tube and also acts as protection for the fibers. The tube or central core shall be wrapped with water blocking tape, multiple polymer strength members that run laterally, and a medium density polyethylene (MDPE) jacket. This central core outer diameter shall be nominally 1/3 inch and have a pulling strength of 300 pounds. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. 9F. cc. 44 # �P''4 'IS 1*: /\ .* i i KARL F. ROTHERMEL S i•$'• 116355 •�41 SiC:4;. l/CENSF::G. (�_ 6% NAL Ems aifYi an �M• 3/4/2021 CobbFendley ae, o.100.7 1920 Country Place PaAway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas ns96 261.993A952 I fax 281.993.8086 www.cebbfendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 own By: JE Chkd By. KR Scale: HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A SHEET 45 OF 58 1300.06 FIBER OPTIC DROP CABLE PIG TAILS AND PATCH CORDS — CONTINUED 1300.06.2 Patch Cords All fibers patch cords shall meet NEC jacketing requirements for this project's application and shall have outer jacket coloration of yellow for single mode patch cords. All duplex patch cords shall be of a zip cord design and shall have connector boots of two (2) colors, namely white or off—white for one leg of the duplex cord (non —printed zip leg) and red for the opposite leg (printed zip leg) of the duplex cord. Connector losses shall not exceed those established in 1300.10.2. Only Drop Cables and Patch Cords shall be utilized that have been submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Only one manufacturer's connector shall be used on ony one assembly or group of assemblies within a project. No splices of any type are allowed within an assembly. Each assembly is to be 100% tested and those test results placed on a test tag for each mated pair of connectors. Connectors will then be attached to one end of each pair within the assembly. Each assembly shall be individually packaged within a plastic bag with the submitted manufacturer's part number marked clearly on the outside of said bog. Each installed patch cord shall be labeled as directed by the Engineer. The fiber count for each drop cable shall be as indicated in the project drawings. The contractor shall be responsible for establishing the length of all drop cables to adjust for field conditions not indicated by the drawings. Additional costs associated with the Contractor's failure to establish the length of any and all drop cables in the field will be at the Contractor's expense. 1300.07 FIBER OPTIC CABLE CODING AND LABELING 1300.07.1 Color Coding of Buffer Tubes Color coding of buffer tubes shall be in accordance with EIA—TIA-598, "Coding of Fiber Optic Cable". 1300.07.2 Fiber Optic Cable Jacket Marking All fiber optic cable shall be sequentially marked at 3 feet intervals. Length marks will not run through zero on any length of cable. The length markings shall be in units of "feet". The maximum variance between the actual cable length and marked cable length shall be ±1%. Cable markings shall be indent printed with white characters on the outer jackets. The characters shall be approximately 3 mm in height and spaced to produce good legibility. If re —marking is required during manufacturing, the existing markings must be completely removed. The cable may then be re —marked with yellow characters. Only one re —marking per cable permitted in accordance with GR.-20—CORE (Bellcore). All loose tube OSP fiber optic cable, each length of cable shall be marked with the following legend: (1) Manufacturer Name. (2) "_OPTICAL CABLE_". (3) Year of Manufacture. (4) "_CITY OF PEARLAND_". (5) Number of Fibers. (6) "F_Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable — CALL 281-997-5990". Each length of drop cable shall be marked with the following legend: (1) Manufacturer Name. (2) "_OPTICAL CABLE_". (3) Year of Manufacture. (4) "_CITY OF PEARLAND_". (5) Number of Fibers (6) "F/8.3 SM Drop Cable — CALL 281-997-5990". 1300.07 FIBER OPTIC CABLE CODING AND LABELING — CONTINUED 1300.07.3 Submittals Submittal documentation for fiber optic cable proposed for this project shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer no later than two (2) weeks following the award of the contract. It is understood by the Contractor that no cable shall be purchased for use on this project prior to receiving written opproval of submittals for fiber optic cable by the Engineer Submittal documentation shall consist of catalog sheets, engineering drawings, and maintenance procedures for all fiber optic cables to be used on this project. As o minimum, fiber optic cable submittals shall include the following information: (1) Current Catalog Cut Sheet (2) Manufacture's Production Cable Cross Section Drowing/s (3) Manufacture's confirmation letter listing the Optical Fiber Cable(s) (4) Current RUS "Listing Letter" for said Coble Manufacturer (5) Letter of certification warranting compliance with GR-20—CORE TL 9000. (6) Cable manufacturer's installation procedures and technical support information associated with the cable proposed for use. 1300.08 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING OF FIBER OPTIC CABLE The cable shall be packaged, wound on spools or reels. Each package shall contain only one continuous length of cable. The packaging shall be constructed so as to prevent damage to the cable during shipping and handling. When the cable length creates a reel weight exceeding 800 lbs. the manufacturer shall be required to supply the cable on a large wooden reel, the reel shall be lagged with wooden staves. The cable shall be covered with a thermal wrap. The outer end of the cable shall be securely fastened to the reel head so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit. The inner end of the cable shall project a minimum of ten feet into a slot in the side of the reel or into a housing on the inner slot of the drum, in such a manner to make it available for testing. An arbor hole of 1 1/2 inch minimum is required. Finally, end seals shall be opplied to each end of the cable to prevent moisture from entering the cable. Reels shall be permanently morked with an identification number that con be used by the manufacturer to trace the manufacturing history of the cable and- the fiber. Each reel shall be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it should be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. All optical fibers within each cable shall be factory tested by the manufacturer for continuity and to establish the attenuation of each fiber prior to shipping to the Contractor. Testing shall be conducted and the results documented in accordance with GR-20—CORE (Bellcore) Issue 10. This testing shall be conducted immediately prior' to shipping while the fiber is on the reel and the results shall be provided with each cable reel and affixed within the reel wrapping. An additional copy of the test documentation shall be provided to the Engineer under separate cover. As a minimum, the results provided in these reports shall indicate attenuation for each fiber in the cable in units of dB/km at both 1310 nm and at 1550 nm. 1300.9 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURES (UNDERGROUND & AERIAL) 1300.9.1 Splice Closure (Underground and Aerial) USE LOCATION: Underground vault, Comm. Box, manhole, aeriol mounted on messenger, hub building, interior building entrance or vertical/horizontal cable installation. These closures ore utilized in aerial application with the proper mounting hardware. Splice Closures shall be totally re —enterable without damage to drop cables or their jackets. All splice closures shall meet these design requirements for use under the most severe conditions of moisture, vibration, impact, cable stress & flex temperature extremes as demonstrated by successfully passing, and if requested by the Engineer, supplying the factory test procedures and their results of the minimum specifications listed below. These test procedures shall be construed as the minimum requirements for any under grade/aerial splice closure. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. �tE FyTr.1 .-1'TSI�•� S*°. .j •$ i KARL F. ROTHERMEL j y 3% 116355 'Q' o�• As•.!/CENS- G\���C, S/ NAL E�i� MC40 7 3/4/2021 dl' CobbEendley TBP.Fmniteq.abenN,P0467 1920 CGauntly Place Parkway. Suite 310 Peerlana, Texas 7758a 281.993A9521tax 281.993.8086 www.mbhlendley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Owner _ JE Chkd Ey. KR Scale: HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A SHEET 46 OF 58 1300.9 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURES (UNDERGROUND & AERIAL) — CONTINUED 1300.9.1 Splice Closure (Underground and Aerial) — Continued All splice closures shall allow for cable entry or re—entry in butt configuration, using mid —span cable breakout and splicing methods. Only one (1) cable per entry port. Cable addition kits must be used when all existing ports in butt configuration are in use. No inline cable entry into splice closure is allowed. Closure equal to Superior Modular Products Fiberguard Closure, Part Number FG6-1S, or AFL Telecommunications Port Number LG-350 Sealed Dome as capacity denotes. 1300.9.2 Testing Requirements for Splice Closures TEST PROCEDURE RESULTS Enviromental Requirements Mechanical Requirements Electrical Requirements UV Resistance ASTM-G26 For 740 hours No loss in material strength. Fungus Resistance ASTM-G21 Zero rating. Water Immersion 20 foot depth for 7 days No water intrusion. Freeze/Thaw Ten 28 hour Freeze/thaw Cycles/from 104' F (40' C) to 19R' F (76. C) No loss in material strength. Salt Fog 30 days No damage to metallic parts. Acidified Saltwater 90 days Ina salt/sulfuric acid bath (sulfuric acid, 0.2N sodium hydroxide) No damage to metallic parts. Chemical Immersion 24 hours at 100'F In Kerosene No loss in material strength (Closure Body Material) Gasket Material Sulfuric acid, 0.2N sodium hydroxide, gasoline; wasp spray Weight change less than 10% Compression Set 100'C For 22 hours <22% Impact 100 Ftlb at 104'F(40'C) and O'F(18'C) No mechanical damage. Torsion 10 twists of 104'F(40'C)ond O'F(18'C) No mechanical damage or loss of seal. Bending 25 bends at 104'F(40'C)and 0 'F (18'C) No mechanical damage or loss of seal. - --- Drop Drop From 30 inches of 104°F (40.C) and 0'F (18'C) No mechanical damage. Compression 300 Ibf For 15 n.n. of 104•f (40') and 0'F (78'C) No mechanical damage. Coble Pullout 100 Ibf for 30 min. No cable movement. Surge Current Se 300 naps/]0 secs. No damage tobonding hardware. Bond Clomp Retention n 20 Ibf for 1 min. No bond clomp m ent. movement. 1300.10 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS 1300.10.1 Technical Requirements Fiber Optic Connectors shall be pre —terminated ST compatible for single mode applications. All connectors shall be ruggedized. No plastic connectors are allowed. 1300.10.2 Performance Requirements Fiber Optic Connectors shall not exceed the maximum loss listed below Connector Type Installation Max. Loss ST,. Single Mode Field 0.30dB ST,. Single Mode Factory 0.25dB for each connector type. 1300.10.3 Submittals for Fiber Optic Connectors Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets for fiber optic connectors to be used on this project, if said product is other than that specified in Section 1300.10. 1300.11 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE TRAYS 1300.11.1 General Requirements for Splice Trays Splice trays shall be able to accept single mode fibers and shall meet the following requirements: (1) Completely re—enteroble; (2) Accommodate up to eight buffer tubes, expandable to 24 buffer tubes; (3) Hold up to 48 splices expandable to 288 splices; (4) 900um for 250 um fibers; (5) buffer tubes hold in place with channel snaps; (6) stackable tray design; 1300.12 FIBER OPTIC DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 1300.12.1 General Requirements The following distribution equipment specifications cover installations of both primary fiber distribution units (PFDU) and secondary fiber distribution units (SFDU) which ore utilized within the individual traffic cabinets and communications closets within buildings. 1300.12.2 Primary Fiber Distribution Units This hardware is utilized within the primary satellite building system and the primary network. This point in .the system directly to the network electronics via a jumper cord/patch in support of the hub distribution allows the distribution of signals cord cable management system. The PFDU is characterized by a modular, medium density construction. The termination method for PFDU shall be pre —factory connection pigtail of all inbound coble and patch cord connectivity to all outbound cables and network electronics. The PFDU shall be mountable within a 19 inch rack or bay and have a typical dimension of 8 inch high, by 19 inch wide by 18 inch deep. The PFDU hardware shall be easily adaptable for bay routing of patch cords and cable. The hardware design shall allow for the side —by —side termination of all fibers without violating minimum bend radius requirements. Each PFDU LC connector capacity shall be 144. All adapters used within the Network shall be compatible with single mode LC connectors. No plostic adapters shall be allowed. All PFDU's shall be AFL FDP or approved equal. Poli—Mod AFL pigtail module AFL MFe01106 shall be used in cabinet. 1300.13.3 Secondary Fiber Distribution Units Typically, the final distribution point within the network and located in the ITS Controller Cabinet. These will be modular junction panels capable of being mounted on top of the pre —installed power strips in the cabinet. The SFDU will be a modular design, 1 unit tall, 19" rock mountable. The SFDU will have twelve pre —installed ST bulkheads. The SFDU will be capable of being mounted on top of the pre —installed power strips in the ITS cabinet. The Fiber Optic Adopters shall be Ruggedized Commercial ST Adapter. No plastic adapters shall not be allowed. The SFDU shall be the Superior Modular Products RTR-12B or Approved equal. 1300.12.4 Equipment Rocks and Bays At the "head end" and hubs all distribution hardware, Network electronics, video equipment, VDS processors, and all controllers and miscellaneous electronics shall be mounted within an 7 feet high by 24 inch wide and 42" deep bay or cabinet for 19 inch wide mounting rack(s). Each installed and populated individual rock segment shall be identified as a "bay". The primary structure material of each rock shall be factory painted steel. Each rack shall be field attachable to one another in a modular configuration. The frames themselves shall be equipped with components that will allow for the field management of cables, jumpers and pigtails as may or may not be used in the interconnect system. All these components shall be manufactured in such a way as to meet all fiber bend radius requirements. Above and below each rock shall be an enclosed fiber management system allowing for proper field cross connect management. All rock ends shall be sealed with "end caps" thus protecting any patch cords, cable, or pig tails which may be routed at that location. Between each rack shall be mounted jumper management rings or loops that allow for the efficient management, routing, and protection of all cable patch cords/jumpers, or pig toils used within the rack system to interconnect the Network electronics. Additionally, management troughs shall be mounted at the top and bottom of each rack and then made continuous as bays ore attached. 1300.12.5 Submittals for Fiber Distribution Equipment Submittals of catalog sheets, engineering drawings and specifications for all hardware items to be used on a project shall be provided to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of work. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE D8N. CHK. sSP• -•9s• i, — • �I . i*/\ * y 3 KARL F. ROTHERMEL s 76:3)% 116355 Vir #itioS .•/CENS_EQG\ Ar" 3i NAL E4 4&dLO /4/2021 CobbFendley 1aISPE a1e anon a,g�,,,w, No. 274 1920 Country Plao Parkway,lSuite 310 PeaAane. Texas T2584 281.993.495211.281.993.8086 vww.00bbfendley.eom City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES SHEET 47 OF 58 Project No.: 09008 Dale: MARCH 2021 Dwn By. JE Chka By. KR Sw1e: HORz: N/A VERT: N/A 1300.13 FIBER OPTIC ORGANIZERS 1300.13.1 General Requirements The fiber organizer is utilized to store splice trays in such a way as to protect and support cables splices within a environmental protected area, an outside plant entrance point within basement communication box, etc.. The organizer shall be able to store splices in all configurations for up to four cables. The organizer shall accept a minimum of four splice trays, and shall offer bonding and grounding hardware as required from project to project. The organizer shall utilize one piece cable strapping system to provide for easy storage. 1300.13.2 Submittals and Fiber Organizers Submittal documentation shall include manufacture cut sheets for all fiber optic organizers to be used on this project 1300.14 ZINC COATED STEEL STRAND WIRE 1300.14.1 Minimum Requirements Messenger wire shall consist of a 7—wire stranded cable manufactured and provided with a Closs A zinc coating in accordance with ASTM—A475. All messenger wire shall be manufactured from Extra High Strength Steel with a minimum 5/16 inch diameter. All cable attachment hardware and materials shall be new, and shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Plan Set. Cable attachment hardware and materials shall not be paid for, but shall be considered incidental to the installation of the zinc coated steel strand wire. This hardware shall include all pole attachment hardware, cable ties and straps, lashing, extension orms, and pole extensions necessary to provide a support system, complete and in place, that will accommodate the aerial installation of the fiber optic cable plant as shown in the project drawings. 1300.14.2 Submittals for Zinc Coated Steel Strand Wire Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets for the items listed below. (1) Zinc Coated Steel Strand Wire (2) All applicable attachment hardware requested for approval as on "approved equal" to items listed in the project details. 1300.15 STEEL GALVANIZED CONDUIT 1300.15.1 General Requirements for Conduit All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner to meet the highest industry standards in accordance with the requirements of the latest editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the National Electrical Safety Code. Only factory bent, large radius elbows with a centerline radius of 24 inches shall be allowed for installation on this project. 1300.15.2 Technical Requirements All metallic conduits shall be galvanized rigid steel, thick wall conduits. All galvanized rigid conduit shall conform to UL specification No. 6 and ANSI C80.1-1977. All metal accessories and fittings used with the conduit shall be compatible and shall meet the galvanization requirements of the TxDOT Standard Specifications. 1300.15.3 Submittals for Steel Galvanized Conduit Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets for the items listed below. (1) Steel galvanized conduit proposed for use. (2) Steel galvanized factory bent, Large radius elbow fittings proposed for use. (3) All applicable fittings necessary to install an underground conduit system and/or risers, as well as any necessary riser attachment hardware, necessary to provide a route for fiber optic cable, complete and in place. 1300.16 INNERDUCT 1300.16.1 General Requirements for Innerduct Innerduct shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene (HDPE) for outside plant applications. Innerduct shall be factory treated with an atomized silicone (pre —lubricated) coating or manufactured in a manner to reduce friction during pulling of fiber optic cable. 1300.16 INNERDUCT — CONTINUED 1300.16.1 General Requirements for Innerduct — Continued All innerduct's in which cable is not installed shall hove a pull tape installed, and shall be sealed with a plug fitting to be supplied by the manufacturer. The pull tape shall meet specifications set forth in 1300.17. The cost of the pull tape installed in innerduct's and/or galvanized steel conduit shall be subsidiary to the cost of the innerduct and/or galvanized steel conduit, respectively. If two innerduct's are installed in a single conduit, the second innerduct shall be blue in color. 1300.16.2 Technical Requirements for Innerduct Innerduct shall be Carlon AW4X1A—XXX or approved equal. Innerduct used in bends and sweeps shall hove a minimum burn through time of 90 minutes when tested in accordance with Bellcore Technical Reference TR—NWT-000356, Issue 2, October 1992. 1300.16.3 Submittals for Innerduct Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets for the innerduct proposed for use on this project, if other than that specifically identified in Section 1300.16. 1300.17 PULL TAPE 1300.17.1 General Requirements for Pull Tape Pull tapes shall meet the minimum materials requirements set forth in Section 1300.17.2. No pull ropes, twine, or pull strings shall be used on this project for the purpose of installation. further, these items shall not be substituted for pull tape where the contractor is required by the plans and specifications to provide a pull tape for future use by the owner. 1300.17.2 Technical Requirements All pull tape used on this project shall be Carlon TL145XX or approved equal. The tape shall be prefabricated woven polyester tape made from low friction, high abrasion resistant yarns providing a low coefficient of friction. Pull tapes shall be printed with sequential footage markings for accurate measurement. 1300.17.3 Submittals for Pull Tape Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets for pull tope to be used on this project, if said product is other than that specified in Section 1300.17. 1300.18 COMMUNICATION GROUND BOXES 1300.18.1 General Requirements Type I, II and III Communication Ground Box to be installed in the right—of—way for the purpose of fiber optic cable storage and/or storage of splicing closures. All Communication Ground Boxes for this project shall reference TxDOT Standard Specifications and Harris County Standard Detail for "Communication Ground Boxes". Each Communication Ground Box shall have a boll marker place inside ground box. The ball marker shall be a purple general purpose ball marker, EMS 4" and shall be incidental to the Communication Ground Box. Communication Ground Boxes that have an splice enclosure, the contractor shall label the span number, enclosure number, and with a DYMO model number M1011 using emboss aluminum or stainless steel tape. The fiber optic cable entering into the communication ground box shall hove a orange plastic wrap around installed fiber optic cable. The plastic wrap shall be labeled "City of Pearland Fiber Optic Cable — Call 281-997-5990". The plastic wrap shall be incidental to the Communication Ground Box. 1300.18.2 Submittals for Communication Ground Box Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets for the items listed below. (1) Communication Ground Boxes proposed for use, if other than those identified on applicable Harris County Standard Detail Sheets. (2) Attachment hardware to be utilized inside Communication Ground Box for the purpose of storing splice closures and/or fiber optic cable. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN: CHK. tEv►Wnq OF �� • i KARL F.ROTHERMEL �'. 116355 � ti% Fj..S3• i CN:G4 wawo 3/4/2021 'CobbFenTELT Firm RepSbal en dley TSP. nrm 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland, Texas 77584 281.993.49521 fax 281.933.8086 w w.cobbfendley.eom City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 Dwn By. JE Chkd By. KR Seale HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A SHEET 48 OF 58 1300.19 UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE 1300.19.1 General Requirements Underground marking tape shall be used in all areas where trenching is utilized to install underground conduit and/or innerduct facilities. 1300.19.2 Technical Requirements The technical specifications of underground marking tape are identified below, along with applicable testing methods necessary to establish that a cable submitted for approval meets these specifications. PROPERTY TEST SPECIFICATION THRESHOLD REQUIREMENTS Standard Weight ASTM-D2103 20 lbs/100 Feet Thickness - overall ASTM-D210 4 rli1 3 in. Tensile Break - MD ASTM-D882 35 lbs/ft 3 in. Tensile Strength - MD ASTM-D882 4 kpsi 3 in. Tensile Break - TD ASTM-D882 38 lbs/ft 3 in. Tensile Strength - TD ASTM-882 5 kpsi Elongation - MD -MD ASTM-882 530% Elongation - TD-TD ASTM-882 660% Tear Strength ASTM-D2261 1.5 lbs/ft 1300.19.3 Labeling Requirements for Underground Marking Tope Underground marking tape shall be a 3—inch wide, tear resistant, corrosion resistant elastic PVC orange tape, imprinted with the legend "CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER OPTIC CABLE — CALL 281-997-5990". This legend shall be printed every 3 feet in block letters. 1300.19.4 Submittals for Underground Marking Tape Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets and all applicable documentation necessary to establish that the specifications identified in Section 1300.19 are met for the underground marking tape to be used on this project. 1300.20 UNDERGROUND FIBER OPTIC CABLE MARKING POSTS 1300.20.1 General Requirements Underground fiber optic cable marking posts shall be used in all areas where fiber optic cable is installed in underground conduit and/or innerduct facilities. Underground fiber optic cable marking post shall be installed at every communication ground box and center distance location between two communication ground boxes. 1300.20.2 Technical Requirements All underground cable marking stokes used Fiber Optic Line Marker or approved equal. on this project shall be APC International Poly —Dome 1300.20.3 Submittals for Underground Cable Marking Posts Submittal documentation shall include manufacturer cut sheets for underground marking stokes to be used on this project, if said product is other than that specified in Section 1300.20. 1300.21 FIBER OPTIC CABLE MANUFACTURE TESTING 1300.21.1 General Requirements When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components," the change in attenuation at extreme operational temperatures (_40C and +70C) shall not exceed 0.15 dB/km at 1550 nm for single —mode fiber and 0.3 dB/km at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. When tested in accordance with FOTP-82, "Fluid Penetration Test for Fluid_Blocked Fiber Optic Cable," a one meter length of unaged cable shall withstand a one meter static head or equivalent continuous pressure of water for one hour without leakage through the open cable end. When tested in accordance with FOTP-81, "Compound Flow (Drip) Test for Filled Fiber Optic Cable," the cable shall exhibit no flow (drip or leak) of filling and/or flooding material at 70C. 1300.21 FIBER OPTIC CABLE MANUFACTURE TESTING — CONTINUED 1300.21.1 General Requirements — Continued When tested in accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables," the cable shall withstand o minimum compressive load of 220 N/cm (125 Ibf/in) applied uniformly over the length of the sample. The 220 N/cm (125 Ibf/in) load shall be applied at a rote of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) per minute. The load shall be maintained for a period of 1 minute. The load shall then be decreased to 110 N/cm (63 Ibf/in). Alternatively, it is acceptable to remove the 220 N/cm (125 Ibf/in) Load entirely and apply the 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in) load within five minutes at o rate of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) per minute. The 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in) load shall be maintained for a period of 10 minutes. Attenuation measurements shall be performed before release of the 110 N/cm (63 Ibf/in) load. The change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm for single —mode fibers and 0.30 dB at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. When tested in accordance with FOTP-104, "Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test," the cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing cycles around a sheave diameter not greater than 20 times the cable diameter. The change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm for single —mode fiber and 0.30 dB at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. When tested in accordance with FOTP-25, "Repeated Impact Testing of Fiber Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies," except that the number of cycles shall be two at three locations along a one meter cable Length and the impact energy shall be atleost 4.4 Nm (in accordance with ICEA S-87-640)", the change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.15 dB of 1550 nm for single —mode fiber and 0.30 dB at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. When tested in accordance with FOTP-33, "Fiber Optic Cable Tensile Loading and Bending Test," using a maximum mandrel and sheave diameter of 560 mm, the cable shall withstand a rated tensile load of 2670N (601 Ibf) and residual load of 30% of the rated installation load. The axial fiber strain shall be 60% of the fiber proof level after completion of 60 minute conditioning and while the cable is under the rated installation load. The axial fiber strain shall be 20% of the fiber proof level after completion of 10 minute conditioning and while the cable is under the residual load. The change in attenuation at residual load and after load removal shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm for single mode fiber and 0.30 dB at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. When tested in accordance with FOTP-85, "Fiber Optic Cable Twist Test," a length of cable no greater than 2 meters shall withstand 10 cycles of mechanical twisting. The chonge in attenuation shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm for single_mode fiber and 0.30 dB at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. When tested in accordance with FOTP-181, "Lightning Damage Susceptibility Test for Optic Cables with Metallic Components," the cable shall withstand a simulated lightning strike with a peak value of the current pulse equal to 80 kA without loss of fiber continuity. For cables with 2.5mm OD buffer tubes, the peak value shall be 55 kA damped oscillatory test current shall be used with o maximum time —to —peak value of 15 s (which corresponds to o minimum frequency of 16.7 kHz) and o maximum frequency of 30 kHz. The time to half —value of the waveform envelope shall be from 40 to 70 s. When tested in accordance with FOTP-37, "Low or High Temperature Bend Test for Fiber Optic Coble," the cable shall withstand four full turns around a mandrel of 20 times the cable diameter after conditioning for four hours of test temperatures of —30C and +60C. Neither the inner or outer surfaces of the jacket shall exhibit visible cracks, splits, tears, or other openings. The change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.30 dB at 1550 nm for single mode fiber and 0.50 dB at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE OWN. CHK. arm cE .9F..%F-rw4 *. /\ • * KARL F.ROTHERMEL S . 116355 �r 3/4/2021 I'CobbFendley 1920 Counay Place Perkwey, Suite 310 Peanana. Texas 77504 281.993A9521 fax 281.993.8086 www.wbbfendley.mm City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 awn By. JE Chkd By KR SHEET 49 OF 58 Scale: HORZ: N/A vERT: N/A 1300.22 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING 1300.22.1 General Requirements The Contractor shall be responsible to complete the following fiber optic test: 1.) Pre —Installation Test — before installation of any fiber optic cable 2.) Post —Installation Test 3.) Power Meter Test 4.) Completing all terminations, a Bi—Directional Test Contractor shall supply all necessary items, which will include but not limited to, transportation, tools, labor, consumables supplies and supervision to perform splicing and testing services. 1300.22.1 Enclosure Preparation The contractor shall prepare the ends by removing 3 meters of cable of each end, tails ore to be matched and taped bock, build the closures & splice trays. The armor shall bond the cables and connect to the grounding system, install any closure external ground lugs and silicon seal. In the enclosure the North or East cables shall be routed clockwise around the organizer trays and the South and West, routed counter —clockwise. A minimum of two wraps of buffer tube shall be left from the cable sheath to the splice tray and a minimum of three wraps of bare fiber shall be place in the organizer tray. The enclosure shall be sealed in accordance to manufacture specifications and place the closure and slack back in the handhole per company specifications. The closure shall be first tested for pressurization to 10psi than depressurized before storing. All splices shall be butt spliced with directional markings on the cable. The cable shall be marked with a DYMO model number M1011 label (aluminum or stainless steel) placed on the either the North or East cable and blue tape placed on the South or West cable. As apart of the final documentation process the contractor shall note the sheath length markings to be used to verify actual cable length. 1300.22.2 Testing Equipment The City expects that all equipment in use by the contractor is in good working condition and that all manufactures recommended maintenance be adhered to. Certificates of calibration may be required on a regular basis to include fusion splicers, OTDRs and power meters and may ask for verification that cleaving wheels and electrodes hove been replaced at the appropriate intervals. The City has standardized on the use of GN Nettest format OTDR traces, recommending the use of GN Nettest CMA4000. If another OTDR is used the trace files supplied as apart of the final test must comply with Bell core GR-196 file format. All test equipment shall have a dynamic range of at least 35db. All fibers splices will be fusioned spliced with an industry —accepted machine with the necessary programming to splice NZ—DSF (non —zero dispersion —shifted fiber). Mechanical splices will not be used. The majority of fibers will be mass fused and shall have a mechanical protection sleeved placed over them. 1300.22.3 Entrance Coble and Termination Building entrance cable shall be bonded within 10 feet on entry at the first available location. The cable shall be tied to earth ground with a #6 AWG stranded copper wire. Cable bonds are not to be connected to equipment racks or frames. The cable sheath, armor and strength member shall be isolated from Fiber Entrance Cabinet (FEC) and frame ground. The fiber shall terminate to the FEC with LC —PC connectorized pigtails. The FEC shall pre loaded and rack mount ready for termination of the outside fiber plant. The controctor shall properly dress both the pigtails and outside fiber plant in accordance to manufacture recommendation. Unless provided a splicing diagram the contractor shall provide an as —built report —noting fiber number to jumper/port. Each tray will be labeled with the customer, the fiber numbers, destination and direction: "City of Pearland — Fibers 1-96 to Bryon Court". 1300.22 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING — CONTINUED 1300.22.4 Fiber Optic Cable Splicing The City shall supply the contractor with construction drawings and splice configuration diagrams before commencing on any splicing. If there is any discrepancies with the documentation provided it is the contractors' responsibility to bring it the immediate attention of the City. Any and all revisions either in the splicing diagrams or construction drawings must be redlined as apart of the documentation process and delivered to the City with the final documentation described in section below. If there are any damages to the cable found upon arrival to the site it is to the interest of the contractors to document and take pictures of the incident and contact a company representative before commencing any work. Splicing must be conducted with the procedures outlined by the manufacture of the of the splicing equipment. The company requires that the contractor perform an arc —test, at least once a day at the start of the day. The fusion splicer should be set on the `DS" setting when splicing Dispersion —shifted fiber such as LEAF or True Wave. The contractor should confirm prior to splicing what the composition of the fiber is and which fibers are Dispersion —Shifted versus Single Mode. The City strongly encourages construction —mode testing in which active OTDR testing is conducted uni—directional as a span is spliced. This method will significantly reduce the extensive re —work that may be necessary once the bi—directional testing is conducted. The v—groove alignment system on the fusion splicer should not be used to qualify a splice. However in the absence of an OTDR at one end of the fiber span actively monitoring the splicers production core alignment can be used as long as any one of the splices in the ribbon estimates not to exceed a 0.10 db loss. Anything greater than 0.10db should be redone. In any case whether an active OTDR or core alignment is used during the initial splicing each fiber shall be tested in a uni—direction prior to closing and storing the splice. The pigtail will be included in this stage with a 1km launch reel and tested at 1550 nm wavelength. See Table D.1. "Uni—Directional splice loss Acceptance Criteria" for acceptable uni—directional splice loss. If after three attempts the Contractor is unable to produce a loss of less thon Company requirements the fiber will be marked as out of scope on the field report. Failure to properly document any fibers, which fall out of scope on the appropriate field report, will not be accepted and the Contractor will be required to remake the splice again. Table D.1. : Uni—Directional splice loss Acceptance Criteria Fiber Type Fiber Type Splice Loss Standard Single Mode Single fiber —Splicing 0.20 db Standard Single Mode Mass fiber —Splicing 0.30 db Non —zero Dispersion —Shifted Single fiber —Splicing 0.40 db Non —zero Dispersion —Shifted Mass fiber —Splicing 0.50 db Note that achieving these criteria in no way implies that the City will accept these fiber splice losses. Only bi—directional splice loss can be accepted. This does not conclude the required testing by the Contractor additional testing shall be explained in sections below. It should be noted that the uni—directional losses ore to be ottempted for pigtail fiber connections. However due to the probable problem of field diameter mismatch which is difficult when trying to motch NZF fibers and single mode there will be cases that only a bi—directional splice averaged will be possible. 1300.22.5 Fiber Optic Acceptance Testing Once a span is completed, including all splicing and terminations acceptance testing shall commence. The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting each required test meeting or surpassing minimum City requirements. In addition the Contractor will be responsible for properly documenting all test results using the prescribed matter discussed in following sections. Failure to comply with testing standards or submit documentation within a timely manner may cause default of contractual agreements and cause the Company to have the network in question retested by in—house personnel or third party. Those cost shall be deducted from the Contractors pending invoices and/or retainage held. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. J �P' 9�y+ t• /\ �1 KARL F.ROTHERMEL i•9', 116355 acts 4'cls4.9EN19..• 4 r. I�, 3/4/2021 CobbFendley Tave.TIVLS �8 ' a.;x 74 1920 Country Pleoe Parkway, Suite 310 Peaana. Texas 17584 281.993.4952 !fax 291.993.8088 vM4x.cobbfen0ley.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No:: 09008 Dale: MARCH 2021 Dwn By. JE Chka By. KR Scale: HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A SHEET 50 OF 58 1300.22 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING — CONTINUED 1300.22.5 Fiber Optic Acceptance 'Testing — Continued Continuity Continuity testing shall conducted to assure connectively is complete from TP—to—TP (Termination Panel) and no fibers hove been frogged or crossed at any splice point. As the Contractor proceeds on Bi—Directional testing each fiber shall be confirmed os spliced through correctly as described in splicing diagrams provided by the City. This test must be completed and transposition resolved prior to completing the final testing. Bi—Directional OTDR Testing OTDR traces must be shot from both ends of the span. The testing shall be conducted using the same procedures outlined in Uni—Directional testing using a 1 km launch fiber at both ends of the span. This test shall include connector to connector at the fiber distribution panel. The traces and overall power loss calculations shall include all of the outside network, pigtail connections and the connector termination of the network. Both OTDR's' on either end of the span must be shot with the same settings, pulse width, range, resolution, averaging. The correct index of refraction for the glass being tested must be used or the traces will not be accepted. All traces for long haul network applications shall be shot at 2: 00 minute averaging. Nothing less shall be accepted unless otherwise specified by equipment manufacture and less time for averaging is stated as sufficient and the Company agrees to such concession. The Contractor is responsible for analyzing the results in order to generate a list that details the Bi—Directional splice loss for each fiber taking the overage of the splice loss in each direction. Contractor shall strictly adhere to the splicing standards listed in Table E.2.1 ?Bi—Directional Splice Loss Acceptance?. Due to the nature of long haul networks splice loss is critical and each splice will be carefully evaluated. Table 2.1: Bi—Directionol Splice Loss Acceptance 1550nm Fiber Type Fiber Type Splice Loss Standard Single Mode Single fiber —Splicing 0.10 db Standard Single Mode Moss fiber —Splicing 0.20 db Non —zero Dispersion —Shifted Single fiber —Splicing 0.15 db Non —zero Dispersion —Shifted Mass fiber —Splicing 0.30 db Table 2.2: Connector Criteria Parameter Criteria Connector Insertion Loss 0.5 db Reflectance —50 db Table 2.3: Bi—Directional Splice Report Sample Spon XXX to XXX Location # Distance 1 2.0 km 2 4.0 km 3 6.0 km 4 8.0 km 5 10.0 km Fiber #001 Fiber #002 Fiber #003 Fiber #288 The contractor will submit hard copy splicing and testing documentation no later than 5 days after completion of splicing. Until the documentation hos been received and accepted can the contractor invoice for splicing work performed. 1300.22 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING — CONTINUED 1300.22.5 Fiber Optic Acceptance Testing — Continued Trace file Naming Convention Traces must be saved in the following format: AAAbbbN.##f## AAA = FROM SITE Three letter abbreviation of the site the fiber trace is token from bbb = TO SITE Three letter abbreviation of the site the fiber trace is facing or going to N = WAVELENGTH (3,5 or 6) 3=1310 nm, 5=1550 nm, 6=1625 nm ### = FIBER NUMBER Utilize all three digits 001 through 999 OTDR traces are to be provided on either a zip drive or on a CR—ROM. Each span (Regen to Regen) shall be separated by a directory and subdivided by wavelength. 1 DAL.tul Prolnet Nam • DAL.tul 1660nm 1825nm 0t8•r F11a• tul.DAL 1660nm 1826nm 1300.22.6 Fiber Optic Clean—up and Attempts After the Contractor has identified which splices exceed the City's maximum loss criteria they shall begin breaking and re —burning the specific fibers in question. As a fiber or ribbon is re —spliced in the field an active OTDR should trace the results immediately to determine the results before the enclosure is closed. In the case of a ribbon cable the entire ribbon must be re —spliced and new traces shot for all of the fibers in the ribbon. A number of attempts must be necessary in order to reduce the splice loss. The table below indicates the requirement for each re —splice attempt. Re —Splice Acceptance Table Fiber Type Standard Single Mode Non —Zero Dispersion Shifted Splicing Method Single Fiber Moss Fusion Single Fiber Mass Fusion Acceptance Criteria 0.10 db 0.20 db . 0.15 db 0.30 db After 3 attempts 0.20 db 0.30 db 0.30 db 0.40 db Every fiber that hos to be re —spliced, each attempt must be recorded on the Form F.2: "Re —Splice Attempt Form". For any fiber that cannot be brought to compliance with in the minimum required three attempts the Contractor shall document the specific fiber as OOS, out of scope. The City may decide to further investigate each out of scope fiber if the overall span is out of loss budget compliance. Splicing Dispersion shifted fibers can be difficult when ottempting to match with standard single mode fibers. Where persistent problems exist and fibers are found out of scope the overall loss of the span will be taken in consideration. This is explained in the power testing section of this document. MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CSIK. f -kc:. a- .Teg%i J• .•' s tom• / \ : •,,yG KARL F. ROTHERMEL i 0ry'• 116355 �r %�'•'� p •��r yi�FSS.CIVAIJSF:L ENG� F- tah�-'' p� I�/14° 3/4/2021 41' Co'HIVbbFendley TSP. eirrn Reg*Icaben IOW) 1920 County Place Parkway, Suite 31D Pearland. Texas 77684 281.993A95211a0281.993.8086 w.vw.cobbfendlay.com City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No.: 09008 Date: MARCH 2021 own By: JE Cbka fir. KR Scale: HORZ: N/A VERT: N/A SHEET 51 OF 58 1300.22 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING - CONTINUED 1300.22.6 Fiber Optic Clean-up and Attempts - Continued In case of ribbon splicing an attempt refers to the entire ribbon be re -spliced. While the number of re -burns is limited to three the Company requires the splice loss of the ribbon and fibers at the end of the third re -splice to be no worse than the original status. In that case the Contractor will continue re -splicing until the splice has made the minimal requirements or the splice loss is no greater than the original problem. Form F.2: Re -Splice Attempt Form Location Fiber # Bi-Loss Attempt 1 Bi-Loss Attempt 2 Bi-Loss Attempt 3 Bi-Loss Attempt 4 Bi-Loss Attempt 5 The "Re -Splice Attempt Form" s must be stored along with trace files in the same directories as subscribed for the trace files. After the final attempts are completed the entire span (ribbons) must be re -shot and the new traces substituted for the originals. Note: List all fibers in ribbon starting with first attempt through fifth token at 1550 nm. 1300.22.7 Fiber Optic Power Loss Measurements At this point power testing should be conducted as described and submitted on Form G.1: " Power Loss Averaging Form" along with the trace files and loss calculations. The power loss form shall be delivered to the Company naming the file AAA.bbb.xls for excel format spreod sheet. Where as the abbreviations are; Power Loss Naming Convention AAA = FROM SITE bbb = TO SITE Three letter abbreviation of the site the fiber trace is facing or going to Each file should be provided on disk in like directory format as the trace files and other required data forms and files. Power loss will be recorded using an industrial accepted laser source power meter at 1550 nm wavelength in both directions and bi-averaged. Using the form illustrated below the Contractor shall record the loss and calculate the bi- average. Form G.1: Power Loss Averaging Form Forward Power Loss Return Power Loss Circuit ID Term. Port Laser Source Level 1550 nm Power Level Power Loss Circuit ID Term. Port Loser Source Level 1550 nm Power Level Power Loss 1550 nm Average Loss xxx 1 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 1 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 2 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 2 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 3 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 3 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 4 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 4 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 5 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 5 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 6 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 6 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 7 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 7 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 8 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db xxx 8 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db 0.00 db The Contractor shall verify the power loss of each fiber under test is within a reasonable range. Corning LEAF fiber is rated for 0.25 db/km at 1550 nm. A reasonable loss calculation can be 0.30 db/km of 1550 nm with o connection Toss of .50 db each. Similarly any fiber loss, which seems exceptionally good, must be reviewed for incorrect data or calculations. If what by calculation shall be 5.5 db overall and the test result 2.5 db the erroneous reading must be reviewed and possible re- ran. 1300.22 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING - CONTINUED 1300.22.7 Fiber Optic Power Loss Measurements - Continued Table 2: Sample Pass/Failure Calculation Fiber Number Regen to Regen Colculated Loss Linear Length KM Loss per KM Actual Loss Variance Pass/Fail F 001 XXX.bbb 9 30 0.3 10 90% Pass F 002 XXX.bbb 9 30 0.3 11 82% Fail A general rule is the average loss should be with in +/-10% of engineering calculations. Much greater losses than originally engineered can cause a problem in near or future planning. It will be the contractor's responsibility to find the cause to any problems. 1300.22.8 Fiber Optic Cable Reel Testing The Contractor may be employed to test reels of fiber pre -construction. This test should follow the Uni-Directional testing described in sections previous. The testing should be at 1550 nm and the trace files named as follows: The contractor shall shoot all of the fibers and determine that all fibers are in compliance. Looking for anomalies in loss or broken fibers. Reel Test Naming Convention Reel#.nnn Reel # is the factory shipping data, where as nnn = fiber number 001-999 in the cable. 1300.22.9 Omitted 1300.22.10 Documentation All disk, asbuilt drawings, trace files and other required forms to be submitted no later than five days after the final testing has been completed. The testing results shall be submitted in a 3-ring binder per fiber optic cable with the following tabbed sections. 1.) Title Page 2.) Table of Contents 3.) File Naming Spreadsheet 4.) Fiber Acceptance Report for 1310nm and 1550nm 5.) Bi-Directional Splice Loss Summary Report for 1310nm and 1550nm 6.) Bi-Directional Report for 1310nm and 1550nm 7.) Bi-Directional OTDR Standard trace Report for 1310nm and. 1550nm 8.) Power Meter Loss Average Report for 1310nm and 1550nm MK. DESCRIPTION DATE DWN. CHK. * i KARL F ROTHERMEL $ 116355 4� m� 0 3/4/2021 CobbFendley 1920 Country Place Parkway, Suite 310 Pearland. Texas 77584 281.993.4952I fax 281.993.8088 www.cobbrendley.cam City of Pearland, Texas HUGHES RANCH ROAD - FIBER OPTIC NETWORK CONNECTION PLAN CITY OF PEARLAND FIBER DETAILS AND NOTES Project No.: 09008 Data: MARCH 2021 Own By. JE Chkd By. KR Scale: HORZ: N/A VERr: N/A SHEET 52 OF 58 TRAFFIC BEARING COVER NoTESs 1. SET TOP OF GROuND DOx Ve GEC' FINISHED GRADE. SET THE PLATE TO CONFORM'wITH THE ROADWAY SLOPE AND GRADE. 2. THOROUGHLY GREASE UNDERSIDE OF PLATE, BOLTS AND INSERT THREADS PRIOR TO PLACING ON CONCRETE, PLATE AND HARDWARE MUST ALL BE FIRULY SUPPORTED TO ?EVENT MOVEMENT DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 3. LEGEND "C.T.M.S." WILL BE Six INCH TALL LETTERS OF Vi" BEAD OF WELD METAL. 4. THIS COVER IS TO BE USED IN FREEwAr SHOULDERS OR WHEREVER UNDER HEAVY TRAFFIC. 5. PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR ALL CRDUND BOXES AND APPURTENANCES DuRING CONSTRUCT(ON. 6. PROTECTION FOR THE GROUND BOXES AND APPURTENANCES WILL NOT BE PAID FOR DIRECTLY BUT CONSIDERED INCIDENTAL TO THE ITEM "GROUND MX' OF THE VARIOUS TYPES. N" CHAMFER ALL mon SIDES GRAVEL DRAIN NOMINAL AGGREGATE TYPE 1 OR 2 GROUNO 80x _4#4' THICK GALVANIZED / STEEL PLATE 441" [TyPE 11 Ka. 2 Ili' 56" ITYPE 21 " D A. LIFTING HOLE ITYP 5. PACK WITH "DUCTSEAL" r it c. 0 L--- - -- -- —I t" DIA. ROLE WITH 2" DIA. RECESS 14 DEEP ATYPICAL ALL FOUR CORNERS) 2 Ili' W SLAB INSERT (GUY.) (F53 DAYTON SUPERIOR OR APPROVED EQUAL) W/ Yt" x 4" STANDARD THREAD BOLT AND WASHER TRAFFIC BEARING COVER DETAILS TYPE 1 OR TYPE 2 GROUND BOX' FLAT HEAO STAINLESS STEEL SCREW (TYP.)- '/" WALL THICKNESS TYP. NOTES; ENSURE GROUND BOXES TYPE I & TYPE 2 ARE REIWORCED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTED TO THE APPROXIMATE OIMENSIORS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET. REINFORCING STEEL IS GRADE 60. PROVIDE CLASS -e CONCRETE. ENSURE GROUND BOX: TYPE 1 & TYPE 2 COVERS ARE CHECKERED FLOOR PLATE GALVANIZED STEEL WITH 3° RAISED LETTERS READING C.T.M.S. CENTER ON COVER. SECURE COVERS TO THE GROUND BOX AS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET WITH Y DIA. WIN.) epLTs, AFTER PLACEMENT OF GROUND BOX, BACKFILL THE EXCAVATED AREA AND COMPACT THE FILL TO THE DENSITY OF THE SURROUNDING GROUND AS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. AFTER CONDUIT IS INSTALLED THROUGH KNOCKOUT GROUT REMAINING OPENING OF KNOCKOUT. PROVIDE STEEL COVERS WITH A GROUNDING LUG WITH Vi- 14 NC FEMALE THREADS ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE COVER. USE THE FLEXIBLE METAL BRAID TYPE FOR THE GROUND STRAP. NE sIRAP must' BE NO LESS THAN ONE INCH IN WIDTH AND 6' MIN. IN LENGTH TO ALLOW NE GROUND 80x COVER TO OE REMOVED FROM THE 00X WITHOUT DISCONNECTING THE GROUND STRAP. ENSURE TYPE 3 GROUND BOX AND COVER IS AEATHERTIONT AND WATERPROOF AND CONSTRUCTED OF HOT DIP GALVANIZED FEBALOY WITH NEOPRENE GASKETS CEMENTED TO COVER. ENSURE COVER IS SECURED 13 NE GROUND BOX BY 4 FLAT HEAD SCREWS, INSTALL TYPE 3 GROUND BOXES IN THE HOV LANE WITHIN 1' (1 OF.CTB. CONCRETE APRON WILL NOT BE PAID FOR DIRECTLY BUT CONSIDERED INCIDENTAL TO TIIE ITEM 7GROuN0 oft oF NE VAR[oos 'TYPES. TYPE 3 GROUND BOX MS 10" LONG (TYPE 1 . • OW ie-CON6-frot21 - u-OoLT 6" TYP. \ - OPENING 1 TYP. Y2 SECTION A -A • A g 7 ANION CLASS A. CONCRETE -BOLT HOLD DOATi f ISEE DETAILI • 5.V2' 51/4- 3 1/2' '-GROUND Box WALL LOCKNUT THREADED BUSHING WATERTIGHT DUCT CAP -GROUND BOX r-PVC OR AnIC CONDUIT MALE ADAPTER KNUT w/BUSHING OR BELL END BUSHING iPVC1 THREADED BUSHING IRMCI GASKET TYPICAL CONDUIT CONNECTION TO GROUND BOX HANDLE V:" THICK PLATE(A36) Y4 'II HANDLE DETAIL D3 REINFORCING STEEL APRON CLASS A , CONCRETE * CONCRETE APRON` I 94 " OPENING *4 BAR OTH SIDES NOTE 1 34* ,16 DIA. DOLT X 2' v TACK 4 SIDES 14- is mot .16 DIA.x 216 LONG MALY.; WICK WIGALv. UUT 3/2" X 2Vt" X Ye, 2" LONG GROUND BOX WALL BOLT HOLD DOWN DETAIL GRAVEL DRAIN • I Vi" NOMINAL AGGREGATE Ye" X 10' COPPER CLAD STEEL GROUND ROO "4 (3A: NOTE 1 GRAVEL DRAIN 1/,' NOMINAL AGGREGATE COVER DETAIL /. (3 &ITN.: STIFFENER 11/4 x IA' x " 22 VI' LON GROUND BOX TYPE 1 X 10' COPPER WO STEEL GROUND EE COVER DETAIL NOTE: TYPE 2 1. PROVIDE KNOCKOuT, AS REQUIRED GROUND BOX I 1/4" x '/2 FLAT BAR (TYP) *4 0 12' 14 MIN.: INSTALL APRoN on ALL TIT GROUND BOxES PLACED ON UNPAvED AREAS. 4 40 rig 1 W DIA. HOLE TYP. (2 REQU(RED, SEE BOLT HOLD DOWN DETAIL) 1/4' THICK PLATE 436 (GA V.iTYP. TYP, t" • 0 ANDLE TYP. E DETAIL Vi' X I/2" FLAT BAR (TYPI 111 (TyP.) C3k5 TYP: STIFFENER 1 Ll'/4' X 11/4" x " 10 Vi" LONG TYPE 1 COVER DETAILS 1/4' THICK PLATE 436 (GALV.1 TYP. TWA. 4 4° • KARL F.ROTHERMEL 1 116355 iONACCY',0r 021 X ?LI: N.11A0 ' f 2' -8- C3X5 TYP, RANDEE TYP. (SEE DETAIL) 1 A- DIA. HOLE TYP. (2 REQUIRED. SEE BOLT HOLD DOAN DETAIL) TYPE 2 COVER DETAILS Typ GAOunDING LuG BRAIDED' GRD. STRAP TO GROUND zirl ROD (4') cr) <TYP GRMINDING LUG BRAIDED ORO, STRAP -----1- TO GROUND ROD 181 STIFFENER Ll1/4• 11/4• x 1/4* 22 Vi' LONG CLIP ALL ANGLES 6 CHANNELS FOR GALVANIZING DRAINAGE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AdiE2018 COMPUTERIZED TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAILS ,GROUND BOX) DwG ORAWIG DATE 04 ;AC 061064. STATE PROJECT NO. HIGNwAl NO. DwG 6 TEKAS CKDwG DwG 01< DwG STOE COUNTY CONT SECT JO6 MAZMIA EKE T NO. 53 Terminate Fiber Optic Cable In Fiber Patch Panel (FPP) Fiber Optic Drop Cable(s) Home run From ITS Device (Varies by Project) Slack: Provide 100 Ft. for Backbone Cables/ Distribution Cables and 25 Ft. for Drop Cables Unless Otherwise Shown on The Plans. Rack Cables to Side of Ground Box. J 0 Jnratinn• Fiber Communication Node (Hub or Cabinet) (See Plans for Location) Fiber Optic Backbone Cables (See Plans for Type and Quantity) ITS Ground Box (See Plans for Location and Type) Type 1 (See ITS(37)) Drop Cable(s) Home run From ITS Device (Varies by Project) Fiber Optic Backbone Cable Slack: Provide 100 Ft. for Backbone and Arterial Cables and 25 Ft. for Drop Cables Unless Otherwise Shown on The Plans. Rack Cables to Side of Ground Box. Fiber Optic Distribution or Arterial Cable (See Plans for Size and Quantity) Fiber Optic Distribution or Arterial Cable (See Plans for Size and Quantity) 0 Slack: Provide 25 Ft. for Drop Cables Unless Otherwise Shown on The Plans. Rack Cables to Side of Ground Box. Splice Enclosure Secured to Inside Wall Cable Rack by Set of J-Hooks ITS Ground Box (See Plans for Location and Type) Type 2 (See ITS(39)) Fiber Optic Backbone Cable Terminate Fiber Optic Cable In Fiber Patch Panel (FPP) (See Plans for FPP Size and Details) nratinn• ITS Field Cabinet (See Plans for Location and Type) Fiber Optic Backbone Schematic 0 / oration• ITS Field Cabinet (See Plans for Location and Type) Terminate Fiber Optic Cable In Fiber Patch Panel (FPP) (See Plans for FPP Size and Details) Fiber Optic Drop Cable (See Plans for Size and Quantity) ITS Ground Box (See Plans for Location and Type) Type 1 (See ITS(37)) Fiber Optic Backbone Cable Fiber Optic Drop Cable (See Plans for Size and Quantity) Slack: Provide 100 Ft. for Backbone Cables and 25 Ft. for Drop Cables Unless Otherwise Shown on The Plans. Rack Cables to Side of Ground Box. Terminate Fiber Optic Cable In Fiber Patch Panel (FPP) (See Plans for FPP Size and Details) location. ITS Field Cabinet (See Plans for Location and Type) ITS Ground Box (See Plans for Location and Type) Type 2 (See ITS(39)) Splice Enclosure Secured to Inside Wall Cable Rack by Set of J-Hooks I Fiber Optic Drop Cable (See Plans for Size and Quantity) H- W J 0 Black Letters 13/6, W X 1" H 3/I6" Thick Background Border Background Border Border - Black Background - Orange Reflective Fiber Decal Details Background Border Orange Letters 2r/6'WX "H Black Letters 27/6'W X 5/16' H Black Letters 1 5/8" W X 5/ 6' H Black Letters 2948"W X5/6"H aution Underground Fiber Optic Cable 8 HOURS BEFORE EXCAVATING IN THIS AREA -'CALL TxDOT 1-800-558-9368 AND CALL 1-800-D1G TESS % Background Border Ile" 3 /4 Border - Black Symbol - Black Background - Orange Reflective Underground Utilities Decal Details FC SC ST LC Fiber Optic Connectors Note - Details are diagrammatic and may vary by manufacturer. PVC Fiber Optic Cable Road Marker Underground Utilities Decal Fiber Decal Ground Surface 3" Dia. Min. Notes: 1. Space fiber optic cable road markers at maximum 1000' intervals or at significant changes in direction such as a 90 degree turn. 2. Provide all orange fiber optic cable road markers for non -splice locations. 3. Provide orange fiber optic cable road markers with white dome for splice locations. 4. Locate marker within concrete apron of fiber ground box. Fiber Optic Cable Road Markers General Notes: 1. The fiber optic backbone schematic shown is diagrammatic only and intended to represent the various fiber optic communication architectures seen across the state and may not show all configurations seen. Connection of ITS field equipment to ITS communication nodes or hubs is achieved through home run drop cables or spliced to the backbone in a splice enclosure. Refer to fiber communication schematic details and fiber termination information shown on the plans for further information. 2. Install a flat pull cord in all empty conduits and inner -ducts identified for communication use. The pull cord must have a tensile strength of 1,250 Ibs minimum and have foot markings to determine length installed. Furnish and installation of pull cord will be subsidiary to special specification "ITS Fiber Optic Cable". 3. Color code each type of fiber optic cable to identify the cable as a "backbone" (green or blue), "distribution" (red), or "drop" (orange or yellow). 4. Terminate fibers at fiber patch panel (FPP), also referred to as patch panel, with SC connectors for new installations. When connecting to existing FPP, terminate with FC or ST connectors as shown on the plans. Provide connector adaptors as required to accommodate existing equipment if information is not provided in the plans. 5. Provide a list showing cable number assignments and highway or facility that the cable services. 6. Provide a single 1/C #14 insulated wire in conduit runs which have been identified in the plans to carry fiber optic cable. Provide UL listed solid copper wire with orange color low density polyethylene insulation suitable for conduit installation rated for temperature range -20 C to 60 C and a voltage rating of 600V. This wire will serve as a tracer, or locate, wire for locating underground conduit containing fiber optic cabling and will be paid for under Item 620, "Electrical Conductors." 7. Ensure each cable is marked on the outer jacket with a label detailing the manufacturer's name, the date of manufacturer (month/year), the fiber count (Example: 48F SM or 48 SMF), and sequential length markings at maximum 3 FT increments. Sheet Details Not to Scale Reference Notes: 0 Fiber architecture at communication node. 0 Fiber architecture for splicing arterial distribution cab/es. 0 Fiber architecture for home run of drop cables from ITS field equipment cabinets to communication node. ® Fiber architecture for splicing drop cable from ITS field equipment cabinet. SHEET 1 OF 2 Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard ITS FIBER OPTIC CABLE MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS ITS(42)-16 FILE, ils(42)-16.dgn ©TxDOT FEBRUARY 2016 REVISIONS DN, TxDOT Ico. TxDOT IOW. TxDOT ICK, TxDOT CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. HOU BRAZORIA 54 '07 1 Maintain Minimum Bending Radius (See Note 3) Fiber Optic Backbone Cable(s) (Out) Secure Cable to Rack Using Cable Straps Figure 8 Slack Cable Drain Hole Type 1 (See ITS(37)) Type 2 (See iTS(39)) Fiber Optic Backbone Cable(s) (In) ',io O o c IIIIJIIIIIIII Imo IIII III o/� Drain Hole Type 1 (See ITS(37)) Type 2 (See ITS(39)) Conduit and Fiber Optic Drop Cables From ITS Field Equipment Splice Enclosure Secured to Inside Wall Cable Rack by Set of J-Hooks Cable Storage Top View - Ground Box Walls Folded Down for Clarity Underground Cable Rack (See ITS(37)) (See ITS(39)) — Fiber Optic Backbone Cables Fiber Optic Backbone Cables Fiber Optic Drop Cables ITS Conduit (See Plans for Type, Size and Quantity) Splice Enclosure Outgoing Backbone Cable Enclosure Shall be Sealed and Encapsulated Using Re -Enterable Compound Outgoing Backbone Cable Drop Cable From ITS Field Equipment 50 Ft. Slack for Each Cable Going to or From Splice Enclosure. Splice Enclosure 0 Incoming Outgoing Backbone Cable Backbone Cable Drop Cable From I❑ITS Field Equipment Step 1 ❑ Step 3 Tag Cables and Secure With Cable Straps (See Detail "A") 0 Incoming Backbone Cable Secure Splice Enclosure to Cable Storage Rack Assembly Opposite Cable Slack Outgoing Backbone Cable Drop Cable From ITS Field Equipment Splice Procedure Steps Step 2 Step 4 Incoming Backbone Cable Caution Fiber Optic Cable 0 —1 Detail "A" Incoming Backbone Cable Secure Slack Cable to Cable Storage Rack Assembly Inside Ground Box (See Type 1 and 2 Ground Box Detail) See Note 10 Fiber Optic Cable Tag Panduit Inc. No. PST-FO Hellerman-Tyton No. CST2003x2 Self -Lam Tag or Approved Equal I J Underground Cable Storage Rack Assemblies (See iTS(37)) (See iTS(39)) ITS Conduit (See Plans for Type, Size, and Quantity) • J Slack Cables are to be Coiled and Placed Inside Ground Box on Cable Storage Rack Assemblies { Backbone Fiber ITS Conduit (See Plans for Type, Size and Quantity) Maintain Minimum Bending Radius (See Note 3) * Coil 25 Ft of Fiber Type "1" Ground Box optic Cable for Slack Underground Cable - Storage Rack Assemblies (See ITS(37)) (See ITS(39)) Backbone Fiber iTS Conduit (See Plans for Type, Size, and Quantity) Maintain Minimum Bending Radius (See Note 3) J Fiber Optic Drop Cable from ITS Field Equipment Branch Conduit (See Plans for Type, Size and Quantity) Fiber Optic Drop Cable from ITS Field Equipment Type "2" Ground Box with Splice Branch Conduit (See Plans for Type, Size and Quantity) Splice Enclosure Secured to inside Wall Cable Rack by Set of J-Hooks ITS Conduit (See Plans for Type, Size, and Quantity) eL Backbone Fiber Slack Cables are to be Coiled and Placed inside Ground Box on Cable Storage Rack Assemblies * Coil 100 Ft of Each Type of Fiber Optic Cable Entering the Ground Box Round Ports for Single Cable (See Table Below) End Cap of the Canister Splice Enclosure w/ Re -enterable Quick -Seal Entry Parts Length Varies by Enclosure Size Mechanical Dome -To -Base Seal Storage Tray for Expressed Fibers Splice Organizer Trays (Number Varies by Enclosure Size) Splice Enclosure Sizes Type No. of Ports Port Capacity Fiber Use 1 4 2 - Up to 144 Sm Backbone 2 - Up to48Sm Drop 2 6 4 - Up to 144 Sm Backbone/Arterial 2 - Up to 48 Sm Drop 3 8 4 - Up to 144 Sm Backbone/Arterial 4 - Up to 48 Sm Drop Splice Enclosure Fiber Accommodations SHEET 2 OF 2 General Notes: 1. Conduit entry points to the Type 1 and Type 2 ground boxes are diagrammatic. Refer to iTS ground box standards, ITS(37) and ITS(39), for more information. Additional conduits may be required as shown on the plans. 2. Type 2 ground boxes are to be used, as shown on the plans, when splice enclosures are required. 3. Maintain a minimum bend radius of 20 times the fiber optic cable diameter during installation, relocation, and removal and a minimum of 10 times the fiber optic cable diameter when in operation. 4. Caulk all conduit around the top of the cable ducts with an engineer approved caulking compound to seal clearance between the cables and ducts. Place conduit plugs in all vacant conduits or inner -ducts. 5. Provide cable straps that will withstand ultra -violet exposure and do not damage cables when tightening. 6. All incidental equipment necessary for the cable installation and mounting of splice enclosure within the ground box will be incidental to Special Specification, "ITS Fiber Optic Cable." 7. Submit all splice locations to the field engineer for approval before beginning work. 8. Provide splice enclosures designed to seal, bond, anchor, and protect fiber optic cable splices. Provide splice enclosures designed to handle mechanical and fusion type splices. Provide splice enclosures with port configurations for the sizes detailed above. 9. Provide splice enclosures designed for underground placement with a sealing system preventing water penetration when submerged under ID ft. of water. 10. Furnish, install, and secure fiber optic cable tags for each fiber optic cable entering a ground box, ITS field equipment cabinet (ground and pole), and hub building or communication node as detailed above. Provide information including fiber optic type, count, origin, and destination on the cable tag. Use UV resistant tie -wraps for securing the tag to the cable. Provide tie -wraps that do not damage fiber when securing to cable. ,Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division Standard ITS FIBER OPTIC CABLE MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS ITS(43)-16 NU. its(43)-16.dgn ©TxDOT FEBRUARY 2016 �CK: SECT JOB DN: TxDOT TxDO T Dw� TxDOT cK� TxDOT CONT HIGHWAY Sheet Details Not to Scale REVISIONS DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 55 7RR 1 0, cai ON TU are 0E . O o�� 3N 2nv .emu d a2 o do uE ;LO oOm 21- m o 0o: c- u ,!1;;:-.Da ooc_ 0/ D „:_di 26, --.-. 0 o n_1 na 9 c5` d 02 0 wO a �Oo ox �~D a.y n V c N toLv omal 01vc 3c9U W / 1- v 0 w -p a 0 J U !• n o c 0 a 0 a 0 L NI 0, Ncci Ina 00 o/ 0 N N U O (V OL rob: CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flogs - See note 1) Chonnelizing Devices (See note 2) A Channelizing devices moy be omitted if the work area is o minimum of 30' from the nearest traveled way. — Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating or strobe lights. (See notes 4 & 5) Channelizing Devices (See note 2) ■ • a ■ ■ .c0 rn TCP (1-1a) rn A m 0 0 a octn 0 E 0 m 0 0 0 M CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flags - See notes 1 & 7) WORK SPACE NEAR SHOULDER Conventionol Roads CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flags - See note 1) Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rotating, floshing, oscillating or strobe lights. (See notes 4 & 5) END ROAD WORK G20-2 48" X 24" (See note 2) Chonnelizing Devices (See note 2) A I 43 I In ■ ■ • END ROAD WORK 7(G20-2 48" X 24" See note 2) A Chonnelizing - Devices (See note 2) N oS ovac 01e OwoN >- ar o i O N A ♦ ♦ Y ■ m c ■ " x .8 TCP (1-1b) • A c 0 0) 0. ne 0 m -J M v A 0 a. E 0 CW20-10 48" X 48" (Flogs - See notes 1 & 7) WORK SPACE ON SHOULDER Conventional Roads Channelizing Devices (See note 2) A CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flogs - See note 1) 0 m 0 Work vehicles or other equipment necessary for the work operotion, such as trucks, moveable crones, etc., shall remain in areas separated from lanes of traffic by chonnelizotion devices of olI times. Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating or strobe lights. (See notes 4 & 5) Chonnelizing Devices (See note 2) END ROAD WORK G20-2 48" X 24" (See note 2) A TCP (1-1c) END ROAD WORK G20-2 48" X „ (See note242) A Inactive work vehicle Ion (See Note 3) 0 a. 0 3 J M r0n m 0 a. E 0 u) .0 E 0 m m 0 0 WORK VEHICLES ON SHOULDER Conventionol Roads 0I J , >I 3, of JI LEGEND Type 3 Borricode - • • Chonnelizing Devices ® —9 Heavy Work Vehicle Truck Mounted Attenuotor (TMA) r I--tl1 ® iti Trailer Mounted Flashing Arrow Board M I Portable Chongeoble Messoge Sign (PCMS) i Sign .::::1 Troffic Flow Flog 0-0 Flogger Posted Speed x Formula Minimum Desirable Toper Lengths x x Suggested Maximum Spacing of Channelizing Devices Minimum Sign Spacing „„ Distance Suggested Longitudinal Buffer Space ..8,. 10' Offset 11' Offset 12' Offset 0n a Toper On a Tangent 30 W52 150' 165' 180' 30' 60' 120' 90' 35 205' 225' 245' 35' 70' 160' 120' L- 60 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' 240' 155' 45 L W S 450' 495' 540' 45' 90' 320' 195' 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 400' 240' 55 550' 605' 660' 55' 110' 500' 295' 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 120' 600' 350' 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 700' 410' 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' 800' 475' 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 900' 540' x Conventionol Roods Only x x Toper lengths hove been rounded off. L-Length of Taper(FT) W-Width of Offset(FT) S-Posted Speed(MPH) TYPICAL USAGE MOBILE SHORT DURATION SHORT TERM STATIONARY INTERMEDIATE TERM STATIONARY LONG TERM STATIONARY J GENERAL NOTES 1. Flags ottoched to signs where shown ore REQUIRED. 2. All traffic controldevices illustrated are REQUIRED, except those denoted with the triangle symbol may be omitted when stoted elsewhere in the plans. or for routine maintenance work, when approved by the Engineer. 3. Inactive work vehicles or other equipment should be parked near the right-of-way line and not parked on the paved shoulder. 4. A Shadow Vehicle with a TMA should be used anytime it con be positioned 30 to 100 feet in advance of the area of crew exposure without adversely offecting the performance or quality of the work. If workers ore no longer present but road or work conditions require the traffic control to remain in place, Type 3 Borricodes or other chonnelizing devices may be substituted for the Shadow Vehicle and TMA. 5. AdditionalShodow Vehicles with TMAs moy be positioned off the paved surface, next to those shown in order to protect wider work spaces. 6. See TCP(5-1)for shoulder work on divided highways, expresswoys and freeways. 7. CW21-5 "SHOULDER WORK" signs may be used in place of CW20-10 "ROAD WORK AHEAD' signs for shoulder work on conventional roadways. For construction or maintenance controct work, specific project requirements for shadow vehicles con be found in the project GENERAL NOTES for Item 502, Barricades, Signs and Troffic Hondling. CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flags - See notes 1 & 7) ;4-Texas Deportment of Transportation Troffic Operations Division TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN CONVENTIONAL ROAD SHOULDER WORK TCP(1-1)-12 ©TxDOT December 1985 DN. TXDOT JCK: TXDOT IDW: TXDOT ICK: TXDOT 2-94 2-12 8-95 1-97 4-98 REVISIONS CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. HOU BRAZORIA 56 151 1 v , TjU ot� >•oE 0 — rn 3 z00 - • 0 ace O▪ NO 0•om 0' do: cxu W w u 0 u ▪ r. oNc H L o >.0. 0 oE .00.o N, O Cioa ox- o>y 0 017 c 0 OLD omol dv ca 0 0 a / 0 & 0 W 0 � G • 0 J U (n • c 0 • 5) 0 0. z 1- 0 N 0 0 0 0 a I 0 0 (.1 0 a) Loco Loo 0o too)O o/ •-- co 0 N to N V ON 0 r') L,- Worning Sign Sequence in Opposite Direction Some as Below R1-2 42' X 42 " X 42" R1-2oP 48" X 36" (See note 8) Chonnelizing devices separate work space from traveled way 1 ■ ■ ■ TCP (1-2a) 0 0) 0 Y 0 0n ONE LANE TWO-WAY END ROAD WORK G20-2 48" X 24" Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rototing, flashing, oscillating or strobe lights.(See notes 5 & 6) YIELD TO ONCOMING TRAFFIC CONTROL WITH YIELD SIGNS (Less than 2000 ADT - See note 7) R1-2 42' X 42 " X 42' R1-2oP 48" X 36" 'See note 8) CW3-2 48" X 48" CW20-4D 48" X 48" CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flags - See note 1) CW3-4 48" X 48" (See note 2) CW16-2P 24" X 18" (See note 2) A Except in emergencies. flogger stations shall be illuminated of night Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rotating, floshing, oscillating or strobe lights. (See notes 5 & 6) Except in emergencies, flogger stations sholl be illuminoted at night END ROAD WORK G20-2 48" X 24" CW20-4D 48" X 48" CW20-7 48" X 48" CW16-2P 24" X 18" (See note 2) CW3-4 48" X 48" (See note 2) CW20-4D 48" X 48" CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flogs - See note 1) TCP (1-2b) ONE LANE TWO-WAY CONTROL WITH FLAGGERS CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flags - See note 1) END ROAD WORK G20-2 48" X 24" LEGEND Type 3 Barricade • • Chonnelizing Devices ® I—fl}9 � �N� Heavy Work Vehicle Truck Mounted Attenuotor (TMA) ® iiiiTrailer Mounted Floshing Arrow Board M 1 Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS) i Sign G] Traffic Flow Q Flog F agger Posted Speed x Formula Minimum Desiroble Toper Lengths x x Suggested Maximum Spacing of Chonnelizing Devices Minimum Sign Spacing „. Distance Suggested Longitudinal 9 Buffer Spoce Stopping Sight Distance 10' Offset 11' Offset 12' Offset On o Toper On a Tangent 30 WS2 150' 165' 180' 30' 60' 120' 90' 200' 35 205' 225' 245' 35' 70' 160' 120' 250' L. 60 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' 240' 155' 305' 45 L W S 450' 495' 540' 45' 90' 320' 195' 360' 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 400' , 240' 425' 55 550' 605' 660' 55' 110' 500' 295' 495' 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 120' 600' 350' 570' 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 700' 410' 645' 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' 800' 475' 730' 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 900' 540' 820' x Conventionol Roods Only x x Toper lengths hove been rounded off. L-Length of Toper(FT) W-Width of Offset(FT) S-Posted Speed(MPH) TYPICAL USAGE MOBILE SHORT DURATION SHORT TERM STATIONARY INTERMEDIATE TERM STATIONARY LONG TERM STATIONARY 1 d GENERAL NOTES 1. Flogs attached to signs where shown ore REQUIRED. 2. All traffic controldevices illustrated ore REQUIRED, except those denoted with the triongle symbol may be omitted when stated elsewhere in the plans, or for routine maintenance work. when opproved by the Engineer. 3. The CW3-4 "BE PREPARED TO STOP" sign may be installed after the CW20-4D "ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD" sign. but proper sign spacing shall be maintained. 4.Sign spacing may be increosed or on additionalCW20-ID "ROAD WORK AHEAD" sign may be used if advance warning ahead of the flogger or R1-2 "YIELD" sign is less thon 1500 feet. 5. A Shadow Vehicle with a TMA should be used anytime it con be positioned 30 to 100 feet in advance of the area of crew exposure without adversely effecting the performonce or quolity of the work. If workers are no longer present but rood or work conditions require the traffic control to remain in place, Type 3 Barricades or other chonnelizing devices may be substituted for the Shadow Vehicle and TMA. 6. Additional Shadow Vehicles with TMAs may be positioned off the poved surface, next to those shown in order to protect wider work spaces. TCP (1-2a) 7. R1-2 "YIELD" sign traffic control may be used on projects with opprooches that hove adequate sight distonce. For projects in urbon areas, work spaces should be no longer thon one half city block. In rural oreos on roodways with less than 2000 ADT, work spaces should be no longer than 400 feet. 8. R1-2 "YIELD" sign with R1-2oP "TO ONCOMING TRAFFIC" plaque shallbe ploced on o support of o 7 foot minimum mounting height. TCP (1-2b) 9. Flaggers should use two-way radios or other methods of communication to control traffic. 10. Length of work space should be bosed on the ability of floggers to communicate. 11.If the work space is located near a horizontal or vertical curve, the buffer distances should be increased in order to maintain adequate stopping sight distance to the flogger and o queue of stopped vehicles (see table above). 12. Chonnelizing devices on the center -line may be omitted when a pilot car is lending traffic and approved by the Engineer. 13. Flaggers should use 24" STOP/SLOW puddles to control trof tic. Flags should be limited to emergency situations. For construction or mointenonce controct work, specific project requirements for shadow vehicles con be found in the project GENERAL NOTES for Item 502, Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling. pr-Texos Deportment of Tronsportotlon Traffic Operations Division TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ONE -LANE TWO-WAY TRAFFIC CONTROL TCP(1-2)-12 ©TXDDT December 1985 DN: TXDOT ICK: TXDOT IOW: TXDOT Icw: 1XDOT REVISIONS CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY 4-90 2-12 2-94 1-97 DIST COUNTY SHEET N0. 4-98 HOU BRAZORIA 57 1S7 cy O T0 yoE a, 25 taw - N o ¢coo 0E ono aom a.,od '� 15 Wo 0 a o x 1A'- �oo - a- >'a00 aE aw g. cc� wad .00a v � co >` o c N N � N� ▪ of omol S V c Q L o w -p • c a o • (n 8cn cn cn 0 a L a) cn ¢_ co 'no 00 M 0O o/ cv N m N 0'V^ CV o t, CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flogs - See note 1) x for 50 mph or less Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rotating, floshing, oscillating or strobe lights.(See notes 4 & 5) G20-2 48" X 24" J= 414 ■ • • • • • • • • it• • ♦♦ 4� 4 TCP (1-4a) w tn END ROAD WORK &G20-2 i i ONE LANE CLOSED 0 m J A A 48" X 24" W20-5TR 48" X 48" CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flogs - See note 1) CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flogs - See note 1) CW20-5TL 48" X 48" Shadow Vehicle with TMA and high intensity rotating, floshing, oscillating or strobe lights.(See notes 4 & 5) G20-2 48" X 24" TCP (1-4b) TWO LANES CLOSED END (ROAD WORK G20-2 48" X 24" CW1-4R 48" X 48" CW13-1P 24" X 24" (See note 2) A CW1-6aT 36" X 36" (See note 2) A CW1-4L 48" X 48" X X CW13-1P MPH 24" X 24" (See note 2) CW20-5TR 48" X 48" CW20-1D 48" X 48" (Flogs - See note 1) LEGEND Type 3 Borricode • • Chonnelizing Devices ® HeavyWork Vehicle At uckMounted Tnal Attenuotor (TMA) ® Trailer Mounted Flashing Arrow Boord M Portable Changeable Messoge Sign (PCMS) i Sign '3 Traffic Flow Flog Flogger Posted Speed x Formula Minimum Desirable Toper Lengths x x Suggested Maximum Spacing of p g chonnelizing Devices Minimum Sign S poXng Distance Suggested Longitudinal Buffer Space "8" 10' Offset 11' Offset 12' Offset On a Toper On a Tangent 30 WS2 150' 165' 180' 30' 60' 120' 90' 35 205' 225' 245' 35' 70' 160' 120' L- 60 40 265' 295' 320' 40' 80' 240' 155' 45 L W S 450' 495' 540' 45' 90' 320' 195' 50 500' 550' 600' 50' 100' 400' 240' 55 550' 605' 660' 55' 110' 500' 295' 60 600' 660' 720' 60' 120' 600' 350' 65 650' 715' 780' 65' 130' 700' 410' 70 700' 770' 840' 70' 140' 800' 475' 75 750' 825' 900' 75' 150' 900' 540' x Conventional Roods Only ax Taper lengths hove been rounded off. L•Length of Toper(FT) W-Width of Offset(FT) S-Posted Speed(MPH) TYPICAL USAGE MOBILE SHORT DURATION SHORT TERM STATIONARY INTERMEDIATE TERM STATIONARY LONG TERM STATIONARY i GENERAL NOTES 1. Flogs attached to signs where shown ore REQUIRED. 2. MI traffic controldevices illustrated ore REQUIRED, except those denoted with the triangle symbol may be omitted when stated elsewhere in the plans, or for routine mointenonce work, when approved by the Engineer. 3. The CW20-1D "ROAD WORK AHEAD" sign may be repeoted if the visibility of the work zone is less thon 1500 feet. 4. A Shadow Vehicle with a TMA should be used anytime it can be positioned 30 to 100 feet in advonce of the area of crew exposure without adversely affecting the performance or quality of the work. If workers are no longer present but road or work conditions require the traffic control to remain in place, Type 3 Borricodes or other chonnelizing devices may be substituted for the Shodow Vehicle and TMA. 5. AdditionalShodow Vehicles with TMAs may be positioned off the paved surfoce, next to those shown in order to protect wider work spaces. TCP (1-4o) 6.1( this TCP is used for a left lone closure , CW20-5TL "LEFT LANE CLOSED" signs shall be used and chonnelizing devices shall be placed on the centerline where needed to protect the work space from opposing traffic with the orrow ponelplaced in the closed lone near the end of the merging toper. TCP (1-4b) 7. Where traffic is directed over o yellow centerline, chonnelizing devices which separate two-way troffic should be spaced on tapers at 20'or 15' if posted speeds are 35 mph or slower, and for tongent sections, of 1/2S where S is the speed in mph. This tighter device spocing is intended for the oreas of conflicting morkings, not the entire work zone. For construction or mointenonce contract work, specific project requirements for shadow vehicles can be found in the project GENERAL NOTES for Item 502, Borricodes, Signs and Traffic Handling. Texas Department of Transportation Traffic Operations Division TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN LANE CLOSURES ON MULTILANE CONVENTIONAL ROADS TCP(1-4)-12 © TxDOT December 1985 DN: TXDOT 10' TXDOT DM MOT I CS: MOT 2-94 2-12 8-95 1-97 4-98 REVISIONS CONT SECT JOB HIGHWAY DIST COUNTY SHEET NO. HOU BRAZORIA 58 154